ProDesign ME

ProDesign ME
SOFTWARE
User Guide
Version 2021
Revision A
August 2021
Legal Notices
Cor por ate Office

Trimble Inc.
935 Stewart Drive
Sunnyvale,CA94085
USA
www.trimble.com
Am tech
Cygna House,3 Opal Drive,
Milton Keynes,MK15 0DF,
England
Legal Notices
© 2021,Trimble Inc. All rights reserved.
Trimble,the Globe & Triangle logo,are trademarks of Trimble
Inc.,registered in the United States and in other countries.
Amtech is a trademark of Trimble Inc.
Microsoft,Windows,and Windows 10 are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Release Notice
This is the August 2021 release (Revision A) of the ProDesign
MESoftware User Guide. It applies to version 2021 of the
ProDesign MEsoftware.
Pr oduct Lim ited War r anty Infor m ation

For applicable product Limited Warranty information,please
refer to the EULAincluded with this Trimble product,or
consult your local Trimble authorized dealer.
ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 2

Contents
Contents 3
3 Installation 12
Prerequisites 12
System requirements 12
Computer (desktop or laptop) 12
Operating systems 12
Installation procedure 13
Activating the software 14
How do I activate the software? 14
Do I have to activate all my programs separately? 17
Deactivating the software 17
4 Trimble ID Login 18
What are Trimble Services? 20
Creating an account 21
Login In 21
Log out 21
5 The Ribbon Menu 22

Home tab 23
Construction tab 23
Calculation tab 23
Reports tab 24
Import/Export tab 24
6 Docking/Floating and Quick Access toolbars 25

Docking/Floating toolbars 25
Quick Access toolbar 26
Notifications 27
Component Properties 27
Before a project calculation 28
After a project calculation 30
Document Properties 31
Toolbox 33
Find Item tool 34

Contents
Search 35
Properties 35
Files 35
Filters 35
By Phase 36
Templates Navigator tool 36
Templates Navigator button 37
Creating a template 38
Editing a template 41
Placing a template 41
Placing a template in an existing component 42
Exchange of Templates between ProDesign Versions 42
Protection Study 44
Performing a Protection Study and Displaying the Graph 44
Graph Navigation 44
Additional Buttons 46
Selecting a Device 46
Selecting Graph Views 46
Setting Devices 47
Graphical Selectivity 48
Graphical Energy Let-through 48
‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ View 50
‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ View 51
Withstand Data Panel 52
Cable Withstand Data Calculations 52
7 Home Tab 54
New 56
New Project panel 56
Template 56
Reference 56
Job No. 57
Document No. 57
Created By 57
Created On 57
Regulatory Authority 57
Open 58
Recent 58

Contents
Computer 58
Trimble Connect 59
Save As 59
Computer 59
Trimble Connect 59
Application Settings 59
Drawing 59
Logo 60
Cloud Settings 61
Selectivity Check 61
Auto Save 61
Check for Updates 61
Templates 63
Messages 63
Support 65
PremierCare technical support 67
Help 68
Help Topics 69
View Manual 69
Model Calculations 69
System Info 69
8 Construction Tab 70
Supply group 71
Source Settings 72
Supply 72
Transformer 72
Generator 73
UPS(Uninterruptible Power Supply) 73
Supply Settings 74
Transformer 91
Generator 97
UPS 104
Cable group 114
Cable Data Entry 114
Cable 115
Connection 122
Grouping 124

Contents
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in air 125

Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in ground 127
CPC 133
Protection 136
Display Results 144
Comments 144
Attachments 145
Busbars group 146
Busbar 146
Centre Feed Unit 147
End Feed Unit 147
Tap Off Unit 148
Busbar Settings 148
Centre Feed 156
End Feed 158
Tap Off 160
Loads group 162
Main Dialog Area Settings – Motor and Non-Motor Loads 162
Lighting Columns 178
Boards group 182
Switchboard 182
Distribution Board 195
Distribution Board ME 204
Consumer Unit 221
Other group 226
Power Factor Correction Settings 227
Junction Box 230
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Settings 232
Auto Transfer Switch 234
Annotation group 241
Text 241
Line 241
Text in Box 241
Circle 241
Arrow 241
Image 241
Symbol 241
Box 242

Contents
Note 242
General group 243
Cut 243
Copy 243
Paste 243
Delete 243
Undo 243
Redo 243
Settings Group 244
Project Settings 244
Data Entry 282
9 Calculations Tab 290

Calculate 292
Calculating the project 292
Errors and Warnings 293
ProDesign ME 293
Errors and warning messages 293
List of Notes, Error and Warning Messages 295
Warning Messages 305
Notes 307
Selectivity Check 309
Energy-based Selectivity Check 310
Time-Current Selectivity Check 311
Selectivity Check dialog 314
Protection Study 315
Performing a Protection Study and Displaying the Graph 315
Graph Navigation 315
Additional Buttons 317
Selecting a Device 317
Selecting Graph Views 317
Setting Devices 318
Graphical Selectivity 319
Graphical Energy Let-through 319
‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ View 321
‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ View 322
Withstand Data Panel 323
Cable Withstand Data Calculations 323

Contents
Cable Sizing 325

Installed in Air 326
Cable Rating Data 326
Installation Methods 326
Rating Factors 327
Ambient Temperature Rating Factor (Ca) 327
Thermal Insulation Factor (Ci) 328
Semi-enclosed Fuse BS3036 Factor (Cf) 328
Harmonic Rating Factor (Ch) 328
Grouping Rating Factor (Cg) 328
Grouping Arrangements: Touching/Spaced 328
Total circuits in group 329
Cables in parallel 330
Determination of required cable size 332
Simultaneous Overload 333
Installed in Ground 333
Motor Circuits 334
Busbar Sizing 337
Busbar Data 337
Busbar Ratings 337
Derating Factors 337
Diversity at Tap Off 337
Sizing Calculations 338
Voltage Drop Requirements 339
Voltage Drop Calculations 339
Voltage Drop Limits 340
Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits 341
Initial voltage drop allocation 342
Voltage drop assessment 342
User intervention 343
Radial Lighting Circuits 344
Motor Starting Voltage Drop 345
Phase Fault Calculations 346
Calculation Method 346
Breaking Capacity Check 348
Line Conductor Adiabatic Check 350
Busbar Fault Rating 351
Earth Fault Calculations 353

Contents
Purpose of Earth Fault Calculations 353

Earth Fault Current 353
Earth Fault Loop Impedance 354
Earth Fault Disconnection 355
Earthing Arrangements 355
Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance 358
Checking Earth Fault Loop Impedance 359
Additional Protection 360
Disconnection using earth fault protection 360
Earth Fault Adiabatic Calculation 360
Purpose of calculation 360
Description of Calculation 361
CPC Cable Equivalent Section 361
Table 54.7 362
Impedance Matrices 363
Zbus Viewer 364
Harmonics 368
Multi-core Cables and Busbars 368
Harmonic Current and Neutral Protection 369
Single-core cables 369
Accumulation of Harmonic Loads 370
Diversity 372
Diversity Example 372
Displaying device characteristics 374
Source Calculations 375
REC Supply Fault Level Calculator 375
TT Calculation Requirements 376
TT Supply Fault Level Calculator 376
Identical Parallel Supplies 379
10 Reports Tab 381

Last Report 382
Reports 383
Viewing and printing 383
Document Control 383
Custom Reports 385
Producing reports 385
Creating a report template 387

Contents
Changing the field order 387

Logo 388
Show Logo on Schematic 388
Show Logo on Reports 388
Choose New Logo 389
Open Logo Editor 389
Revert to Default 389
Quick Results 389
Displaying Quick Results 389
Fields 390
Display Results 392
Setting Display Results 392
Setting Display Results Properties 393
Setting Results to be displayed 395
Full Reports 396
Viewing and Printing 396
Document Control 397
Source Details report 397
Transformer report 399
Generator Details report 400
UPSDetails (Source Only) Report 401
Distribution Board report 403
Distribution Board Schedule 404
Modular Distribution Board Report 406
Modular Distribution Board Report 408
Consumer Unit Report 409
Consumer Unit Schedule 410
Switchboard report 412
Switchboard Schedule 413
Cable Calculation 414
Cable Analysis 426
Cable Schedule 433
Busbar Summary 434
Busbar Calculation 435
Busbar Schedule 438
Loads Summary 439
Loads Schedule 440
Loads Analysis 441

Contents
Street Lighting Schedule 441

Surge Protective Device Schedule 442
Circuit Chart 442
Protective Device Settings 443
Protective Device Commissioning 444
Energy-based Selectivity 446
Time-Current Selectivity 447
Voltage Drop – Circuits 448
Voltage Drop – Loads 449
Voltage Drop – Max Length for Voltage Drop 450
Zs Measurement 451
Cable Energy Loss 453
Motor Starting Voltage Drop Assessment 453
Harmonic Assessment 454
Notes 454
11 Import/Export tab 456

Revit group 457
Configure Revit Link in ProDesign 457
Import group 459
Import from FastTest 459
Import from eloCAD 459
Import Legacy Project 459
Export group 460
Export to Protect 460
Export to FastTest 461
Export to Image 461
Export to DXF 461
Export MESchedules 462
Other group 466
Pack 466
Unpack 466
Send 466
12 FAQs 467
13 Glossary 477
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT 485

3
Installation
Prerequisites
l An NTFSfile system must be used (not FAT32)
l The Trimble product suite cannot be installed to a compressed drive
l All antivirus and firewall security software must be disabled before installation
Trimble recommends applying the latest Microsoft ® operating system service packs and
patches before installing the software.
System requirements
These specifications refer to the minimum specifications across the range of software
applications.
Computer (desktop or laptop)

Minimum computer and system requirements are:
l Intel Core i3 processor (2.0 GHz processor) or equivalent
l 4 GB RAM (recommended 4 GB)
l 1.5 GB free hard disk space
l Mouse
l Monitor: 1024 x 768 resolution – minimum 256 colours (recommended 1280 x 1024)
Operating systems
The following operating systems are supported on a desktop computer or laptop. Please
make sure that you have all the latest updates applied :
l Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium, SP1 or above (32- or 64-bit)
l Microsoft Windows 8.1 (all editions excluding RT) or above (32- or 64-bit)

3 Installation
l Microsoft Windows 10, version 1607 and above (32- or 64-bit).
Installation procedure
First, ensure that the Microsoft Windows operating system is already installed on your
computer. You need your latest Trimble licence number.
To install from a download:
1. Ensure that you have administrator rights for the computer you are installing the
software on.
2. Before starting the installation, close all open applications including any virus checkers
that may be running.
3. Download the Trimble installer using the link provided in the licensing email. Save the
file to your computer.
4. Double-click on the downloaded file to extract the installation files.
The setup should automatically start.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE– The program should be saved in the default location and not in the
Program Files folder.
To install from a DVD:

1. Ensure that you have administrator rights for the computer you are installing the
software on.
2. Before starting the installation, close all open applications including any virus checkers
that may be running.
3. Insert the Trimble DVD into the disk drive on your computer.
4. The setup should automatically start.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE– The program should be saved in the default location and not in the
Program Files folder.

3 Installation
Activating the software

The software is sold as a single user, single installation licence unless otherwise specified in
your licence agreement. The software may be installed and activated on a single computer.
Multi-user licence agreements will enable the software to be installed and activated on the
specified number of computers.
The software is protected and requires activation before unrestricted use. Before
activation there will be full functionality, but the message DEMONSTRATION ONLY will be
printed on all documents.
You will receive reminders to activate the software, however after 30 days, the software
must be activated.
NOTE– Trimble MEP Mobile programs, such as FastTest Mobile and GasCert Mobile,
do not require activating.
How do I activate the software?

Activating your new software is a two-step process:
Step 1 – Send a request code to Trimble MEP

The preferred method of activation is to use the REQUEST ACTIVATION CODEbutton,
which sends your request code electronically to Trimble MEP. An email auto-responder
checks to ensure that your company is the registered purchaser of the software and that
there is a user licence available. The auto-responder operates 24 hours a day seven days
per week, giving prompt response any time of day.
The Activate dialog may appear at start-up and various other times indicating how many
days you have left.
If the dialog does not appear automatically, then access it by going to the Support menu
and selecting Activate program.

3 Installation

3 Installation
Click ‘REQUEST ACTIVATION CODE.
Enter your email address and then click OK. An activation request will be sent via the
Internet. The email response from Trimble MEP will be sent to the address entered on the
Activation Request dialog.
Users who are unable to activate electronically can call the Activation Hotline on 0871 220
8880 (during office hours only). The number is displayed on the Activation dialog. An
Trimble MEP representative will undertake the security checks manually then, if
appropriate, authorise and issue an unlock code.
Please note that this manual activation process may take several minutes. We strongly
suggest that you use the email method if possible as the process of dictating and
recording a long code by phone is open to transcription errors.
Please do not contact Trimble MEP Support or Trimble MEP Sales regarding activation or
de-activation as they are unable to process these requests.
Telephone calls are recorded to help prevent fraud.

3 Installation
Step 2 – Receive the activation code and activate your software

Check your email inbox. When you receive the activation code, you must enter this into the
lower box. Use copy and paste functions if possible to eliminate transcription errors.
If you have received your activation code by phone, accurately enter it into the lower box.
The majority of the support problems relating to Activation are due to incorrectly recorded
or mistyped activation codes.
Click Activate Now to complete the process.
Do I have to activate all my programs separately?

No. You only have to activate one program in a suite of software. For example, if you have
installed Amtech Office you will only need to perform activation in one of the programs (it
doesn't matter which) in order to activate the full suite.
If, however you have more than one suite of software you will need to activate each suite,
e.g. Amtech Office and ProDesign 200.
Deactivating the software

From time to time, a deactivation may be required (for example, when transferring the
software from one machine to another (Single User Licence)).
If this is the situation, please follow the procedure outlined below:
1. Make sure the data is backed up from the original machine.
2. Install the software onto the new machine (but do not attempt activation at this point).
3. Transfer the backed up data from the original machine to the new machine.
4. Open the software and use File / Restore to restore the data from the original
machine.
5. Contact the Activations team on 0871 220 8880. They will assist you in deactivating the
software on your old machine.
This will allow you to reactivate the software on the new machine.

4
Trimble ID Login
When you first open the ProDesign software, your default browser opens and you are
promoted to sign into the Trimble Login Screen. Please be aware that the login screen is
branded "ProDesign" for ProDesign, SingleCable and Protect as they are part of the"
Trimble ProDesign Electrical Designer" suite of applications.
If you do not want to create an account at this time, please close the browser window.
Please be aware that if you do not log in, you will receive a further window within the
application.

4 Trimble ID Login
Additionally, it is not possible to access files through Trimble Connect unless you are
logged in which case the following window will appear.

4 Trimble ID Login
NOTE– If you do not create an account, you will not be able to use Trimble Services
such as the Calculation Service.
What are Trimble Services?

ProDesign is moving towards being a cloud-based service application within all our
software. This is to help ensure that you have access to the latest updates of the software
without needing to install a new version or patch for the software. If you don’t want to want
to use the new Trimble Services and instead want to use the local calculation, see
Application Setting \ Calculation.

4 Trimble ID Login
NOTE– You will only have access to the service calculation if you are within your
Premier Care support contract or other approved licensing model.
Creating an account
Select Create an account. Fill in your details and follow the on-screen instructions. It is also
possible to sign in with Google and Apple authentication.
Login In
Enter your email address and password (or use Google / Apple authentication) and then
click Sign In.
Once you are signed in, note that your user name appears in the toolbar to confirm you
are signed in. You will also have access to Trimble Connect.
Log out
To log out of the Trimble ID, select your user name or the downward arrow as shown
above. This displays your user email address and a Sign Out button. Click Sign Out.

5
The Ribbon Menu
The software has a Ribbon menu and a Docking/Floating toolbars system.
These are the menus available at the top of the screen. The ribbon tabs are Home,
Construction, Calculation, Reports,Import/Export.
TIP – You can hide the Construction, Calculation, Reports, and Import/Export tabs
when they are not in use. To do this, select the arrow symbol in the top right
corner of the program window. If the arrow is pointing to the top of the screen, the
ribbon menu is always displayed. If it is pointing down, the ribbon menu will be
hidden unless you selected the headers identified above.

5 The Ribbon Menu
Home tab
For more information, see the Home Tab, page 54.
Construction tab
For more information, see Construction Tab, page 70.
Calculation tab
For more information, see Calculations Tab, page 290.

5 The Ribbon Menu
Reports tab
For more information, see Reports Tab, page 381.
Import/Export tab
For more information, see Import/Export tab, page 456.

6
Docking/Floating and Quick
Access toolbars
Docking/Floating toolbars
The Docking / Floating toolbars are a new function in the ProDesign software. The toolbars
can be docked or floating. For more details on each tool, see the following links:
Component Properties
Document Properties
Toolbox
Find Item
Templates Navigator
Protection Study
Error message
Data Entry

6 Docking/Floating and Quick Access toolbars
All the toolbars above can be docked on any side of the screen below the ProDesign
ribbon (top, left, right, or bottom of the screen). The recommended screen layout is:
The toolbar layout can be changed by either right-clicking on the icon or the toolbar text.
The following shortcut menu appears:
To change the toolbar display method, select the required option from the shortcut menu.
If you want to move the toolbar, select Floating and then move to the require position. If
you need to re-dock the toolbar, click and hold in the toolbar header and then move the
toolbar to the area you wish to dock. The following arrow symbol will appear (the
direction will change depending on the screen location).
Quick Access toolbar
In the top left corner of the software, there are three quick access shortcut icons. These
icons work in the same way as those stated previously. For details on these quick access
shortcuts, see:

l New
l Open
l Save
Notifications
Towards the right of the title bar, there is an indicator icon shaped like a bell - this is the
Notification Centre and notifies users of important information such as available software
updates. It is a good idea to understand this feature - for more information, please take a
look at the Notification Centre section.
Component Properties
The Component Properties tool enables quick access to edit and view component
properties and calculation results.
To access this tool, click .

The Properties toolbar will differ depending on the electrical component that is selected.

Before a project calculation

The following example shows a final circuit property before a project calculation:
For each component type there are data fields that can be edited. They have a white or
dark grey background. Items with a light grey background are data fields that cannot be
edited from this menu.

Some of the fields can be edited, although they need to be edited from the
component main property dialog.

After a project calculation

The following example shows a final circuit property after a project calculation:

If any edits are made to the project, the calculation information will reset and the
message Project requires re-calculation appears.
If the load is not activate in the network, the message Project requires re-calculation
appears. To resolve, check the following:
1. Check that the item is correctly connected to the system.
2. Check that a switch for the component is not open. If it is open, then close the switch and
re-run the calculation to check the results for the component in the property window.
Document Properties
The Document Properties dialog displays the project details for the current active project.
To access this toolbar, click . The Document panel appears:
The following sections are view-only data and cannot be edited from this panel:
l File – The file location of the project.
l Last Saved On – Indicates the date and time that the project was last saved.
l Created In – Indicates what version of the software the project was created in.
l Last Saved In – Indicates what version of the software the project was lasted saved in.
The following sections are editable data and can be edited from this toolbar. You can enter
your own text in these fields:

l Reference
l Job No
l Document No
l Created On
l Comments

Toolbox
The Toolbox pane stores a history of recent components and component template
favourites. To access this toolbar, click :
To view a list, click next Recent Components or Favourites to expand the item. A
list of the components covered under that section appears:
To place these components on the drawing, select the item and place it on the drawing.

Find Item tool

Use the Find Item tool to help find components within the current project or all opened
projects.
To access this tool, click . The following panel appears:
The find function within the toolbar enables you to find a component in a number of
different ways.

Search
Enter all or part of the component name being looked for into this search box. This search
function is an active filter (Component Filter list). As text is entered into the search, the
Component Filter list will start to filter out components that do not match the text string
that is being entered.
Once the selected component is identified in the Component Filter list, right-click on the
component to open the shortcut menu. Two options are available:
l Find zooms out to view the complete project. The selected component to find will then
flash red, yellow, and blue.
If files is set to All Projects and the component you selected to find is not in the current
active project but is in another open project, the software will switch to the project that
the components are in.
l Edit opens the Component dialog.
If files is set to All Projects and the component is not in the current activate project, it is
still possible to edit that component. Though the project window will not switch as it
does in Find.
Properties
You can filter the search in the following ways:
l Name/ ID No – Searches on both the name and ID number.
l Name – Searches on the name assigned to the component.
l ID no – Searches on the ID number.
Files
Allows the search to be filtered either by the current Active Project or to All Opened
Projects.
Filters
Allow the search filter to search only filter on the required component, such as final circuits,
conductors.
This component menu list is accessible by selecting the drop-down arrow. Select the
required component and the Component Filter list below will reduce as shown:

By Phase
This allows the search filter to further filter on the phases of the components. This allows
for the loads to be filtered either by L1,L2, and L3 or by just L1 or L2 or L3. This again
reduces the Component Filter list.
Templates Navigator tool

The Template Navigator tool stores components and displays template that have been
created for use in the ProDesign software.
To access this tool, click :

The default Template Folder location is Application Setting / Templates. To change the
location, see Application Setting / Templates. This location is also where all new templates
are saved to.
Templates Navigator button

Search
The Search filters out all other template types that does not match the text that was
entered into the search box.
NOTE– If the text that is entered into the search box does not match a template in
the folders, the Folder structure will collapse and be filtered out.
Filter
Select a template type from the list. This selection filters out all template types other than
the one selected.
Folder structure
To access a template folder, click next to the folder. The folder opens and shows all the
templates within that folder.

To move a component into different folders in the template folder, click and hold the
selected component and drag it into the required folder location, then release the mouse.
Creating a template
A template can be created in two ways:
1. Using the Template Navigator.
a. Right-click in the Template Navigator space or on a template folder. A shortcut
menu appears. Select Create New Template. The following dialog appears:

b. Select the template type that is required and then assign a name to it.

The template is created in the location where the Create Template option was
selected.
c. To edit this template, see Editing a template below.
2. Templates can be created in existing components.
a. The procedure for creating these template can be seen below for a cable. This
procedure applies for any component template.
b. Open the component dialog and make the required changes:
c. Click Save As in the Template section and assign a name to the template.
d. This will create a template in the Template Navigator that can be edited and moved

into a template folder structure if required.
To move the template to a different folder location, click and hold the selected the
component and drag it into the required folder location. Release the mouse to place it.
Editing a template
To edit a template, double-click on the template or right-click and select Edit. The Template
Editor window will open in the same area as a project drawing would be located.
The Templates Editor contains editable options for the following:
l Standard component dialogs
l Project Setting dialogs
l Colour Setting dialogs
l Custom Report dialogs
Once the required changes to the template are complete, click Save.
NOTE– Once Save is selected, the Revert key will deactivate. This means any changes
made before Save was selected cannot be reverted back to the original template.
NOTE– Not all the component dialog data fields will appear; this is due to them
being project specific and will only be available once placed in a project.
To close the Template window, click (X) in the Window tab.
Placing a template
To use a template from the Template Navigator, do one of the following:

1. Click and drag the template that is required onto the drawing area.
a. If it is a component template, once releasing the left mouse click in the drawing
area, the template component will appear and can be placed by left mouse clicking
again in the required location.
b. If it is a colour setting template, the colour properties will take affect after releasing
the left mouse click.
c. If it is a project template, a New Project dialog appears.
2. Right-clicking on the required template and selecting the required option from the
shortcut menu will apply the template.
a. Added to Schematic for component templates. Once selected, the component
template appears on the drawing area and can be placed by clicking again in the
required location.
b. Apply Colour Settings applies the colour properties of the template.
c. Create as New Project opens a New Project dialog using the project template that
was applied.
TIP – Custom reports cannot be produced as above. They can only be selected from
the list in templates. See custom report.
Placing a template in an existing component

Templates can also be applied into existing components by opening the Component
dialog and using the Template list to select the required template. Click Apply to apply the
template.
NOTE– This overwrites all existing data in the component with the component
template data.
Use the All filter to search through all the component categories, or use the drop-down
arrow to limit the search to a single component category.
Exchange of Templates between ProDesign Versions

MEDistribution Boards templates created in the MEversion are not available in the UK
version.
Project templates created in the MEversion can be opened in the UK with the following
limitations:

l Cable types specific to the MEversion, that is, DEWA cable types will not appear in a
project template created in the MEversion and then opened in the UK version.
l MEtype DBs will be omitted from the templated project.

Protection Study
Protective device characteristics can be viewed and adjusted using the Protection Study
tool. These include overcurrent and earth fault operating characteristics and energy let-
through characteristics. Also shown are the thermal withstand characteristics of circuit
conductors.
The following functions are available within the Protection Study tool:
l Inspection of overcurrent and earth fault time/current characteristics, including
operating time in relation to fault current levels.
l Time/current selectivity.
l Protection setting adjustments.
l Inspection of overcurrent and earth fault energy let-through characteristics, including
comparison with conductor thermal withstand characteristics.
Performing a Protection Study and Displaying the Graph

The Graph can be displayed by:
l The project single-line diagram – Select a component such as Load or Cable and then
click the Protection Study[ ] button on the Calculate toolbar.

l The characteristics of the device protecting the selected component and those
upstream on a path back to the supply source will be displayed.
l The Circuit Protection tab of the Cable dialog. Click the View Graph button [
], the characteristic of the selected device will be displayed.
Graph Navigation
The log/log graph view in Protect extends for six decades in both directions, for example:
l Current: 1 A to 1 MA
l Time: 0.01 s to 10,000 s
l Energy: 102 to 108

1. Horizontal scroll bar. Becomes active when the graph is zoomed in and not set to
'Zoom Extents' (see Item 3).
2. Displays values from the graph where the mouse pointer is placed.
3. Zoom Extents button. Sets the graph to fit within the size of the toolbar.
4. Zoom bar. Sets the current zoom level of the graph. Move left to zoom out and right to
zoom in.
5. Vertical scroll bar. Becomes active when the graph is zoomed in and not set to 'Zoom
Extents' (see Item 3).
6. Additional settings button. When the toolbar width is not long enough to
accommodate all buttons, they are condensed and made accessible by pressing this
button.

7. Graph view adjustments. Use these to change between the different graphs.
8. Drop-down protection study single-line diagram. Shows the active protective device.
TIP – Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out by scrolling back and forth. To pan
around the graph, click and hold the middle mouse button while moving the mouse.
Additional Buttons
Additional buttons from left to right:

l Voltage selector: Select the active voltage for the graph.
l Curve Selector: Switch between nominal or tolerance band representations of the
characteristics (where available).
l Display Parameters: Drop-down menu showing additional parameters that can be
displayed on the graph.
l Grading Margins: Set up and toggle on/off grading margins between devices.
l Help button: Loads the help file.
Selecting a Device
To make a device the 'active device' either click on the relevant curve on the graph, or for
curves that are overlapping, selection of the device can be made from the single-line
diagram drop-down menu.
Selecting Graph Views

The graph views can be changed by using the drop-down menus:
to give one of four graph views available:

l Overcurrent + Time/Current (default)
l Earth Fault + Time/Current
l Overcurrent + Energy/Current
l Earth Fault + Energy/Current
The Time/Current views can be used to check selectivity; the Energy/Current views to
compare conductor thermal withstands with protective device energy let-through levels.
The features available in each of the views are described below.

Setting Devices
For devices with adjustable settings, adjustments can be made to any of the settings for a
displayed characteristic by pressing the button, at the top of the Protection
Study toolbar. Where a protective device is selected with no adjustable settings, the
button will be greyed out.
TIP – When device settings can be adjusted, double-clicking on the curve on the
graph will activate the keypad.
When active and clicking Edit Keypad, the following dialog appears:
The settings are grouped in categories:

L: overload; S: short-circuit; I: instantaneous; G: earth fault
Each setting is labelled with the identifier used by the manufacturer.

Settings are adjusted by clicking on the arrow buttons. The results of any changes can be
seen on the graph as they are made. Once limits are reached the arrows will become
greyed out.
Clicking OKsaves the changes for that device. Clicking Canceldiscards any changes for that
device.
NOTE– Settings are only active in the relevant view, that is Overcurrent settings in
the Overcurrent views and Earth Fault in the Earth Fault views:
Graphical Selectivity
The time/current characteristics of the selected protective devices are displayed in the
'Overcurrent + Time/Current’ and ‘Earth Fault+Time/Current’ views.
The graph is calibrated:

l Vertical axis: time 0.01 s to 10,000 s;
l Horizontal axis: current 1 A (10 mA, Earth Fault) to 1 MA;
The data displayed in the graphs allow visual inspection of time/current selectivity.
Overlaps in the characteristics for two devices indicate areas where selectivity may fail.
The devices are identified in the single line diagram drop-down menu as detailed above.
See also: Selectivity.
Graphical Energy Let-through

The energy let-through characteristics of the selected protective device is displayed in the
‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ and ‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ views, together with the
thermal withstand characteristics of the conductors in the associated circuit.


l Vertical axis: Energy 1x102 to 1x1011 A2s
l Horizontal axis: current 1 A (10 mA, Earth Fault) to 1 MA

The data displayed in the graphs allow a visual comparison of the relative levels of energy
let-through by the protective device and the thermal withstand of the conductor in the
circuit being protected. This provides a graphical representation of the adiabatic check. For
the line conductor, the adiabatic requirement is satisfied where the conductor withstand is
equal to or greater than the device energy let-through at the minimum prospective fault
current (Pscc Min). The earth fault adiabatic check compares the circuit protective
conductor (cpc) withstand to the device let-through at the earth fault current (Ief ).
The devices are identified in the single-line diagram drop-down box at the top of the
toolbar (Item 8 above).
The following items are shown on the graph for the selected device:
l The protective device let-through characteristic
l The thermal withstand characteristic of the conductor in the circuit protected by the
selected protective device
l The thermal withstand characteristic of alternative conductors
For adjustable devices, protection settings can be changed as required.
Where no graphical thermal energy let-through data is held for a protective device type, a
message is displayed on the graph when that device is selected:

‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ View

The following graph shows a typical ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ graph view:
Included in the view are the:

l Line conductor (25 mm 2) thermal withstand (solid line)
l Withstand characteristics for the next available size below (16 mm 2) the selected
conductor and the one above (35 mm 2) (dashed lines)
l Minimum fault current (Pscc Min) for the selected circuit
l Protective device energy let-through characteristic.
The line conductor adiabatic check is performed at Pscc Min. Providing the amount of
energy let-through by the device is not greater than the conductor withstand at Pscc Min,
the circuit is compliant with the line conductor adiabatic check. In the example shown, the
withstand is 8.53 x 106 A2s and the let-through is 6 x 104 A2s, therefore the circuit is
compliant.

‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ View

The following graph shows a typical ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’ graph view:

l Circuit protective conductor (cpc) thermal withstand (solid line).
l Withstand characteristics for the next available size below the selected separate cpc
and the one above (dashed lines). For armour, sheath, earth conductor, conduit or
trunking only as cpc, alternative sizes are not shown.
Additional display parameters can be :
l Earth fault current (Ief ) for the selected circuit.

For a circuit with overcurrent protection and an Add-on RCD, click on the additional
RCD device on the single-line diagram drop-down to see its characteristic:
Withstand Data Panel

When the Overcurrent + Energy / Current or Earth Fault + Energy / Current graph is
selected and a device is active, a data panel appears at the top right of the graph listing
data about the conductor withstand and the protective device energy let-through at the
fault current (Pscc Min for the line conductor and Ief for the CPC) at which the adiabatic
check is carried out.
The background colour of the panel, which is normally green, is orange when the adiabatic
check is in a failed condition, that is, the energy let-through is in excess of the conductor
withstand.
Cable Withstand Data Calculations

In the ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ graph view, the line conductor thermal withstand is
calculated and displayed for a range of current associated with fault durations of up to 20
seconds. The following example shows the characteristic of a 4 mm 2 thermoplastic
insulated copper cable:

The straight horizontal line starting at the point labelled 2 is the A2s adiabatic characteristic
for fault durations of 5 seconds and below. For adiabatic conditions it is assumed that, for
the relatively short duration of the fault current, no heat energy is lost to the surrounding
environment and that it is all absorbed by the conductor. This is calculated using:
A2s = k2S2
For the above example this is: 1152 x 42 = 2.116 x 105
The characteristic for fault durations between 5 and 20 seconds is plotted between points
1 and 2 using a non-adiabatic calculation. For relatively long fault durations, it is assumed
that a proportion of heat energy is dissipated to the surrounding environment reducing
the amount absorbed by the conductor. In the non-adiabatic calculation, a correction
factor is applied to the adiabatic value, the value of which depends on the type of
conductor and the fault duration.
In the above example, for a fault duration of 20 seconds, the non-adiabatic limiting current
is 144 A. The correction factor is 1.394, that is, the adiabatic limiting current for the same 20
second fault duration would be 144/1.394 = 103 A.
In the ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’ graph view, the earth conductor withstand includes
only the adiabatic characteristic for fault durations of 5 seconds or less. The adiabatic
calculation is the same as that used for the line conductor.

7
Home Tab
The Home tab includes the following commands:

l New – Displays the Select Template Project dialog (Ctrl+N). A previously saved project
can be selected and opened as a template. Click Cancel to open a new blank project.
See New, page 56.
l Open – Displays the Open options list to open an existing project. Converts 16th Edition
project to the 17th Edition project (BS7671:2018). See Open, page 58.
l Save – Saves the project in the active window to disk (Ctrl+S).

7 Home Tab
l Save As – Displays the Save As options list to save the project in the active window. See
Save As, page 59.
l Save All – Saves all the opened projects.
l Close – Closes the project in the active window.
l Application Settings – Displays the application settings for the software. See Application
Settings, page 59.
l Print – Displays a view of the project drawing as it will be printed with the current
settings.
l Support – Opens the support page for the software. See Support, page 65.
l Help – Displays the Help options available in the software. See Help, page 68.
l Exit – Closes all open projects and then closes the software. Prompts are displayed to
save any unsaved projects before closing.

7 Home Tab
New
Displays the Select Template Project dialog (Ctrl+N). A previously saved project can be
selected and opened as a template or to open a new blank project, click Cancel.
Displays the New Project dialog (Ctrl+N).
New Project panel
Template
If a template has been previously created, the saved name(s) is shown in the Template field.
See also Templates.
Reference
Enter your own text in this field.

7 Home Tab
Job No.
Document No.
Created By
Created On
Enter your own text in this field using the format 'DD/MM/YYYY'. The time of creation is
automatically appended to the date using a 24-hour clock format 'mm:hh'.
Alternatively, select the date and time by clicking on the 'nine dot' graphic at the right of the
Created On field. This opens a calender and time-block panel, where the preferred date
and standard time can be selected.
Regulatory Authority
By default, the project is set up to assist in compliance with DEWARegulations for Electrical
Installations 1997. Alternatively, ADDCcan be selected to assist in compliance with RSB The
Electricity Wiring Regulations (Third Edition) March 2014.
When selecting ADDC, the Apply ADDCFactor for Final Circuits option is selected. This
applies the rule set out in Appendix G2, Sizing of Final Circuits, which requires that in a final
circuit, the cable rating must be selected to be at least 1.15 times the protective device
rating.

7 Home Tab
Open
Displays the Open options menu.
Recent
Displays a list of recently opened files that have been saved, to the right.
Computer
Displays the File / Open dialog (Ctrl+O) to open an existing project.

7 Home Tab
Converts 16th Edition project to the 17th Edition project (BS7671:2018).
Trimble Connect
Displays the dialog to log into Trimble Connect.
Save As
Computer
Displays the File / Save As dialog to save the project in the active window.
Trimble Connect
Displays the dialog to log into Trimble Connect.
Application Settings
Set your application preferences.
In this section:
l Drawing
l Logo
l Service Settings
l Selectivity Check
l Auto Save
l Check for Updates
l Templates
l Messages
Drawing
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Drawing.

7 Home Tab
Persistent Connection
Allows Persistent connection to either be switched on or off. Persistent Connection mode
allows for cable and busbar connections to components to be maintained when
components such as boards are repositioned on the drawing.
Orthogonal Conductors
When selected, cables and busbars can be drawn in horizontal and vertical orientations
with right-angle bends only.
Snap to Grid
Allows Snap To Grid to be switched on or off. With Snap To Grid on, all drawing items can
only be located to align with the grid. When switched off, items can be located at any
position.
Snap To Grid is always applied to network components such as sources, cables, and
busbars regardless of the setting.
Show Unconnected Ends

Display or hide red crosses that appear to indicate that a network drawing object is
unconnected.
Logo
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Logo.

7 Home Tab
Enables a default logo to be set. All new projects that are created have this logo
automatically applied.
NOTE– Existing projects will revert to the logo that was previously applied. To
change this, see Project Settings / Logo.
Cloud Settings
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Cloud Settings.
The Remote Service calculation can be switched on or off by selecting or deselecting the
check box.
NOTE– By default, the remote service calculation is switched on.
Selectivity Check
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Selectivity Check.
The Selectivity Check Startup section contains the setting that determines when selectivity
checks are carried out.
Select one of the following options:

l Start only on request from menu or toolbar button – The check is performed when the
Selectivity Check option is selected from the Calculate toolbar or Calculation menu.
l Start automatically at end of network calculation – Each time a network calculation is
completed, the selectivity check automatically starts.
For more information on selectivity checks, see Calculations / Selectivity Check.
Auto Save
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Auto Save.
Displays the Backup settings that can be switched on and off. You can also set the
automatic save interval of, and the location where, the Auto Save backup file.
The Backup file can be used to restore a project following unexpected issues.
Check for Updates

To access these settings, select Application Settings / Check for Updates.

7 Home Tab
The Check for Updates option enables you to control when the Automatic Update feature
operates.

7 Home Tab
Software Update
Your Trimble software will automatically check for updates every time you open the
software. You will be notified about any available updates in the Notification Centre.
Data Update
Your Trimble software will automatically check for updates every time you open the
software (for both the software and data), unless the Check for Updates option is un-
checked.
If required, you can do a manual check for updates by clicking Check Now at any time.
Templates
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Templates.
Allows a template file location to be set so that templates can be stored in a common
location. Any new templates created are also saved in this location.
NOTE– To import legacy templates, click the Import Legacy Templates. Navigate to
the folder where the legacy files are stored and select the folder, then click OK. If you
have any conflict of template names, a conflict window appears. Select the option
that you want to apply and then all your templates will be converted to .p19t files.
Messages
To access these settings, select Application Settings / Messages.
Select whether to display message prompts where applicable.

7 Home Tab
Calculation Errors, Warnings and Notes

Certain Notes can be selected to be hidden, to reduce the amount of notes within the
Errors, Warnings and Notes pane.

7 Home Tab
Support
Activate
Select the Activate button to launch the Program Activation.

See Activating your software.
Check for Updates
Click Check for Updates to start the Auto Update feature. The Application Settings
dialog appears.
See Application Settings / Check for Updates.
Send to Support
After first contacting Trimble MEP, you may be issued with an unique eight-digit ticket
number.
Clicking the icon opens the ticket panel.

Enter your ticket number in the field, and then click Send to submit your drawing.

7 Home Tab
Contact Trimble MEP

Provides shortcuts to the Trimble website, Technical Support, and Trimble Assistance
homepage.
Trimble MEP Support

Provides a shortcut to the PremierCare support login page. See PremierCare.
Allows you to directly contact the support team by using the direct email address. Priority
is given to telephone requests. Requests should include your license number, company
details, name, contact telephone number, a copy of the drawing and/or related
documents plus a detailed description of the enquiry.
The support team can be contacted by telephone during normal office hours (09:00 to
17:00). Please note that during busy times, delays can be expected and it may not be
possible to talk with a member of the support team.
These services are only available to customers who have a valid active licence number as
part of our Premier Care service.
During support, it may be necessary for the support engineer to obtain remote access to
your device, with your permission. You may be asked to link directly to the Trimble MEP
Live Remote Assistance website, or to the TeamViewer website www.teamviewer.com and
download a free file that enables remote access for the support engineer.

7 Home Tab
PremierCare technical support

Our unique technical support service, PremierCare, brings a new dimension to customer
service. PremierCare is a quality-assured service to customers of our software, as all
Trimble MEP software is covered by ISO 9001 TickIT for software development.
Benefits to members include:
l Technical support
l Software service packs
l Exclusive access to online technical support
l Discounts
Technical support
Get help when you need it from the largest team of electrical software support engineers
in the industry. Trimble technical support staff have a wealth of experience, understand
your business, and can be contacted by phone during office hours, and by fax, email and
via the Amtech website.
To access the Support web page, select Home / Support:
Select the support that is required. For example, if you require technical assistance, select
Trimble MEP Support. You will need your login or license number.
On the support page there is a link that takes you directly to the Live Remote Assistance
website. This enables support engineers to view and control your machines, with your
permission, from the office.

7 Home Tab
Software service packs

Products, legislation, and design trends are constantly changing. Trimble software
developers makes sure software keeps up to date. As a PremierCare member, you will
automatically receive our service packs as soon as they are released, free of charge. These
keep your product databases right up to date, including product deletions as well as
additions, so that you always have the most current range of approved devices in your
design toolbox. You will also receive substantial discounts on major upgrades.
Exclusive access to online technical support
Access to the members-only area on the Amtech website for:
l free downloads including maintenance releases and database updates.
l access to FAQs and valuable technical tips.
l SuperCharged, the newsletter for PremierCare members, with all the latest technical
tips, update information and general news, keeping you informed of what is going on at
Trimble MEP before anyone else.
l logging a support request.
Discounts
PremierCare members can purchase additional Trimble MEP products and upgrades at
discounted rates. These discounts also apply to our training courses. Other special
promotional offers are also available to PremierCare members from time to time.
Further information
To check your PremierCare status or to renew your membership, please call 0800 028
2828.
PremierCare login
If you have current PremierCare membership and want to access the PremierCare
members’ area on the Trimble MEP website, go to http://mep.trimble.co.uk/
Help
The Help menu provides access to information about the features in the software.

7 Home Tab
Help Topics
Click to open the Help.
View Manual
Click to display the ProDesign Software User Guide in PDFformat. Requires Adobe
Acrobat to be installed (can be installed from same CD used to install the software).
Model Calculations
Click to display a document describing in detail the calculation procedures used in the
Model Calculation. The project is stored in the Projects folder.
System Info
Click to show the Windows System dialog. Alternatively, use the information to the right
which shows details of the program version number, licence number, system information,
and so forth.

8
Construction Tab
In this section:
Supply group, page 71
Cable group, page 114
Busbars group, page 146
Loads group , page 162
Boards group, page 182
Other group, page 226
Annotation group, page 241
General group, page 243
Settings Group, page 244

8 Construction Tab
Supply group

8 Construction Tab
Source Settings
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply.
The following types of supply source are available in the software:
l Source of Supply
l Transformer
l Generator
l UPS(as source)
These are accessed by selecting the option in the Supply section in the Construction
toolbar.
The Reference name of the source can also be changed to suit the project by modifying the
text in the box.
It is important that you use accurate data when completing the details in the Source dialog.
Incorrect data at the source affectsthe accuracy of the result obtained at all partsof the network.
Supply
Represents an incoming supply, an existing board used as the supply to the network being
designed, or other condition where the supply is not derived directly from a transformer
or generator. Can be defined as a TN or TT source.
Transformer
Used to represent the supply where the network design commences from the LV
terminals of a transformer.

8 Construction Tab
Generator
Used to represent the supply where the network design commences from the supply
terminals of a generator.
UPS(Uninterruptible Power Supply)
Used to represent the supply where the entire network is powered by a UPS.

8 Construction Tab
Supply Settings
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply.
The Supply Settings dialog contains data that defines the source conditions for the
network supply and the supply type. The default screen is split into the following sections:
1. The top section (dark blue) relates to drawing settings.
2. The middle section (light blue) relates to templates.
3. The lower section (grey/white) relates to design parameters and additional settings.
To open the Supply Settings dialog, do one of the following:
l Double-click on the supply symbol to open the Supply dialog.
l Right-click on the supply symbol to open the Options menu, then select Properties.
ID
The ProDesign software generates a unique text designation for the source and displays it
on the drawing. This is the same name used in reports.
The default designation for this component is 'Source-n', where 'n' represents a number
unique to each TN or TT source. See Project Settings | Drawing | Component Numbering.

8 Construction Tab
ID Displayed
The ID can be displayed or hidden on the drawing by toggling the 'eye' icon.
The ID is always shown in reports.
Name
Additional names to accompany the ID, optional. The default value is 'blank'.
Name Displayed
The Name can be displayed or hidden on the drawing by toggling the 'eye' icon.
The Name is always shown in reports.
Active Supply
The Active Supply check box should be selected to indicate that the source is used as the
supply to the project. Only one source can be active in a project at any one time. The text
reference for the Active Supply is displayed in bold on the drawing. When the project is
calculated, data from the dialog for the Active Supply is used to define the source
conditions.
Connection To
This shows the reference for the cable or busbar connected to the source.
Template pane
Allows a template, if previously defined, to be used instead of the default ProDesign
settings. See Templates Navigator tool.
Summary
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Summary.
The Summary pane displays information regarding to the connection, voltage, and fault
conditions for the source.

8 Construction Tab
Connection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Connection.
Phase Connection
The source phase connection can be set to three-phase, three-phase and neutral, or
single-phase and neutral.
For a single-phase supply, the phase of the supply can be selected.
Supply Frequency
Supply frequency can be defined as either 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The default setting is 50 Hz.
Conductor reactance is affected by the supply frequency selection. The conductor
reactance data supplied by manufacturers, or taken from BS7671 Appendix 4 is used for
calculations at 50 Hz. Conductor reactance values are adjusted when 60 Hz is selected to
take into account the 20 % frequency increase.
Voltage
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Voltage.

8 Construction Tab
Defines the phase to phase and the phase to neutral voltage from the supply terminals. It
is preferable to enter the actual levels present at the terminals under normal load
conditions. Voltage sensitive calculations such as voltage drop calculations can then be
performed using accurate values. If no other information is available, enter a nominal
value. The default value is 400/230 V.
Entering one value automatically calculates the other: [Vp = VL/Ö3].
The software is designed to calculate standard national grid-connected systems. To allow
calculations to be made for networks with supply voltages greater than those normally
applied to national grid-connected systems, the limits for the voltage input in the Source of
Supply dialog have been set as follows:
l Three-phase voltage maximum: 1150 V
l Single-phase voltage maximum: 664 V
NOTE– A red box appears if the supply voltage is above the voltage limits specified
above.
The Supply Type should be correctly set to ensure that the appropriate set of voltage drop
limits (BS7671:2018 Appendix 4, 6.4) are implemented.

8 Construction Tab
When calculating for systems with voltages higher than grid-connected values, consider
the following notes.
Earth Fault Disconnection calculation
The earth fault disconnection calculations are valid for all system voltages that can be
entered in the Source dialog except for circuitsfeedingportable equipment, where the default
disconnection time of 0.4 sisnot valid for phase voltagesabove 277 V. You can intervene and
manually select a disconnection time of 0.2 s for phase voltages above 277 Vand less than
400 V. For phase voltages above 400 V, the appropriate disconnection time is 0.1 s;
currently there is no provision for this in the software.
Earth Fault Protection (Adiabatic) calculation
The BS7671:2018 wiring regulations requires that a check should be made that the
thermal capacity of the CPCis not exceeded under earth fault conditions, ie. I² t< k² s² ,
where k² s²is the thermal capacity of the cable and I² tis the amount of energy it has to
sustain.
l For disconnection under earth fault conditions where the disconnection time is
less than 0.1s, I² tis the energy let through by the protective device in A² s.This is a
value declared by the manufacturer and is voltage dependent. The I² tenergy let
through values stored in the ProDesign MEdatabase are for 240/415 Vsystems.
l Therefore, for phase voltages above 240 V, the software cannot assure that
overheating of the CPCwill not occur during earth faults (adiabatic test). Where
disconnection is not particularly rapid (for example, 2 s), I² tis measured as the
fault current squared times the disconnection time; this is not voltage dependent
and does not represent a problem.
Phase Fault Protection Calculation
For phase voltages above 240 V, the same notes apply as for the Earth fault protection
(adiabatic) calculation above.
Phase Conductor Sizing
By default, the Phase Conductor Sizing setting is set to Auto size for current-carrying
capacity and voltage drop limits, which means that where conductor sizes are set to Auto,
their sizes will firstly be set to comply with the current-carrying capacity requirements and
secondly, where necessary, will be increased to comply with voltage drop requirements.
See Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits.

8 Construction Tab
Voltage Drop Limits
You can specify whether to adopt the BS7671:2018 limits for a public or private supply, or
apply your own limits for volt drop from source.
See Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits.
See Voltage Drop Calculations.
See Voltage Drop Limits.
Fault Conditions
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Fault Conditions.
Supply System
Sets the type of network supply. The options are TN or TT.
The selection determines the type of Source calculator available and controls the rules
applied to network calculations. For example, when TT is selected, the TT Supply Earth Fault
Level calculator is available and the rules regarding calculations relevant to TT systems are
applied.
For more information, see TT Supply Settings.
For more information, see RECSupply Settings.
Calculate fault levels from supply parameters
Enables local installation details to be taken into account when calculating the supply
characteristics from source. For a TN supply, see RECSupply Settings. For a TT supply, see
TT Supply Settings.

8 Construction Tab
Once you have entered the parameters, click Apply to change the status from Not Applied
to Applied. Applied will be displayed in green.
Fault Levels
Sets the system supply fault levels. Click More to select the advanced options or click Less
to hide them. Changing a single value automatically updates associated values once
another entry field is selected.
It is normally adequate to only define the supply fault conditions for the Line Fault current
and Earth Fault current or the Ze (External Earth Impedance).
If more Fault level information is available, click More to set the source fault conditions as
resistive and reactive components, or to define the source fault power factor.
Line Fault Current (Ip)
This is the level of prospective phase fault current at the network supply source.
You must enter an accurate value if the design is to be suitable for the actual site conditions.
The default value (16 kA) is the maximum for a RECsingle-phase supply into a building. The
actual value may be quite different.
For a three-phase supply, enter the three-phase rms symmetrical fault current. For single-
phase networks, enter the phase to neutral fault current.
Setting Description
Ze The total external phase fault impedance (the impedance of the path
through which a short-circuit fault would flow) at the network supply
source.
PF The power factor of the external phase fault impedance (the impedance
of the path through which a short-circuit fault would flow). The power
factor is the ratio of the fault resistance to the fault reactance (R/Z); this
power factor is unrelated to the load power factor.
An exact value of fault power factor may often be very hard to
determine. Generally, the nearer the supply connection is to the LV
transformer, the lower will be the power factor.
Re The resistive component of the external phase fault impedance (the

impedance of the path through which a short-circuit fault would flow) at
the network supply source.
Xe The reactive component of the external phase fault impedance (the

impedance of the path through which a short-circuit fault would flow) at
the network supply source.

8 Construction Tab
Earth Fault Current (Ief)
This is the level of prospective earth fault current at the network supply source.
You must enter an accurate value if the design is to be suitable for the actual site conditions.
The default value (16 kA) is the maximum for a RECsingle-phase supply into a building. The
actual value may be quite different.
Enter the value of the phase to earth fault current (Vph/Ze).
The Earth Fault Current field is initially set to the same value as the Phase Fault Current
field. If the Phase Fault Current field is changed, the Earth Fault Current field automatically
changes to the same value. Therefore, where the earth fault current is different to the
value entered for the phase fault current, the Phase Fault Current field should be entered
first and the Earth Fault Current second.
The Earth Ze field can be entered instead of the Earth Fault current field, in which case the
Earth Fault Current field automatically recalculates.
Setting Description
Earth Ze The total external earth fault impedance (the impedance of the path
through which an earth fault would flow) at the network supply source.
PF The power factor of the external earth fault impedance (the impedance
of the path through which an earth fault would flow). The power factor
is the ratio of the fault resistance to the fault reactance (R/Z); this power
factor is unrelated to the load power factor.
An exact value of earth power factor may often be very hard to
determine. Generally, the nearer the supply connection is to the LV
transformer, the lower will be the power factor.
Re The resistive component of the external earth fault impedance (the

impedance of the path through which an earth fault would flow) at the
network supply source.
Xe The reactive component of the external earth fault impedance (the

impedance of the path through which an earth fault would flow) at the
network supply source.
Charging and Bypass (Close Coupled UPS)

Only active when the UPSis directly connected to the load side of a board. Determines
whether the battery charger and bypass connections are to be combined or switched
separately.

8 Construction Tab
Input Phase Connection

Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Not applicable when used as a
supply source.)
Output Phase Connection
Phase settings applicable to the network connected to the UPSoutput. (Selectable when
used as a supply source.)
UPSType
When the UPStype is selected as Online, the inverter supply cable is sized for both the
battery charge current and the load current. When Offline, the inverter supply cable is
sized for the load charging current only.
RECSupply Settings
The contents of the dialog are the same as those described for Source of Supply Settings,
except for the Fault Levels calculator described below.
Fault Levelscalculator
When the Supply System option is set to TN and the Phase Connection in the Voltage tab is
set to ‘3 Ph / 3 Ph+N’, the RECSupply Fault Level Calculator panel is displayed as shown:
Supply Cable
Select the origin of the supply as a service cable supplied from an LVDistribution Main or
from an LVSub-station.

8 Construction Tab
Service Cable
Sets the size and length of the service cable connecting the RECcut-out to the LV
Distribution Main or Sub-station.
NOTE– The selected length of service cable should be its length from the boundary
of the consumer’s premises to the RECcut-out.
When the Supply System option is set to TN and the Phase Connection in the Voltage tab is
set to ‘1 Ph + N’, the RECSupply Fault Level calculator panel is displayed as shown:
Apply
When you click Apply, the data entered in the calculator is used to calculate the source fault
conditions, which are then used to complete the data boxes in the Prospective Fault
Conditions panel.
For more information, see Source Calculations / RECSupply Fault Level Calculator.
TT Supply Settings
The contents of the dialog are the same as those described for Source of Supply Settings,
except for the Fault Level Calculator described below.
Fault Level Calculator
When the Supply System is selected as TT, the TT Supply Earth Impedance Calculator panel
is displayed:

8 Construction Tab
Calculate Fault levels from supply parameters

Resistance/Reactance
The Bonding Conductor and Electrode resistance and reactance data boxes are used in
the calculation to determine the source earth impedance. Values of resistance and
reactance can be typed directly into the data boxes. Alternatively, click the Bonding
Conductor or Electrode button to use the calculator functions.
Apply
When the Apply button is clicked, the resistance and reactance inputs are used to fill in the
impedance for the Earth Ze in the Prospective Fault Conditions panel.
For more information, see TT Supply Fault Level Calculator.
Bonding Conductor Calculator
Clicking the Bonding Conductor data boxes displays the Earthing Conductor Impedance
Calculator. The conductor impedance is calculated according to the selected cable size and
length.

8 Construction Tab
Cable Type
Select the type of cable used to connect the electrode; thermoplastic (PVC) or
thermosetting (XLPE) insulation. The insulation type is used in the adiabatic calculations.
Cable Size
Select the section of the cable used to connect the electrode (1 to 1,000 mm² ).
Length
Enter the length of the cable used to connect the electrode.
Impedance (Ohms):Resistance, Reactance
Shows the conductor impedance calculated using the above data inputs.
Electrode Resistance Calculator
Clicking the Electrode data boxes displays the Electrode Resistance Calculator. Electrode
resistances are calculated according to a method described in BS7430.

8 Construction Tab
Electrode Type:Plate
Select the electrode type as Plate.
Soil Resistivity (Ohm.m)
Enter the soil resistivity (1 to 5,000 ohms).
Plate Dimensions
Enter the dimensions of the plate, either as Height and Width (2m max.), or Area (4m² max.).
No. of parallel plates
Enter the number of parallel plates (10 max.) used to form the earth electrode.
Spacing
Where there is more than one plate, select the spacing between the plates as greater than
2 and less than 10, or greater than 10:
Electrode Resistance
Shows the electrode resistance calculated using the above data entries.
NOTE– An electrode resistance greater than 200 ohms is not recommended.

8 Construction Tab
Electrode Type:Rod
Select the electrode type as Rod.
Soil Resistivity (Ohm.m)
Enter the soil resistivity (1 to 5,000 ohms).
Rod Dimensions
Enter the rod length in metres, and the diameter in millimetres.
Single Rod/Multiple Rods
Select electrode as a single rod or multiple rods.
In Line/Hollow Square
If multiple rods are selected, select whether rods are arranged in a line or in a hollow
square.
No. of Rods/Spacing
If multiple rods are selected, select number of rods along each side (10 max. for rods in line,
20 max. for rods in hollow square) and spacing (30 m max.).
Example: rods in hollow square; No. of rods along each side = 5. Total number of rods = 16.

8 Construction Tab
Input the spacing between rods (30 m max.).
Electrode Resistance
Shows the electrode resistance calculated using the above data inputs.
NOTE– An electrode resistance greater than 200 ohms is not recommended.
For more information, see Source Calculations / TT Supply Fault Level Calculator.
Parallel Supplies
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Parallel Supplies.
This option is available only in versions ProDesign Pro or higher.
A single supply source can be used to represent a number of identical parallel sources.
This feature applies to a Source of Supply, Transformer, or Generator connected to a
switchboard, either directly or through a conductor. Duplicate parallel supplies can be set.
Each parallel supply is a duplicate of the one defined in the dialog. This includes source
type, phase and voltage settings, fault settings, protective device settings, and all
conductor parameters.
To select the number of required parallel supplies, set the Parallel Mode field to the Parallel
Supplies option. You can then edit the ID and Name for the sources, and for the conductor
where the supplies are connected to the switchboard through a conductor:

8 Construction Tab
Parallel Supplies are indicated on the single-line diagram by two parallel lines added to the
supply source symbol:
Protection pane
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Protection.
The Protection pane contains controls that enable you to define the protection for the
main cable connected to the supply. The same settings can be made in the main Cable
dialog. For more details, see Cables / Protection.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Display Results.
Values
Display
If the Display check box is selected, extra options become available. The options selected
are displayed next to the source.

8 Construction Tab
ResultsPer Line
The Results Per Line field enables parameters to be shown in a tabular format. Selecting
the default value of 1 lists them in one column.
Separator
The Separator option enables the separator character to be selected if the Results Per
Line value is greater than one.
Appearance
Options relating to the above displayed values can be defined. The default values are
changed per source.
Note that a separate Not Calculated Colour can be selected to ensure that the Text Colour
results shown are recognised as post-calculation values.
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Comments.
Contains a comments text box, the contents of which can be printed with the related
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Attachments.
Attachments enable external documents to be added to the design. For more information,
see Attachments Manager.

8 Construction Tab
Transformer
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer.

Represents the supply where the network design commences from the LVterminals of a
transformer.
Summary
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Summary.
conditions for the transformer.
Connection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Connection.

8 Construction Tab
Phase
Supply Frequency
Voltage
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Voltage.
The contents of the Transformer dialog are similar to those described for the Source of
Supply. Additionally, it contains the following features:
Primary Voltage
Defines the voltage at the terminals of the primary winding. This information is only used
where the main incoming LVcircuit protection is located at the primary rather than the

8 Construction Tab
secondary side of the transformer.
Fault Conditions
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Fault Conditions.
Secondary fault level calculated from system parameters
Primary Fault Level
Sets the fault level declared for the network to which the transformer primary is
connected. The default value (250 MVA) is a typical assumed value for 11 kVsupplies. The
actual value could be higher (up to 500 MVA), particularly in cities, and lower in rural
locations remote from the HVgrid system. The primary fault level is used in the calculation
that determines the fault level at the transformer secondary terminals.
Transformer Rating
Defines the declared power rating of the transformer. It is used in the calculation to
determine the fault level at the transformer secondary terminals; also to determine the
transformer LVload current rating.

8 Construction Tab
Impedance
Defines the transformer impedance as a percentage. It is used in the calculation to

determine the fault level at the transformer secondary terminals.
The percentage impedance of a transformer can be calculated using:
Z% = Rating (kVA) x Z x 105 / VL2
Apply
Clicking the Apply button updates the data in the Prospective Fault Conditions pane, using
the changed values that have been typed in.
When the Status notice below shows ‘Applied’, this means that the values shown in the
Prospective Fault Conditions pane have been calculated from those shown in the Fault
Level Calculator. ‘Not Applied’ means the Prospective Fault Conditions do not yet reflect the
changes to the Calculator data.
More
If detailed information about fault conditions is known, click More to enter specific
information.
Parallel Supplies
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Parallel Supplies.

8 Construction Tab
Parallel supplies are indicated on the single-line diagram by two parallel lines added to the
Protection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Protection.
dialog. For more details see Cables / Protection.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Display Results.
Values
Display

8 Construction Tab
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Transformer / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Generator
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator.
Used to represent the supply where the network design commences from the supply
terminals of a generator.
Summary
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Summary.
conditions for the generator.
Connection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Connection.

8 Construction Tab
Phase Connection
Supply Frequency

8 Construction Tab
Voltage
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Voltage.
The contents of the Voltage pane are similar to those described for the Source of Supply.
Additionally, it contains the following features:
Parallel Supplies
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Parallel Supplies.

8 Construction Tab
Parallel Supplies are indicated on the single-line diagram by two parallel lines added to the
Fault Conditions
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Fault Conditions.
The options in this pane are the same as those in the Source of Supply dialog, but note the
following differences with respect to the generator impedance input.

8 Construction Tab
Rating
Enter the generator rating in kVA.
Impedance
Enter the generator percentage impedance.
Generator impedance under fault conditions varies with time—the subtransient
impedance applying in the instant after the occurrence of a fault, the transient impedance
in the longer period during which the fault current is decaying.
The value used should be selected to be appropriate to the time taken for protective
devices in the system to operate. It is used in the calculation to determine the fault level at

8 Construction Tab
the generator terminals. A high impedance may result in a very low fault current, leading to
difficulties in disconnecting circuits under earth fault conditions.
Apply
Clicking Apply updates the data in the Prospective Fault Conditions pane using a
calculation based on the generator rating and impedance data:
Protection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Protection.
dialog. For more details, see Cables / Protection.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Display Results.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.

8 Construction Tab
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / Generator / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
UPS
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS.
In this section:
l Summary
l Connection
l Voltage
l Parallel Supplies
l Inverter Parameters
l Inverter Bypass
l Earthing
l Protection
l Comments
l Attachments
Summary
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Summary.
The Summary pane displays the voltage drop for the UPS.

8 Construction Tab
Connection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Connection.

8 Construction Tab
Charging and Bypass (Close Coupled UPS)

Only active when the UPSis directly connected to the load side of a board. Determines
whether the battery charger and bypass connections are to be combined or switched
separately.
Input Phase Connection
Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Not applicable when used as a
supply source.)
Output Phase Connection
Phase settings applicable to the network connected to the UPSoutput. (Selectable when
UPSType
When the UPStype is selected as Online, the inverter supply cable will be sized for both the
battery charge current and the load current. When Offline, the inverter supply cable will be
sized only for the load charging current.
Voltage
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Voltage.

8 Construction Tab
Input Voltage/Output Voltage

Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Input voltage not applicable when
Input Frequency/Output Frequency
Determined by settings at the project supply source. (Input frequency not applicable when
Voltage Drop Settings
Applicable to the network connected to the UPSoutput.
Parallel Supplies
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Parallel Supplies.
This option is available only in versions ProDesign100 and later.
This feature applies to a source of supply, transformer, generator, or UPSconnected to a

8 Construction Tab
Parallel supplies are indicated on the single-line diagram by two parallel lines added to the
Inverter Parameters
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Inverter Parameters.

8 Construction Tab
Output Rating
You can automatically select a UPSrating by selecting the Auto check box. Auto is based on
the calculated diversified load and typical UPSratings. You can also enter a manual rating
within a range of 1 to 1000 kVA.
Output Rated Current (A)
This is a read-only value to advise what the rated current of the UPSis.
TIP – This is the output current and does not include the charging current of the
UPS.
Connected Load (A)

The total connected load to the UPS.
Number in Parallel
Settings from the Identical Parallel Supplies panel in the Voltage page.

8 Construction Tab
Inrush Multiplier
The multiple of the normal charging current experienced when the battery charge is
completely depleted.
Maximum Charging Current
The maximum normal charging current.
Harmonic Current
Third harmonic content in the inverter output current.
Inverter Type
Setting made in the Voltage pane.
Fault Capacity
The maximum output fault current for: 1 cycle; 60 seconds; continuous—sustainable for 10
minutes.
Exemption to Earth Fault Disconnection as per Regulation 419
Enables you to identify if the UPScomplies with regulation 419 when earth fault
disconnection times cannot be met to comply with 411.3.2.

8 Construction Tab
Inverter Bypass
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Inverter Bypass.
Bypass Switch Status

Can be set to either Open or Closed.
Input Conductor
Setting determined by interconnections made on the single-line diagram. A common
conductor is sized for both the battery charger supply and the load current in contrast to
sizing separate conductors for separate functions. The number of parallel units
determined by the ‘N +’ setting.
Output Conductor
Settings determined by interconnections made on the single-line diagram. The number of
parallel units determined by the ‘N +’ setting.
Earthing
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Earthing.

8 Construction Tab
Inherited
This is the default setting. The load side connection is solidly connected through circuit
protective conductors to the earth connection at the project supply source.
Separate Earthing
Defines a local earth connection at the UPS. When the Downstream Only check box is
selected, the earth fault calculations include only the local earth provision; the supply
source earthing is ignored. When the Downstream Only check box is not selected, the
calculation takes into account both the local earth and the connection back to the supply
source earth.
The Impedance Calculator fields contains a calculator to obtain the electrode and its
bonding conductor impedances to be determined. Otherwise the impedance values can
entered directly into the data input boxes. Clicking Apply applies the local earth impedance
values. The Earthing Impedance fields shows the total earth impedance at the UPS.
Protection
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Protection.

8 Construction Tab
There are separate protection panels for the inverter and the bypass. The default setting
for the bypass is No Protection, in which case protection will be provided by the supply
side protective device. The Bypass Output Protection field is only enabled where a
separate bypass output cable is connected.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Supply / UPS/ Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Cable group
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable.
Cable Data Entry

To open the Cable Settings dialog, you can:
l Double-click to open the Cable dialog.
l Right-click to open the shortcut menu and then select Properties.
l Cable Data Entry Spread Control. Settings details for cables are listed in a table format.
The settings of a selected cable or cables can be modified using the setting controls at
the top of the table. The available settings are similar to those in the cable dialogs
described below. For details of the spread control features, see Data Entry.
Most of the data in the dialog is contained in groups with related items together.
The Cable Settings dialog contains data that defines the cable settings. The default screen
is split into the following sections:
l The top section (dark blue) relates to drawing parameters.
l The middle section (light blue) relates to templates.
l The lower section (grey/white) relates to design parameters and additional settings.
ID
A unique text designation for the cable that is displayed on the drawing. The same name is
used in reports.
The default designation for this cable is 'Cbl_SM-n' (for sub-main cables) or 'Cbl-FC-n' (for
final circuit cables), where 'n' represents a unique number. See Project Settings / Drawing /
Component Numbering.
ID Displayed
The ID can be displayed or hidden on the drawing by each subsequent mouse click on the
'eye' icon.
Name
Additional names to accompany the ID can be used. The default value is 'blank'.

8 Construction Tab
Name Displayed
The Name can be displayed or hidden on the drawing by each subsequent mouse click on
the 'eye' icon.
Connection To
FROM: Gives the reference of the network item supplying the cable.
TO: Gives the reference of the network item the cable is supplying.
Template
Allows a template, if previously defined, to be used instead of the default settings.
See Templates Navigator tool.
Cable
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable / Cable.
Type
Data (tabulated current ratings, resistances, reactances, derating factors) for the cable
type selected are used in the calculations for the circuit. The standard cable types included
in BS7671:2018 , Tables 4D1 to 4J4 are identified by the table number given at the end of the
description.
In addition to the standard types, the following are also listed:
l LSF(Low Smoke and Fume) – Where LSFvariants of the standard cables exist, these are
listed. They have exactly the same electrical properties (current-carrying capacity etc.)
as their standard equivalent.
l Run to 70 °C– For each standard thermosetting cable, there is a ‘* RUN to 70 °C’ version
listed. Each of these cables is based on a maximum normal operating temperature of
70 °Cinstead of the 90 °Cmaximum for which this type of cable is normally rated.
This type should be selected when using thermosetting cables where the equipment being
connected is not able to operate at temperatures above 70 °C, and also where
thermosetting cables are grouped together with thermoplastic (max. 70 °C) cables.
l Flexible – There are flexible variants listed for the cables described in the BS7671:2018
tables 4D1, 4D2, 4E1, 4E2. These are shown as ‘* Flexible’ and have the same properties

8 Construction Tab
as their standard equivalent, except their data are multiplied by the following factors, in
compliance with BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 2.4:
l Current-carrying capacities – 0.95 (≤ 16 mm 2), 0.97 (>16 mm 2);
l Voltage drop resistances – 1.10 (≤ 16 mm 2), 1.06 (>16 mm 2).
l Others – Also included are a selection of specific manufacturer cable types and special
cables.
l DEWA Version – There are three DEWA cable types towards the bottom of the Type list.
These correspond to Tables 1 to 3 in the DEWARegulations for Electrical Installations 1997
Edition. For these cables, it is not possible to change the ambient temperature or the
installation method. In the sizing calculations, the load duty is checked against the
values in the DEWA tables.
Cable Search
The cable type function has an improved search function so that cable types can be
filtered. For example, by typing 4E4 in the search filter, the list is reduced to show only 4E4
cables.
Installation Method
The majority of installation methods listed match the installation methods described in BS
7671:2018, Table 4A2. Additionally, the list also includes installation methods that are in
common usage but are not described in the standard.
The installation methods that appear in the list are restricted to those that are valid for the
cable type selected. For example, ‘Buried direct in ground’ will not be listed for an
unarmoured cable type.
Because of the large number described in BS7671:2018, Table 4A2, installation methods are
chosen in two steps. The first step lists general categories of methods resulting in a short
list of applicable methods in step 2. Alternatively, select ‘All methods’ in step 1 to give a
complete list in step 2.
For a given installation method, a reference method is applicable and this is used to
determine the column in the cable rating tables in which the tabulated rating (It ) for the
selected cable is to be found, and also the column for voltage drop resistances and
reactances. For grouped cables, the reference method determines the location of the
rating factor (Cg) data in Tables 4C1 to 4C6.
In certain cases, to fully describe the required installation method, selections need to be
made in boxes other than the Installation box. The other boxes are: Configuration,
Conduit/Trunking and Distance; their functions are fully described below.
A picture appears in the tab giving visual confirmation of the selected installation method.
Alongside the picture a panel contains a detailed description of the currently selected

8 Construction Tab
installation, including the applicable reference method.
Cables in Walls, Partitions, Floors or Ceilings (Concealed Cables)

Cables installed concealed in walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings are subject to the
requirements of BS7671:2018, 522.6.201 to 522.6.204. For the relevant installation methods
(Walls/Partitions:1, 2, 3, 57, 58, 59, 60, 102, 103; Ceilings/Floors: 47, 100, 101), a panel is
displayed in the Cable pane containing an indicator button to show whether the installed
conditions are compliant (or non-compliant), clicking on this button displays a Settings
dialog where the measures for protection can be edited. The panel title and the Settings
dialog vary according to whether the cable is installed in walls or partitions, or ceilings or
floors.
Installed in Walls or Partitions

When the cable is installed in a wall or partition, click the indicator button to open the
Settings dialog.
When the two list boxes have been set to describe the protection measures in force for the
installation, an indicator panel shows whether the measures are compliant or non-
compliant.
For each list box setting, a picture and notes are displayed to clarify the requirements. Click
Apply to apply the settings and close the dialog. Click Cancel to leave the settings
unchanged and close the dialog.

8 Construction Tab
Installed in Ceilings or Floors

The requirements for cables installed in ceilings and floors are simpler and there is only
one setting in the dialog:

8 Construction Tab
User-defined Installation Method
CAUTION – The User Defined installation method is being phased out.

It is now possible (and recommended) to override (where necessary) each relevant
derating factor applicable to the selected installation method.
Where none of the listed installation methods accurately reflect the actual method to be
used, the User defined option can be selected, which enables the value of the rating factor
to be applied to the tabulated cable rating that you set by.
You can set a value from 0.1 to 2, which is used to derate the ‘free air’ rating (Reference
Methods Eand F) of the cable.
This overrides any other rating factors that would normally apply, for example, ambient
temperature rating factor (Ca). An exception to this is the rating factor Ch for 3rd harmonic
current, which will still be applied.
User Defined Cable Correction factors (Derating factors)
TIP – User Defined correction factors provides the ability to override individual
correction factors, compared with the legacy User Defined Installation Method
which requires an overall derating factor.
The value of relevant circuit correction factors used in calculations is now shown adjacent
to the input field (example shows Ambient Temperature only):
Each circuit correction factor can be overridden by pressing the Padlock icon and typing in
the desired value, ranging from 0.1 - 2. Each overridden field is used in the calculations in
place of the default value.
In all instances where a User Defined correction factor has been defined, a [u] is displayed
(in superscript) against the value in relevant reports.
Configuration
For certain installation methods, to determine the column in the table from which the
tabulated rating (It ) for the selected cable is to be taken, you need to define both the
installation method and a particular configuration for that method, for example,
‘Horizontal flat touching’. In such cases, the Configuration field will become available and an
appropriate selection should be made.

8 Construction Tab
Conduit/Trunking
Where the installation method includes conduit or trunking, a field will appear labelled
Conduit or Trunking, as appropriate. Metal or Plastic should be selected from the field to
define the material from which the conduit or trunking is constructed. This information is
used to set the options available in the CPCpane.
Distance
For the Run through thermal insulation method, you must define the distance along which
the cable is run through the insulating material. When this installation method is selected,
the Distance field will become available, enabling the distance (mm) to be defined. The value
entered is used to set the insulation derating factor Ci, according to BS7671:2018, Table
52.2.
Size
The sizes listed include all the sizes generally available for the type of cable selected. An
exception to this is where the minimum cable size has been set above the smallest size; all
sizes up to the minimum set will be excluded. See Settings / Project Settings / Calculations /
Minimum Cable Sizes.
When the Auto check box is selected, the calculations for the circuit will automatically select
the smallest suitable size from the sizes listed.

8 Construction Tab
To set a particular cable size, clear the Auto check box and select the required size from the
list. The calculation then checks the suitability of the set cable size.
The value in Amps displayed next to each cable size is the tabulated cable rating (It ).
Dimension
Defines the dimension of the circuit in mm. This is automatically populated by the
ProDesign MEdatabase (once calculated and where possible), but can be user defined by
clicking on the padlock and typing in a value. On the rare instance the ProDesign ME
database does not have this information, a 0 value is shown.
NOTE– If user defined, the value should be the whole size of the circuit, including
spacing, or additional conductors (such as separate CPC).
Weight
Defines the weight of the circuit in kg/m. This is automatically populated by the ProDesign
MEdatabase (once calculated and where possible), but can be user defined by clicking on
the padlock and typing in a value. On the rare instance the ProDesign MEdatabase does
not have this information, a 0 value is shown.
NOTE– If user defined, the value should include all conductors that form part of the
circuit (such as separate CPC).
Length
Design Length
The length of cable obtained from either 2D drawings or a 3D model.
NOTE– For ring socket circuits, this should be measured from the board, around
the ring, and back to the board.
Design Allowance
An allowance that is applied automatically depending on the Project Settings. Selecting the
override gives access to manually entering a percentage (that is based on the Design
Length) or a length in metres to be added.
Total Length
The value of the Total Length is used for the calculations.

8 Construction Tab
Temperature
The details for the temperature input vary according to whether the cable is installed in air
or in the ground.
Ambient Temp – ‘Air’ installation methods
The temperature of the air surrounding the cable installation. For a cable in a trunking, for
example, this is the temperature surrounding the trunking, not within it.
For cables listed in BS7671:2018, the tabulated current ratings are given for an ambient
temperature of 30 °C. For the installation method selected, load currents up to the
tabulated current rating (It ) will not cause the cable temperature to rise above its
conductor operating temperature (e.g., thermoplastic cable = 70 °C).
A rating factor (Ca) of less than 1.0 is applicable for ambient temperatures above 30 °C. This
has the effect of increasing the tabulated current rating required when the cable is
selected.
Ground Temp – Ground installation methods
The temperature of the ground surrounding the cable installation.
The tabulated current ratings are given for a ground temperature of 15 °Cfor the general
methods using BICCdata. BS7671:2018 Methods 70 to 73 are based on a ground
temperature of 20 °CFor the installation method selected, load currents up to the
tabulated current rating (It ) will not cause the cable temperature to rise above its
conductor operating temperature (e.g., thermoplastic cable = 70 °C).
For ground temperatures other than 15 °C(BICC) or 20 °C(BS7671:2018 ), a rating factor
(Ca) is applied.
Connection
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable / Connection.
Phase
The options for phase configurations depend where in the network the circuit is located.
Connected from the Main Switchboard
The available selection of phase configurations depend on the phasing of the circuit on the
supply side of this one. If the previous circuit is three phase, this circuit can be defined as
three-phase or one of the three single-phases.
NOTE– Changing a sub-main circuit from three-phase to single-phase and vice-versa may
result in changes to the network on the load side of the circuit that are hard to correct. If
this accidentally happens, select Edit | Undo or press Ctrl+Z.

8 Construction Tab
Connected from Main Switchboard and Source connected directly to MSB

The phase can be set as three-phase or one of the three single-phases.
result in changes to the network on the load side of this circuit that are hard to correct. If
Connected to MSB
For a main cable (between the source and the main switchboard), the phase configuration
is fixed as three-phase. To create a single-phase network, start the design with a source
directly connected to the main switchboard (no interconnecting cable), then draw a cable
connected to the main switchboard; this cable can then be set as single-phase.
Connected to DB or Consumer Unit
The list of available connection configurations offers any available ways on the distribution
board or consumer unit and the unused phases on those ways (for example, 3 L2 means
L2 phase on Way 3). The circuit diagram accessible in the distribution board or Consumer
Unit dialog shows in graphical form the phasing and the number and usage of ways.
result in changes to the network on the load side of this circuit that are hard to correct. If
Earth Fault Disconnection Limit
NOTE– The Cable Earth Fault Disconnection Limit is shown only for Sub-main
cables. For the Load Earth Fault Disconnection Limit, see Non Motor Load Details
and Motor Load Details.
When set to Auto, the earth fault disconnection time limit is automatically calculated based
on BS7671:2018 (Regulation 411.3.2).
When set to Fixed, the desired earth fault disconnection time limit can be selected from the
list. If the manually selected earth fault disconnection time limit exceeds the value stated in
BS7671:2018 411.3.2, then an error message is reported during project calculation.

8 Construction Tab
Grouping
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable/ Grouping.
The cable type, installation method, and configuration details from the Cable pane are
shown at the top of the pane.
Parallel Cables (this circuit)
The Cables in Parallel check box contains settings relating to the number of parallel cables
used in the circuit and how they are to be spaced. Clearing this check box indicates that in
the circuit in question there will be only one multi-core cable or one single-core cable per
phase employed. Select this check box to display the numerical control to be used to set
the number of parallel cables to be used.

8 Construction Tab
The Spaced more than two cable diameter check box should be selected if it is intended to
install the parallel cables in this way. The grouping rating factor Cg will then be set to 1 (no
derating).
Grouping (with other circuits)
This check box contains sets the total number of circuits in the group. If the circuit is not
grouped with any other, the check box should be cleared. When the check box is selected,
the numerical control is displayed allowing the total number of grouped circuits to be
defined.
When setting the number of grouped circuits, refer to BS7671:2018, Table 4C1, Notes 2 and
9.
Grouped Thermosetting Cables

When a thermosetting insulated cable (normal maximum operating temperature = 90 °C) is
installed in a group with other cables, if some of the cables in that group are thermoplastic
insulated (normal maximum operating temperature = 70 °C), then all the cables should be
run to a maximum of 70 °C. See the note in the cable data tables in BS7671:2018:
“Where it is intended to group a cable in this table with other cables, the cable should be rated at the
lowest of the maximum operating temperatures of any of the cables in the group (see Regulation
523.5).”
Therefore, when grouped circuits are selected for a thermosetting insulated cable, a
warning icon is displayed with an Info button below.
Clicking the Info button displays a message describing the requirement.
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in air

The contents of this panel depend on whether an installation in air or in the ground has
been selected. The view shown below is for an air installation method.

8 Construction Tab
Arrangement
For certain reference methods (e.g., E), the value of the rating factor Cg to be applied
depends on the arrangement of the cables. The correct arrangement should be selected
from the list. The setting box does not appear where specific arrangements are
unnecessary.
Subject to Simultaneous Overload
Where circuits are grouped, there are two methods of calculating the rating factor (Cg) to
be applied:
l Subject to simultaneous overload (box checked) – Assumes that more than one of the
grouped circuits may be overloaded at any one time; applies grouping using In/Cg.
l Not subject to simultaneous overload (box unchecked) – Assumes that only one of the
grouped circuits will normally be overloaded at any one time (a reasonable assumption
for general distribution loads); uses two calculations to determine Cg and uses the

8 Construction Tab
highest value from the two (BS7671:2018 Appendix 4, 5.1.2). Usually gives a reduced level
of derating compared to ‘Subject to simultaneous overload’.
Cable in parallel/Circuits in Group
The values of the numbers of cables in parallel and grouped circuits in the settings above
are displayed here.
No. of trays/circuits per tray
For reference methods Eand F, there are data for multiple numbers of trays and other
supports. The No of trays should be selected using the numerical control. The No. of
circuits per tray required to accommodate all the cables specified will then be shown.
Derating
The numerical control initially shows the number of circuits/cables to which derating
should be applied. The value shown will be the cables in parallel multiplied by the circuits in
group. If required, you can use the numerical control to adjust this number.
Cg
Based on the reference method and the number of circuits/cables to which derating is to
be applied, the value of the grouping rating factor Cg to be used in the cable sizing
calculations is shown.
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in ground

BS7671:2018

8 Construction Tab
Depth of Lay
Indicates the depth at which the cable is installed. Rating factors for Buried Reference
Method D in BS7671:2018 are given in Table 4B4.

8 Construction Tab
Spacing
Where cables are grouped together, a rating factor for grouping is applied. This has the
effect of increasing the tabulated current rating required when the cable is selected.
The actual value of the applied rating factor depends on the distance the cables are
spaced when installed; the greater the spacing, the higher the value of the factor (the lower
the derating).
Cables in Ducts - Installation Method 70 - Table 4C3
To calculate the rating factor for multiple cables in a single duct, Table 4C1 (BS7671:2018) is
used to obtain the value for Cg. To calculate the rating factor for multiple cables in multiple
ducts, the relevant rating from Table 4C1 and 4C3 (BS767:2018) are multiplied together to
give an overall rating factor for Cg.
Therefore Cgoverall = Cg4C1 * Cg4C3
EXAMPLE– Cgoverall Calculation

8 Construction Tab
Setting the 'Total number of grouped circuits', increases the number of overall circuits:
To define the number of circuits per duct, set the 'Number of ducts' field (up to a
maximum of 6, Table 4C3 for BS7671:2018). The 'Number of circuitsper duct' will then be
updated; this is a simple calculation of No. grouped Circuits / No. Ducts.
The result is rounded up, and provides the value from Table 4C1 in Row 'Item 1.' for
Cg4C1 = 0.6.
To obtain the value from Table 4C3 and hence Cg4C3, the duct 'Spacing' must then be
selected (spacing values defined in Table 4C3 for BS7671:2018). The spacing and
number of ducts (above), provides the value from Table 4C3 to give the value of Cg4C3
= 0.95.
The overall rating Cgoverall = 0.6 * 0.95 = 0.57, and will be used for the Cg rating factor in
the calculations.

8 Construction Tab
Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in ground – BICCData
Depth of Lay (Ground installation methods)

Indicates the depth at which the cable is installed. A grouping rating factor (Cdg) of less than
1.0 is applicable for installation depths greater than 0.5 m. This has the effect of increasing
the tabulated current rating required when the cable is selected. The rating factors are
more severe for larger cable sizes.
Soil Thermal Resistivity (Ground installation methods)
Indicates the ability of the soil to conduct heat energy away from the cable. A derating
factor (Cs) of less than 1.0 is applicable for resistivities greater than 1.2 K.m/W. This has the
effect of increasing the tabulated current rating required when the cable is selected. The
derating factors are more severe for larger cable sizes.

8 Construction Tab
Spacing (Ground installation methods)

Where cables are grouped together, a grouping rating factor (Cg) is applied. This has the
effect of increasing the tabulated current rating required when the cable is selected. The
rating factors are more severe for larger cable sizes.
The actual value of the rating factor is dependent on the distance the cables are spaced;
the greater the spacing, the higher the value of the factor (the lower the derating).
For single-core cables installed ‘Buried Direct’, where the spacing is zero, the actual
grouping rating factor used depends on whether the cables are installed ‘Flat’ or ‘Trefoil’.

8 Construction Tab
CPC
To access these settings, Construction / Cable/ CPC.
The controls in the CPCpane enable the configuration of the CPCto be selected.
CPCConfiguration – Armour + Separate/Integral

The Armour will be used as the CPC. If the Armour alone is inadequate (Zs too high to
ensure earth fault disconnection within the required time), an additional CPCconductor
will be added in parallel to reduce the value of Zs.
Any additional CPCconductor that may be required can be separate, or integral, within a
multi-core cable (Select ‘Integral Conductor’).
A separate CPCis automatically sized unless a size is specified in the Size box.
NOTE– Although commonly used, this method can be unreliable. Because of the
magnetic field associated with the armour, it is difficult to predict the division of fault
current between the two parallel conductors. See IETGuidance Note 6, 6.3.1.
CPCConfiguration – Conduit + Separate/Integral

The Metallic Conduit will be used as the CPC. If the Metallic Conduit alone is inadequate (Zs
too high to ensure earth fault disconnection within the required time), an additional CPC
conductor will be added in parallel to reduce the value of Zs.
Any additional CPCconductor that may be required can be separate, or integral within a
multi-core cable (Check ‘Integral conductor’).
According to the installation method selected in the Cable tab, the Metallic Conduit option
will be replaced with Sheath, Earth Conductor, or Metallic Trunking.

8 Construction Tab
CPCConfiguration – Armour ONLY

The Armour ONLYwill be used as the CPC. No additional conductors will be considered. If
the value of Zs is too high to ensure earth fault disconnection within the required time, an
error message will be generated when the network is calculated.
According to the installation method selected in the Cable pane, the Armour option will be
replaced with Sheath, Earth Conductor, Metallic Conduit, or Metallic Trunking.
CPCConfiguration – Armour ORSeparate/Integral

Initially, the Armour ONLYwill be used as the CPC. No additional conductors will be
considered. If the value of Zs is too high to ensure earth fault disconnection within the
required time, the Armour will be disregarded and an additional conductor will be sized, if
possible, to meet disconnection requirements (i.e., reduce the value of Zs to ensure earth
fault disconnection within the required time).
Any additional CPCconductor that may be required can be separate or integral within a
For a separate CPC, the size is automatically sized unless a size is specified in the Size box.
NOTE– This method meets the requirements of the NICEICTechnical Manual.
CPCConfiguration – Separate/Integral conductor ONLY

Any Armour will be disregarded. An additional conductor will be sized, if possible, to meet
disconnection requirements (i.e., reduce the value of Zs to ensure earth fault
disconnection within the required time).
Any additional CPCconductor that may be required can be separate or integral within a
For a separate CPC, the size is automatically sized unless a size is specified in the Size box.
According to the installation method selected in the Cable pane, the Armour option will be
replaced with Sheath, Earth Conductor, Metallic Conduit, or Metallic Trunking option.
CPCConfiguration – Separate Conductor/Integral conductor

Where a CPCconductor other than, or in addition to, the Armour, Sheath, Earth
Conductor, Metallic Conduit, or Metallic Trunking is to be used, the item selected here
specifies whether that conductor will be a conductor integral to a multi-core cable or a
separate conductor.
The integral option is only available for multi-core cables where an unused conductor is
available, for example, for a three-phase and neutral circuit the cable type must be
available in 5-core form.

8 Construction Tab
Maximum CPCSize
The sizes listed include all the sizes generally available for the type of cable selected. To set
a particular CPCsize, clear the Auto check box and select the required size from the list.
The calculation will then check the suitability of the set CPCsize.
When the Auto check box is selected, the CPCcalculations will automatically select the
smallest size from the sizes listed that allows the circuit to disconnect within the specified
time limit (5s, 0.4s, etc.) To prevent the size of the CPCrising disproportionately to the
phase conductor size, a setting is applied to limit the number of sizes to which the CPCwill
rise above the phase conductor size. The settings can be accessed from Settings / Project
Settings / Calculations / Maximum CPCSizes .When the separate CPCSize is set to Auto, a
message is displayed next to the CPCSize setting giving details of the maximum setting.

8 Construction Tab
Protection
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable / Protection.
The Protection pane contains settings for the selection of an overcurrent device or an
overcurrent device and earth fault protection, as required.
To access these settings, select Protection.
Circuit Protective Device (CPD) Selection

Initially, the selected device is shown as the default type.
To select another device type, click Change. The Protective Devices Selector dialog appears.
Select the device type according to Manufacturer, Family, Type and Protection.
The rating can be selected as Auto, or as one of the values listed in the Rating box. Click
Apply to complete the selection.

8 Construction Tab
Manufacturer
The list contains the names of all the manufacturers for which CPD data is held in the
SingleCableProDesignProDesign MEdatabase. Every effort is made to include as many
product ranges as possible.
‘Generic’ provides a selection of ‘standard’ fuse and circuit-breaker types.
Selecting a manufacturer from the list filters the items listed in the Family, Type Protection,
and Rating boxes to devices from that manufacturer’s product ranges.
Manufacturer Buttons
There are buttons for some manufacturers. Clicking a manufacturer’s button selects that
manufacturer in the Manufacturer list.
Family
The list contains the names of available product ranges for the selected manufacturer.
Selecting an item filters the contents of the Type, Protection, and Rating boxes to those
available in the selected range.
Type
The list contains the names of CPD types that exist for the product range selected in the
Family list. Selecting a type, filters the contents of the Protection and Rating boxes to those
available in the selected type.
Protection
The list contains the types of protection available for the CPD type selected. Selecting a
protection type filters the contents of the Rating box to those ratings available for the

8 Construction Tab
selected protection type.

Rating
The Rating box contains a list of all the ratings that exist for the type of protection selected.
When Auto is selected, the lowest rating that complies with the calculations will be
automatically selected. When a particular rating is selected, that rating will be used and
checked by the calculations for compliance.
The CPD selected will used in the circuit when the OKbutton in the Protective Devices
Selector is clicked. The details in the Protection pane are updated to show the details for
the newly selected device:
Adding Residual Current Protection

Where a device has phase fault and earth fault protection functions (for example, an
electronic circuit-breaker), the earth fault function characteristic will be used to determine
disconnection for earth faults.
Where a separate residual current device (RCD) is to be used in combination with an
overcurrent protective device, this can be defined by selecting the Add-on RCD check box
(a typical example is the use of a 30 mA RCD in addition to an MCB.):
The RCD characteristic will be used to determine disconnection under earth fault
conditions. The RCD type is selected in the Protective Devices Selector dialog in a similar
way to that used when selecting the overcurrent protective device, except the devices
listed will be limited to RCDs only. The devices listed are generic types offering a range of
sensitivities with instantaneous and time-delayed tripping.
Adding AFDD Protection
Where an Arc Flash Detection device (AFDD) is required to be used, it can be combined with
an overcurrent protective device. To define this, select the Add-on AFDD check box:

8 Construction Tab
Device Selection Filters

In the Protective Devices Selector dialog, finding a suitable device from the lists can be
made easier by using the filters. To display the filters panel, click the Device Selections Filters
option:
The filter functions are:
Select this check box… to…
Hide Obsolete CPDs hide all circuit protective devices no longer commercially
available.
Devices with earth fault restrict the devices listed to those having built-in earth fault
protection protection.
Filter for Breaking restrict the devices listed to those with a breaking capacity
Capacity (Icu) equal to or greater than the value in the box.
Devices with graphical restrict the devices listed to those for which the new graphical
data only curve data and full adjustments is available.
MCBs and Fuses only restrict listings to these devices only.
Supported restrict listings to these manufacturers only. Supported

Manufacturers only manufacturers collaborate in providing regular data checks
and updates.
Overload Setting methods

For adjustable protective devices, there are three overload setting methods. The initial
setting method when the device is first selected is determined by the setting in the
Overload Adjustment dialog. The overload setting methods and how they are set are as
follows:

8 Construction Tab
Option Description
Set at Maximum The selected overload setting is the maximum setting available:
(project not
calculated)
(project calculated)
Set to auto When the project is calculated, the overload is adjusted to the
lowest setting equal to or greater than the design current:
(project not
calculated)
(project calculated)
Fixed A setting is selected by the user:
Overload Setting Adjustment

The overload setting of an adjustable device can be adjusted in two places:
l In the Overload Adjustment dialog
l In the Graph View
The Overload Adjustment dialog
The Overload Adjustment dialog appears when you click Adjust Overload in the Protection
pane either if the Rating (In) of the protective device has been set to Auto and the project
has been calculated, or if the Rating is set at a fixed value.
The Set manually option is initially selected since the primary purpose of the dialog is to
allow a fixed overload setting to be manually applied. Alternatively, the overload can be Set
at maximum or Set to Auto. When the dialog is closed using the Apply button, the current
setting will be applied.
The dialog contains boxes showing the values of the device rating and design current if the
project has been calculated.

8 Construction Tab
It also contains a panel showing details of the overload settings and below it a summary of
the currently selected setting.
The panel shows, in a table format, all the available overload settings and their absolute
current values, for the selected protective device. Where there are two settings used to set
the overload (a coarse and a fine setting), they are shown as above with the absolute value
shown at the intersection of the two settings.
Where the project (and, therefore, the design current) has been calculated, the
recommended setting value is highlighted in dark green. Where there are two setting
combinations that achieve the same optimum setting value, the second recommendation
is highlighted in light green. (The primary recommendation will be the one that uses the
lowest coarse setting).
The setting value that was in effect when the dialog was initially open is highlighted in grey.
This is the setting value that will apply if the Cancel button is used to close the dialog.
If the overload setting method is Set manually, the overload setting can be chosen by
clicking on the required setting value in the table; the adjustment details for the selected
overload setting are shown below the table. For example, in the image shown above, the
selected overload value is 100 A and the required adjustments are: Io = 1; Ir = 1, which are
the actual settings that need to be made on the dials on the front of the protective device.
When the dialog is closed by clicking Apply, the selected settings are applied.
If the protective device Rating (In) is set to Auto and the project has not been calculated, the
Overload Adjustment dialog will appear as shown below. The overload setting method can
be Set at maximum or Set to Auto but it will not be possible to set the overload until the
nominal rating of the device has been set either by the user or by the program calculation.

8 Construction Tab
Devices With Non-graphical Data

For the majority of protective devices, full graphical data is available. For these devices the
full range of setting adjustments is represented and disconnection data for calculations is
taken from the tripping characteristic resulting from the settings made. These devices also
have a fully toleranced characteristic curve available, showing the full range of tripping
times from maximum to minimum tolerance limits.
For a small number of devices tripping data is held in tables, and only limited data is
available for those devices with adjustable short-circuit protection settings. Devices may be
selected for short-circuit protection set ‘@min’ or ‘@max’ but disconnection data for
intermediate settings will not be available.
There are two features in the Protective Device Selector dialog that can be used to identify
which type of data is available:
l In the Protection box, an asterisk (* ) is used to indicate devices for which full graphical
data is held.
l When the filter ‘Devices with graphical data only’ is checked, only those devices for
which full graphical data is held will be listed.
For devices with non-graphical data, the following procedures are different to those
described in the Protection pane section above:
l Device Adjustment.
l Graph View.
Device Adjustment for Non-graphical Data
Overload settings are selected from the list box below the protective device description.
The full range of overload settings available on the device will be listed:

8 Construction Tab
For those devices with adjustable short-circuit or instantaneous trips, a device set ‘@max’
or ‘@min’ should be selected from the Protection list in the Protective Device Selector:
NOTE– For a device with non-graphical data, only the two adjustments described
above have any effect on the outcome of the calculations. Although its characteristic
curve and any associated settings can be viewed and adjusted (see The Graph
View), any adjustments made in this way has no effect on the calculations.
Graph View for Non-graphical Data

For devices with non-graphical data, only the nominal characteristic curve will be available.
Breaking Capacity
The breaking capacity of the selected CPD can be assessed in two ways:
l Fully Rated: a check is made to ensure that the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) is equal
to or greater than the calculated prospective fault current (Ipf );
l Back-up Protection: a check is made to ensure that the back-up breaking capacity is
equal to or greater than the calculated prospective fault current (Ipf ). The back-up
rating depends on the performance of the associated CPDs on the route back to
source of the one under consideration.
When choosing back-up protection, a drop down list is shown and the CPD which
offers the greatest back-up rating for the device under consideration is automatically
selected. The user can define the back-up CPD by selecting a device in the drop down
list. If the manually selected CPD (or Auto back-up CPD) upstream is changed, the
device under consideration is re-set to 'Fully Rated'.
l Back-up ratings are only available for combinations of supply side and load side
CPDs tested and rated by the manufacturer. The selection is only available when
such a combination is present.
l If the manually selected back-up protective device is not the highest rated in the
available list, it may not be providing the back-up protection in an installation
scenario. A warning is shown in these instances at the end of the calculation.
No Protection
This should be selected only if the circuit has circuit protective device (CPD).

8 Construction Tab
When the Has Protection check box isnot selected, the cable sizing, short-circuit and earth
fault calculations for the circuit are performed using the characteristics of the nearest CPD
in the network on the supply side of the circuit.
View Graph Button

The View Graph button becomes active when a rating for the CPD has been specified.
When the CPD is set to Auto the project must be first calculated for this button to become
active. This is providing Graphical Data for the device is available.
The graph will show a single upstream CPD and a single downstream CPD (where
connected and calculated). The graph views and device settings can be altered in the same
manner as explained in 'Protection Study'.
To return to the device selection area, press the back button.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable/ Display Results.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, Construction / Cable/ Comments.

8 Construction Tab
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Cable/ Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Busbars group
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars.
There are five busbar components in the ProDesign software, which can be used to
construct busbar systems:
Busbar
Used to represent the busbar connection between an end feed and a tap off, a centre feed
and a tap off, or a tap-off and a tap off:
For more information, see Busbar.

8 Construction Tab
Centre Feed Unit

Used as the connection point for the cable supplying a centre-fed busbar system. A
correctly connected centre feed has one cable connection and two busbar connections:
For more information, see Centre Feed.
End Feed Unit

Used as the connection point for the cable supplying a busbar system. A correctly
connected end feed has one cable connection and one busbar connection:
For more information, see End Feed.

8 Construction Tab
Tap Off Unit

Used to connect outgoing cable circuits to a busbar system. A correctly connected Tap Off
has one or two busbar connections and one cable connection:
For more information, see Tap Off.
In this section:
l Busbar
l Centre Feed
l End Feed
l Tap Off
Busbar Settings
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar.
To open the Busbar Settings dialog, either:

8 Construction Tab
l Double-click on the busbar to open the Busbar dialog.

l Select the Construction tab and then in the Busbars group, tap Busbar.
l Right-click on the busbar on the drawing to open the shortcut menu, then select
Properties.
The Busbar Settings dialog contains data that defines the busbar settings. The default
screen is split into the following sections:
ID
A unique text designation for the busbar, which is displayed on the drawing. The same
name is used in reports.
The default designation for this cable is 'BB-n-Sec'x' where 'n' represents a unique number
for the busbar and 'x' represents a unique section number for the busbar. See Project
Settings / Drawing / Component Numbering.

8 Construction Tab
ID Displayed
'eye' icon.
Name
Name Displayed
the 'eye' icon.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of the network item supplying the busbar.
TO: Gives the reference of the network item the busbar is supplying.
Template
Allows a template, if previously defined, to be used instead of the default Amtech settings.
Length
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Length.

8 Construction Tab
Section Length
Used to set the length for an individual section of a busbar (for example, from tap off to tap
off) in a busbar system.
Total Length
Displays the total length of the busbar system, comprising the sum of the lengths of each
individual section.
Manufacturer/Range/Type/Rating
The currently selected busbar Manufacturer/Range/Type/Rating are displayed. These
settings can be changed in the Details pane.
Details
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Details.
The Details pane contains the settings that are used to determine the busbar
configuration:

8 Construction Tab
Manufacturer
Select the busbar manufacturer from the list. The ranges and types shown in the boxes
below will restrict those available for that manufacturer.
Range/Type
Select the range and type from the lists to complete the busbar selection.
Rating
For busbars where the rating is set to Auto, when the project is calculated the minimum
suitable rating is automatically selected from the range of ratings available for the selected
busbar type. Alternatively, clear the Auto check box and select a rating from the list. When
the project is calculated, the selected size is checked for suitability.
Temp (°C)
Set the temperature to match the average ambient temperature at which the busbar is to
operate.
Installation
Set the installation orientation, for example, a busbar riser should be set to the Vertical
option. Some busbar types are derated when installed vertically.

8 Construction Tab
Function
A short text description can be entered to describe the function of the busbar. The
description will appear in relevant reports.
Location
A short text description can be entered for the location of the busbar. The description will
appear in relevant reports.
Parallel Busbars
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Parallel Busbars.
Enables a parallel busbar to be selected.
Parallel Mode
Allows either a single busbar or parallel busbar to be selected.
NOTE– This option may not be available.
Connection
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Connection.
Phase
Displays the configuration of the phase connections. To change the busbar phasing,
change the phasing of the supplying cable.
Wired
Displays the wiring configuration of the busbar to 'SPN', 'TPN' or 'TP'.
on BS7671:2018 (Regulation 411.3.2).
CPC
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / CPC.

8 Construction Tab
Set the busbar component(s) being used as the circuit protective conductor. The choices
offered match the earthing arrangements for the selected busbar.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Display Results.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator

8 Construction Tab
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Busbar / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Centre Feed
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Centre Feed.
The Busbar Centre Feed Settings dialog contains data that defines the Centre Feeder
information. The default screen is split into three sections:
l The lower section (grey/white) relates to design information.
ID
The text reference for the Busbar Centre Feed used in reports. It is also displayed on the
drawing if the Displayed reference box is selected.
Name
The secondary text reference for the Busbar Centre Feed used in reports. It is also
displayed on the drawing if the Displayed reference box is selected.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of the cable supplying the Centre Feed.
TO: Gives the reference of the busbar connected to the Centre Feed.

8 Construction Tab
Comments pane
report.
Attachments pane

8 Construction Tab
End Feed
To access these settings, from the Construction tab, select Busbars / End Feed.
The Busbar End Feed Settings dialog contains data that defines the End Feeder
information. The default screen is split into three sections:
ID
The text reference for the Busbar End Feed used in reports. It is also displayed on the
drawing if the Display Reference check box is selected.
Name
The secondary text reference for the Busbar End Feed used in reports. It is also displayed
on the drawing if the Display Reference check box is selected.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of the cable supplying the End Feed.
TO: Gives the reference of the busbar connected to the End Feed.

8 Construction Tab
Comments pane
report.
Attachments pane

8 Construction Tab
Tap Off
To access these settings, select Construction / Busbars / Tap Off.
The Busbar Tap Off Settings dialog contains data that defines the Tap Off information. The
default screen is split into three sections:
ID
The text reference for the Busbar Tap Off used in reports. It is also displayed on the
drawing if the Displayed check box is selected.
Name
The secondary text reference for the Busbar Tap Off used in reports. It is also displayed on
the drawing if the Displayed check box is selected.
Details
Allows you to identify the function of the Tapoff unit.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of the busbar supplying the Tap Off.
TO: Gives the reference of the cable connected to the load side of Tap Off.
Protection pane
The Protection pane contains the settings for the circuit protective device for the circuit
connected to the Tap Off. See Cables / Protection.

8 Construction Tab
Diversity pane
The diversity controls are similar to those for the Distribution Board (see Project Settings /
Calculations / Diversity).
The only type of diversity setting available is Manual, that is, a setting between 0.01 and 2
that is used to multiply the total connected load to find the diversified load. Diversity is
applied to the load connected to the Tap Off.
For example: Load connected to Tap Off = 120 A; Diversity setting = 0.8; Diversified Load =
96 A.
Comments pane
report.
Attachments pane

8 Construction Tab
Loads group
To access these settings, select Construction / Loads.
There are three categories of load type in the software:
l Non-motor loads
l Motor loads
l Street lighting
This section describes data input contained within the dialogs for these loads.
Final circuits, comprising the cable supplying a load and the load itself (the software will
produce this final circuit as one component), can be defined in one of two ways:
1. On the network drawing: draw the final circuits (either with a load or motor) connected
to a switchboard, distribution board, consumer unit, or busbar tap off.
2. Within the circuit diagram within a distribution board or consumer unit dialog, display
the Circuit dialog to define the cable and load details.
For details, see Construction / Boards / Distribution Boards / Board Loading Method.
Main Dialog Area Settings – Motor and Non-Motor Loads

Starter Position
Indicates the position at which the Starter component has been inserted in the cable
supplying the motor. The list allows for the starter to be allocated at one of three positions
or not at all in the motor circuit. The following options available are:
l None
l At Board
l Between Board and Motor
l At Motor
NOTE– The diagram on the screen will change as you move the starter, and the
cable number will increase depending on the starter location.

8 Construction Tab
The controls in the main dialog area are common to both non-motor loads and motor
loads. For area that differ between the non motor and motor loads can be seen in the
individual sections.
Common
The Final Circuit dialogs contains data that defines the final circuit conditions. The default
screen is split into three sections:
l The top section (dark blue) relates to drawing settings.
l The lower section (grey/white) relates to design and additional settings.
ID
A unique text designation for the Final Load, which is displayed on the drawing. This is the
same name used in reports.
The default designation for this component is 'FCL-n (Non-Motor Load) or FCM-n (Motor
Load)', where 'n' represents a number unique to each. See Project Settings | Drawing /
Component Numbering.
ID Displayed
'eye' icon.

Name
Name Displayed
the 'eye' icon.

Connection
Shows the reference of the cable supplying the load (Non-motor load).
Shows the starter location and from where it is supplied (Motor load).
Template

8 Construction Tab

Final Circuit dialog
Allows for the final circuit to have any junction boxes added to the circuit and give a
graphical representation of the circuit.
Number of Junction Boxes: Allows for junction boxes to be added to circuit if required.
Components: Give a graphical representation of the circuit as additional component are
added the circuit graphic will be updated.
Symbol: This allows for the Final load symbol to be revised if required.
Starter Position: See Motor Loads.
Connection
Phase: The phase connection can be set to three-phase or three-phase and neutral, or
single phase and neutral. For a single-phase, the phase of the supply can be selected.
Protection
See Cable / Protection and Motor Loads / Protection.
Details
See Non-Motor Load.
See Motor Load.
Voltage Drop
Type
Identifies the type of final load. See Non-Motor Load / Details.
Load
Identifies the final load current. See Non-Motor Load / Loads.
Load Circuit Cable Sizing
The settings in this box control how the sizing for the cable connecting the Load/Motor will
be carried out. There are two controls only one of which is enabled at any one time.
l When the cable feeding the Load/Motor is set to ‘Auto’ the ‘Limit maximum cable size to
field becomes available and the Cable size fixed at field is disabled. The size limit box
allows a size to be chosen from the list. The default setting is ‘No Limit’; this has the
same effect as choosing the largest cable size. Selecting a lower size limits the range of
cable sizes available to the Auto cable sizing processes.

8 Construction Tab
l When the cable size feeding the Load/Motor is fixed in the Cable dialog, the Cable Size
Fixed at option becomes available and displays the user-selected cable size.
Voltage Drop Limit
Allow the volt drop calculation for the load be either the Global limits or a defined specific
limit.
Apply Global Limit
The box contains read-only text boxes summarising the settings being applied from the
source to this load.
The values are determined according to the type of supply, load type, load length, and the
settings in the Voltage Drop pane as follows:
l ‘The limit set …(%)’. If User Defined has been selected, the value entered will be
displayed. If Apply BS7671 has been selected, the value will depend on the type of
supply and load type as follows:
l Public Supply, Lighting Load: 3 %; Public Supply, Non-Lighting Load: 5 %;
l Private Supply, Lighting Load: 6 %; Private Supply, Non-Lighting Load: 8 %.
l Wiring System Length – The sum of the lengths of the conductors between the source
and the load. ‘N/A’ if User Defined is selected.
l Extra Allowance – Calculated as BS7671:2018 Appendix 4, 6.4.
Both the Wiring System Length and Extra Allowance fields will contain the text ‘N/A’ if the
Add additional voltage drop allowance for wiring systems over 100 m of 0.005 % per metre
over 100 m (max. 0.5 %) option is de-selected on the Voltage Drop pane or if User Defined is
selected.

8 Construction Tab
Total Voltage Drop Allowance – The sum of the values held in the two percentage boxes
above.
To revise the global volt drop limits, see Supply / Voltage.
Define SpecificLimit
The option contains controls the setting of a specific limit for the voltage drop from the
source to this load. The options are Voltage Drop Limit (%) or Minimum Voltage at Load
Terminals (V). These controls function in the same way as those in the Voltage Drop pane.
Cables
For information on how to fill cables dialog sections, see the following corresponding
topics, this applies for both sections:
l Cable
l Grouping
l CPC
Display Results
Grouped Together
If the check box is selected the final load display parameters (Cable and Load) will be
grouped together on the Schematic in ProDesign. If the check box is de-selected then it is
possible to move each of the final load components (Cable and Load) separately on the
schematic.
Each component will need the Display check box selected to be shown on the schematic.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line

8 Construction Tab
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
report.
Attachments
Non-Motor Load
In this section:

8 Construction Tab
l Surge Protective Device (SPD)
Type
A list of load types. Selection of the correct load type is important because calculation rules
vary according to load types; specifically the rules for earth fault disconnection times,
classification of load types for load analysis and diversity settings.
Design Current
The connected load current used as the design current (Ib) in the calculation for the
selection of the CPD rating [In≥ Ib].
Active Power
The active power is the active power for the load. The active power is directly linked to the
design current, power factor, and the voltage of the load. If you revise the active power, it
will change either the power factor or the design current.
Power Factor
The power factor of the load current.
3rd Harmonic
The level of third harmonic distortion in the load current expressed as a percentage of the
fundamental current.
Earth Fault Disconnection Current
on BS7671:2018 (Regulation 411.3.2).
Diversity
Diversity for final circuits can be set in two ways: at the dialog for the DB feeding the final
circuit and this setting. This setting can be made within the range 0.1 to 2. The effective
setting for this load circuit will be the two settings multiplied together. This is shown in the
Total Diversity box. The diversity setting in the Load dialog is fixed at 1 when the diversity
setting at the feeding DB is Table H2.

8 Construction Tab
The Standby setting effectively sets the diversity for the circuit to zero.
The CPD sizing for a final circuit is unaffected by the diversity setting. For example, Load =
20 A, Diversity = 0.5; the CPD rating would be selected as 20 A, the load added to the feeding
DB for this circuit would be 20 x 0.5 = 10 A.
System Voltage
Corresponds to the value entered in the dialog for the network active source. It is shown in
the form Three-phase/Single-phase.
Non-Motor Load Surge Protective Device
To access these settings, select the Load / SPD.

8 Construction Tab
SPD Quantity
Select between None, Single Device and Multiple Devices.
Define the quantity of Surge Protective Devices. Selecting multiple will give the option to
define the number of devices on this circuit, and give access to multiple reference towards
the bottom of the dialog.

8 Construction Tab
Type
Select the type of device(s) to be installed from Type 1, Type 1+ Type 2, Type 2 and Type 3.
Quantity
Only active if SPD Quantity is set to Multiple Devices.
Defines the number of Surge Protective Devices on the circuit (e.g. for socket circuit
containing multiple socket points).
Max Backup Rating

The maximum permissible rating of the back up device (e.g. a fuse), that will provide
protection for the Surge Protective Device. During calculation a check is made to ensure
the Upstream protective device is not larger than this specified value.
If the Surge Protective Device has built in protection and therefore may not need an
upstream protective device, the Built-in Protection check box can be used. Using this
option disables the Max Backup Rating value, and no check is performed with an upstream
device.
Fault Rating
The Fault Rating of the Surge Protective Device. During calculation, the Prospective Short
Circuit Current is checked against this value.
Length to PEConductor
The length of conductor from the output of the Surge Protective Device to the Protective
Earth conductor. This is shown as ‘Length C’ of Fig 534.8 - Connection of the SPD -
BS7671:2018.
Manufacturer
Optional Text field to enter the Manufacturer of the Surge Protective Device. If Multiple
Devices has been selected, all devices are deemed to be the same for the circuit.
Model
Optional Text field to enter the Model of the Surge Protective Device. If Multiple Devices has
been selected, all devices are deemed to be the same for the circuit.
Part Number
Optional Text field to enter the Part Number of the Surge Protective Device. If Multiple
References
Enter the ID(s) and Name(s) of the Device(s) of the circuit.

8 Construction Tab
Motor Loads
Details pane (Motors)
In this section:
l Surge Protective Device (SPD)
Type
A list of motor load types. Selection of the correct load type is important because
calculation rules vary according to motor load types; specifically the rules for diversity
settings selection of the CPD for different starting methods and earth fault disconnection
times.

8 Construction Tab
Rating
The rating in kW is used, in conjunction with the No. of Poles, to find typical values of power
factor and efficiency which are inserted into their respective edit boxes in the dialog. The
supply voltage, rating, power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the load
current. Alternatively, the load current and power factor can be typed directly into the
Load and Power Factor boxes.
The CPD and cable sizing calculations are based on the load and power factor; the rating
(kW), No. of Poles and Efficiency are not used for this purpose.
No. of Poles
The No. of Poles is used, in conjunction with the rating in kW, to find typical values of power
factor and efficiency which are inserted into their respective edit boxes in the dialog. The
supply voltage, rating, power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the load
current.
Load
The software can provide the calculated load current for a motor in two ways:
l From the values you enter for the Rating and No. of Poles. Typical power factors and
efficiencies are used to calculate the load current
l From values you enter for power factor and efficiency. The load current is used as the
design current (Ib) in the calculation for cable sizing [Iz≥ Ib].
NOTE– This is not the same as the rule used for non-motor loads.
Power Factor
The power factor of the motor under steady load conditions.

When you enter the motor Rating and No. of Poles, a typical power factor is inserted in the
box.
Efficiency
The efficiency of the motor under normal load conditions.

When you enter the motor Rating and No. of Poles, a typical efficiency is inserted in the box.

8 Construction Tab
3rd Harmonic
The level of third harmonic distortion in the load current expressed as a percentage of the
fundamental current. For example, Load current = 40 A, 3rd Harmonic = 25 %; 3rd
harmonic current = 10 A. For motors, harmonic distortion would only be present where
electronic control equipment is used.
Show Starter Position
Indicates the position at which the Starter component has been inserted in the cable
supplying the motor. The drop-down list allows for the starter to be allocated at one of
three positions or not at all in the motor circuit. The options available are:
l None
l At Board
l Between Board and Motor
l At Motor
NOTE– The diagram on the screen changes as you move the starter and the cable
number will increase depending on the starter location.
Overload Settingat Starter
The overload setting at the starter must be set above, or at, the motor load current. The
overload setting is taken as the design current (Ib) when sizing the circuit cable.
Exemption to Earth Fault Disconnection asper Regulation 419
Enables you to identify if the Soft Stater or Other Assisted Stater cables feeding the motor
complies with regulation 419 when earth fault disconnection times cannot be met to
comply with 411.3.2.
When set to the Auto option, the earth fault disconnection time limit is automatically
calculated based on BS7671:2018 411.3.2.
When set to fixed, the required earth fault disconnection time limit can be selected from
the list. If the manually selected earth fault disconnection time limit exceeds the value
stated in BS7671:2018 411.3.2, an error message appears during project calculation.

8 Construction Tab
Diversity
Diversity for final circuits can be set in two ways: at the dialog for the DB feeding the final
circuit and this setting. This setting can be made within the range 0.1 to 2. The overall
diversity setting for this circuit will be the two settings multiplied together. This is shown in
the Total Diversity box. The diversity setting in the Load dialog is fixed at 1 when the
diversity setting at the feeding DB is Table H2.
It would normally be appropriate to set diversity for a motor to 1.0 in the Motor dialog – at
the final circuit level.
The Standby setting effectively sets the diversity for the circuit to zero. For example, two
motors connected to one distribution board, one Duty and one Standby. Set the Duty one
as ‘Duty’ (Diversity = 1) and the other as ‘Standby’ (Diversity = 0). The result will be the cable
for each motor will be sized for the load current; the contribution to the total design
current at the distribution board will be the load current for just one motor.
Supply Voltage
The system voltage corresponds to the value entered in the dialog for the network active
source. It is shown in the form Three-phase/Single-phase.
AssessVoltage Drop on Starting
The calculation that assesses voltage drop on motor starting adds the voltage drop
caused by the starting currents of all selected motors to the network voltage drop levels
caused by load currents. Selecting this check box includes the motor in the group of
motors included in the assessment.
Start Current
Value of starting current used in motor starting voltage drop assessment. The typical value
inserted in the box can be overwritten if preferred.
Start PF
Value of power factor used in motor starting voltage drop assessment. The typical value
inserted in the box can be overwritten if preferred.
Include Motor Fault Contribution
The calculation that assesses voltage drop on motor starting adds the voltage drop
caused by the starting currents of all selected motors to the network voltage drop levels
caused by load currents. Selecting the check box includes the motor in the group of
motors included in the assessment.

8 Construction Tab
Zm
Value of equivalent motor impedance used for fault contribution assessment. The typical
value inserted in the box can be overwritten if preferred.
Fault PF
The typical value inserted in the box can be overwritten if preferred. If modified, the X/R
ratio will recalculate.
X/R
The Reactance/Resistance ratio of the equivalent motor impedance used for fault
contribution assessment. The typical value inserted in the box can be overwritten if
preferred. If modified, the Fault PFvalue will recalculate.
Protection
l Overcurrent Protective Device Motor Rating is initially set to (Auto). The initial value can
be modified to any greater value. The value set will be used as the basis for the cable
sizing calculations.
l Motor Load (A) read-only text box showing the same value as the Load text box in the
Load form.
For standard protective device setup, see Cable / Protection.
Motor Load Surge Protective Device
To access these settings, select the Motor / SPD.

8 Construction Tab
SPD Quantity
Select between None, Single Device.
Type

8 Construction Tab
Max Backup Rating

device.
Fault Rating
The Fault Rating of the Surge Protective Device. During calculation, the Prospective Short
Circuit Current is checked against this value.
BS7671:2018.
Manufacturer
Optional Text field to enter the Manufacturer of the Surge Protective Device. If Multiple
Model
Optional Text field to enter the Model of the Surge Protective Device. If Multiple Devices has
been selected, all devices are deemed to be the same for the circuit.
Part Number
Optional Text field to enter the Part Number of the Surge Protective Device. If Multiple
ID
Enter the ID of the Surge Protective Device.
Name
Enter the Name of the Surge Protective Device.
Lighting Columns
Street Lighting circuits in the ProDesign software are made up of a series of Lighting
Columns interconnected by cables.

8 Construction Tab
Data inputs are similar to those described for the Cable and Load dialogs. Variations are
described below.
Lighting Load Column dialog

Lighting column internal Cable Dialog
The Cable dialog differs for the Lighting Column dialog as can be seen below:
The Column Height describes the length of the cable run in the lighting column, and
replaces the Length input.
Lighting Column Load Dialog

8 Construction Tab
Type
Select the type of lamp being used.

The rating can be selected from the list; otherwise select ‘User Defined’.
RunningCurrent
If a lamp rating is selected from the list in the Lamp Rating box, the running current will be
found from a table of typical operating currents for the lamp type selected multiplied by
the number of lamps. If the lamp rating is selected as ‘User Defined’ the running current
should be entered by the user.
NOTE– The ProDesign software does not consider the effect of inrush current. You
must ensure that the selected protective devices are suitable.
No. of Lamps
The number of lamps fitted to the column should be entered. The running current is
calculated from the lamp rating and the number of lamps.
Power Factor / Third Harmonic
These inputs works in a similar way to the Running Current above. Typical values will be
inserted when the lamp rating is selected as ‘User Defined’.
Earth Fault Disconnection Current
on BS7671:2018 411.3.2.
BS7671:2018 411.3.2, an error message is reported during project calculation.
Lighting Column Cable Dialog

For the interconnecting cables between the lighting columns, the following are changed
compared to the normal cable dialog:

8 Construction Tab
Cable to 1st Column
The Length to first column field describes the length of the cable from the distribution
board and the first lighting column, and replaces the length input.
Cable Column to Column
The Length Col/Col field describes the length of the cable from one lighting column to the
next, and replaces the Length input.

8 Construction Tab
Boards group
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards.
There are four types of electrical components within the Boards section of the ProDesign
software ribbon: Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit, and Modular Board.
To place a board, select the icon with a left mouse click and then place the board in the
drawing area.
To open the Board Settings dialog, do one of the following:
l Click on the board symbol that you want to open. This opens the required 'board'
dialog.
l Right-click on the board that you want to edit. A shortcut menu appears. Select
Properties.
Multiple switchboards can be placed in each network.
In this section:
l Switchboard
l Distribution Board
l Distribution Board ME
l Consumer Unit
l Modular Board
Switchboard
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard.

8 Construction Tab
The Switchboard Settings dialog contains data that defines the switchboard settings,
grouped by related items. The default screen is split into the following sections.
ID
A unique text designation for the switchgear that is displayed on the drawing. The same
ID Displayed
'eye' icon.

8 Construction Tab
Name
Name Displayed
the 'eye' icon.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference for the cable or busbar supplying the switchboard.
Template
In this section:
l Board Details
l Circuits
l Board Loading Method
l Earthing
l Display Results
l Comments
l Attachments
Board Details
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Board Details.
Wired
Selects the wiring system for the board. The options are TP (three-phase) or TPN (three-
phase and Neutral). These are automatically set by the downstream load types.

8 Construction Tab
Sections
A switchboard can have one or up to four sections connected through an interconnecting

switch. For example, when two sections are selected, the switchboard is drawn with two
sections.
Reference
Where a switchboard is split into multiple sections, these boxes contain the references for
the sections.
Section references are appended to the Main Switchboard reference. For example, where
a switchboard with a reference ‘Main Switchboard’ has a section with a reference ‘Section
A’, the complete reference for that section will be: ‘Main Switchboard Section A’. Select or
clear the Display Ref?check box to display or hide the reference on the drawing.
Display Ref
The Section display reference can be displayed or hidden on the drawing by selecting or
deselecting the Display Ref?check box.
Switch Closed
The interconnector can be modelled as open or closed.
Board Load Rating/Fault Rating/Function/Location/Model No
The data contained in the Board Load Rating / Fault Rating / Function / Location / Model
No. is included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information only and is not
used in any part of the calculations.
Circuits
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Circuits.

8 Construction Tab
Lists details for the outgoing circuits including: Reference, Circuit Protective Device (CPD)
description, Switch Status, and Phase connections.
Where the board is split into multiple sections, the associated circuits are listed separately
for each section; the listing for each section is preceded by an entry in bold text that gives
the reference of the section and the CPD being used to protect that section.
The secondary bold text details are for the incoming supply to that section of the board.
This is also indicated by “Incomer-“ being prefixed to the cable name.
For each item in the list: Double-click on the CPD details to display the Protective Device
dialog (for details on data inputs for the circuit protective device, see Construction / Cables
/ Protection.
The Switch Status list enables you to set the switch to state to Open or Closed. The state of
this switch is reflected in the calculations.
Click on the down arrow in the Phase list to select a different phase connection (only for
single-phase supplies).
Board Loading Method

To access the project settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Board Loading
Method.
For all boards it is possible to either use estimated load or detailed design loads data when
producing a project in ProDesign 2016. The settings that appear depend on if you select
the Estimated Load or Detailed Design Loads option.

8 Construction Tab
In this section:
l Estimated Load
l Detailed Design Loads
Estimated Load
Estimated Loads can entered/calculated in two ways:
1. By calculating the estimated electrical load by using the floor area of your project area.
2. By using load information that may already be known and entering this into the By
Load Category section.
The estimated load function is for final circuits and motor circuits only. It does not include
sub main circuits coming from that specific board.
Floor area
The estimated electrical load when using the floor area is calculated by entering the floor
area (length x width), the estimated electrical load in watts per meter 2, and the estimated
power factor (pf).
The result of this calculation can be seen in bold text below the entered data.

8 Construction Tab
Load Category
To add a load into the estimated load category, click .
To delete a load, click .

The estimated load category can be entered either by Load Current or Load Power.
The estimated board load is then calculated by a summation of the load category
information. These are highlighted in bold text below.

8 Construction Tab
TIP – The pf is calculated by a summation of the vector pf.
Maximum Demand Threshold (%)
The Maximum Demand Threshold field appears when diversity is set to Define Load. The
setting in the box defines the level at which a note is to be displayed in the Errors and
Warnings dialog. By default, the Global Setting option is applied:
The global setting is defined in Project Settings / Calculation / Defined Load Thresholds.
Alternatively, the Local Setting option can be used:
EXAMPLE– The settings depicted below would ensure that when the sum of the loads
connected to the board (by drawing them connected to the board on the single-line
diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) exceeds 132 A (120 x 110/100),
a Note would be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog whenever the project is
calculated.

8 Construction Tab
Volt Drop Reserve
The Voltage Drop Reserve setting is intended to represent the anticipated voltage drop in
the final circuits which are yet to be connected.

8 Construction Tab
Detailed Design Loads
Diversity
The Diversity pane provides controls to define the method used to calculate diversity at the
board for final circuits connected to the board, that is, Manual, Table H2, User Defined,
Global User Defined.
For details on diversity settings, see Calculations / Diversity.
Define Load
When Define Load is selected, the load at the board is defined by setting actual load
current values for each phase.

8 Construction Tab
The Define Load setting should normally only be used at a time when load data for a board
is not available. For example, to allow a total loading for a board of 120 A / 0.85 PF, without
defining any final circuits, make the settings shown above. The Voltage Drop Reserve
setting is intended to represent the anticipated voltage drop in the final circuits which are
yet to be connected .
When the details of the actual load circuits to be connected to the board subsequently
become available, these should be added to the board (by drawing them connected to the
board on the single-line diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) and
diversity changed to one of the other settings, such as Manual.
If load circuits are added to a board and the diversity setting is left at Define Load, a
situation could arise in which the connected load exceeds the nominated load
current. This could lead to the connected load exceeding the capacity of the board
and/or the sub-main cable feeding it. Where this occurs a Note will be shown in the
Errors and Warnings dialog when the project is calculated. The level at which a Note
is generated is set by the Defined Load Threshold Settings.
Defined Load Threshold

See Estimated Load.
Voltage Drop Reserve

See Estimated Load.
Earthing
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Earthing.

8 Construction Tab
The settings in this pane describes whether the board is to be earthed locally and if so,
what earthing arrangement is to be used. (See also Calculations / Earth Fault / Calculations
/ Earthing Arrangements.)
Earthing Arrangement
The default arrangement is for no local earthing at the board. Earthing of circuits
connected to the board will be through circuit protective conductors connected back to
the earth connection at the supply source.
Alternatively, the setting can be changed to the Local Earth at Board option, in which case
the earth path for circuits connected to the board will be through the local earth and also
back to the earth connection at the supply source.
When the Local Earth at Board option is selected, the Calculate for local earth only check
box determines how earth fault currents are to be calculated for circuits connected to the
board. When selected, the earth path from circuits back to the earth connection at the
supply source will be disregarded. When unselected, both earth paths, through the local
and supply source earth connections are considered in the earth fault calculations.
Also, a further check box setting determines whether or not the board symbol on the
single-line diagram is to be marked with an earth symbol to indicate the presence of a local
earth connection.
Local Earth Impedance
The Bonding Conductor and Electrode resistance and reactance data boxes are used in
the calculation to determine the local board earth impedance. Values of resistance and
reactance can be typed directly into the data boxes. Alternatively, click the Bonding
Conductor or Electrode button to use the calculator functions.

8 Construction Tab
Fault Levels at Board

The panel shows the levels of phase and earth fault current and the fault impedances at
the board. Valid data can only be shown immediately after the project has been calculated;
otherwise ‘N/A’ is shown to indicate that valid data is not currently available.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Display Results.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Switchboard / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Distribution Board
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board.
The Distribution Board Settings dialog contains data that defines the distribution board
settings. The default screen is split into following sections:
ID
ID Displayed
'eye' icon.
Name

8 Construction Tab
Name Displayed
the 'eye' icon.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference for the cable or busbar supplying the distribution board.
FEEDING SUPPLY: Gives the reference for the source supplying the distribution board.
In this section:
l Board Details
l Protection
l Board Loading Method
l Earthing
l Display Results
l Comments
l Attachments
Board Details
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Board Details.

8 Construction Tab
Phase
Shows the distribution board phase connections.
TIP – If connected to a three-phase load and you want to change the distribution
board to single phase, disconnect the distribution board from the main system,
change the distribution board to single phase and then reconnect to the system.
Wired
Selects the wiring system for the board. Three phase “TP” or Three-phase and Neutral
“TPN”. These will be automatically set by the downstream load types.
Number of Ways
The Number of Ways field sets the maximum number of available ways in the board. To
open the dialog that contains the circuit diagram, select Board Loading Method / Circuits.
Board Rating / Board Fault Rating / Location / Function / Model No
The data contained in the Board Rating / Board Fault Rating / Location / Function / and
Model No fields are included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information
only and is not used in any part of the calculations.

8 Construction Tab
Protection
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Protection.
Incomer Protection
Main Device shows the type of device used as the board incomer; Fuse or Circuit-breaker
are shown automatically depending on type of device selected in the Protective Device
dialog (to access, double-click on the Main Device symbol in the Circuit Diagram). When the
protection is selected as ‘No Protection’, either ‘Isolating Switch’ or ‘Terminals’ can be
selected from the Main Device box.
Main Device Rating shows Auto when the device is selected as fuse or circuit-breaker with
the rating set to Auto. Where the fuse or circuit-breaker rating is selected, the box shows
the rating. When the protection is selected as ‘No Protection’, the box shows Auto.
Default Protective Device
The default protective device is the outgoing circuits protective devices that would be
implemented into the distribution board when a load is added.

To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Board Loading
Method.
The contents within this pane is the same as those described in Switchboard / Board
Loading Method, except for Circuits described below.
Circuits
The circuit diagram provides a graphic representation of the board phasing and available
ways, and the incomer and outgoing circuit details, as follows:

8 Construction Tab
Main Device
Board incomer shown as circuit-breaker, fuse, isolator or terminals dependent on the
protective device selection made. Shows protective device description and whether
protection rating is selected as Auto. Shows actual rating, or calculated rating in brackets.
Way
Shown as Occupied or Spare (unused). Shows phases occupied. Shows way numbers.
Phase
Shows phase arrangement as three-phase or a single phase.
Circuit ID
The name assigned to the final circuit load. The circuit ID is automatically created if a new
circuit is added in this pane. Edit the text as required.
Protective Device
This shows the Circuit Protective Device (CPD) for the final circuit. This device is
automatically selected from the Default Protective Device (see Default Protective Device). If
required, you can edit this field by double-clicking the CPD to open the CPD selection
window.
Template
If available, a template can be applied to the final load to help ensure consistency in design
and load selection. To select a template, click on the template area space for that load to
open the Template Navigator panel. Navigate to the folder that the template is stored and
select the folder and the template to be applied.
Cable Length
Shows the cable length of the circuit. The length can be edited if required by clicking the
cable length.
Load Type
Identifies the type of final load circuit that is attached to the distribution board. This can be
edited by clicking the load type.
The load type is a standard description and is selected from a list and only certain
loads will apply depending on the electrical connection that is applied. For example,
a three-phase load cannot be changed to a single-phase load unless the CPD is split
into a single phase.

8 Construction Tab
Load (A)
Identifies the current of the load. This load current can be edited by clicking the load (A)
that needs to be changed.
Power Factor
The power factor of the load. The power factor for the load can be edited by clicking the
power factor that needs to be changed.
Duty
Identifies if the load will have diversity applied. If this check box is cleared (unchecked), this
identifies that the load is in standby mode.
Additional Features
The circuits view and the grid below it can be used to perform additional functions.
Circuits
Circuits shown graphically as fuse or circuit-breaker protected, or unprotected. Shows
protective device description and whether protection rating is selected as Auto. Shows
actual rating, or calculated rating. Shows cable and load references.
Addingcircuits
To add a circuit to an unused way:

1. Either double-click the cable coming from the way or the text reference ‘Spare’ or right-
click on the CPD to open the shortcut menu:

8 Construction Tab
2. Select either Add Load Circuit or Add Motor Circuit.

A default circuit is added to the board.
3. To edit this load, double-click the circuit. The Final Circuit dialog appears. Make the
necessary data entries to define the final circuit connected to the board.
To create a single-phase load, right-click on either the CPD or cable. From the shortcut
menu that appears, select Split Way. This splits the board into individual CPD for that way.
See below. This then allows single-phase loads to be connected.
Circuits added in this way will not appear on the network drawing.
EditingCircuits
To edit an existing circuit, double-click in the same way as when the circuit was created.
This displays the Final Circuit dialog where details can be edited as required.
Circuits created by drawing them on the network drawing connected to a distribution
board show the cable as a dotted line.

8 Construction Tab
Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete
To display a shortcut menu, right-click on an occupied or unoccupied way on the

connections between the busbars and the text reference ‘Spare’. Select the relevant item
to enable circuits to be cut, copied, pasted, or deleted, as required.
For example, to copy an existing circuit in a spare way:
1. Right-click on the existing circuit. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Copy.
2. Right-click on the target way. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Paste.
3. A new circuit with the same configuration as the original circuit is created in the target
way.
Adding/EditingCircuit Protective Devices(CPDs)
Similar methods to those described above for adding and editing circuits can be applied to
the CPDs for each way in the board. For CPDs, the double-clicks and right-clicks should be
executed in the busbar area of the selected way. The incoming protective device can be
edited in the same way.
Earthing
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Earthing.
The contents in this pane are the same as those described in Switchboard / Earthing.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Display
Results.

8 Construction Tab
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Distribution Board ME
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Distribution Board ME.
The functionality of the MEDistribution Board is similar to that described for the standard
Distribution Board. See Distribution Board. The differences are:
l Protection – The Incomer Protection settings are available. The Default Protective
Device settings are not available.
l Board Loading Method – The Estimated Load method is not available. The Detailed
Design Loads methods available are: Manual Settings load diversity; Load Distribution
Schedule. Define Load and Global presets from User Defined Settings are not available.
The circuit diagram can be viewed in the Circuits pane and is available for printing but it
is read-only and cannot be used to define loads.
l Load Distribution Schedule – All circuits connected to the Distribution Board MEare
defined in the Load Distribution Schedule. Loads cannot be connected to the board on
the project single-line diagram. Sub-main cables cannot be connected to an MEboard.

8 Construction Tab
Load Distribution Schedule: General

The Load Distribution Schedule (LDS) is designed to match the formats used to define
loads in final circuit distribution boards in Dubai (DEWA) and Abu Dhabi (ADDC).
The LDSis intended for use in three stages:
1. Define circuits.
Enter the details for the load circuits in each distribution board, including load point
types, loadings, cable, circuit-breaker, and RCD details.
2. Export the schedules.
The full range of schedules required for approval are available for exporting to
Microsoft Excel including, not just the load distribution schedules but also sub-main
distribution board schedules, and so forth.
3. Print schedules.
Produce printed copies of schedules ready for submission for approval.
The layout and content of the LDSwill vary according to the type of Regulatory Authority
selected for the project, DEWA or ADDC(see Projects / Regulatory Authority).

8 Construction Tab
Load Type Editor

For each circuit described in the LDS, settings such as RCD Rating and Setting; MCB Rating,
Wire Size are predetermined by the Load Type Editor. The Load Type Editor can be used to
create new load types and edit or delete existing load types.
The most effective workflow when using the LDSis as follows:
1. Use the Load Type Editor to predetermine the rules and settings for the types of load
points to be defined. Once defined all the load points and associated settings will be
available throughout the current project.
2. Create the Load Distribution Schedules. Use the load types predefined in the Load
Type Editor to populate the Load Points. In each circuit, the settings (RCD Rating, and
so forth) will be automatically set according to the rules set in the Load Type Editor.
Opening the Load Type Editor
To open the Load Type Editor, do one of the following:
l Select Construction / Project Settings / DEWALoad Types (or ADDC)
l In the LDSin any ME, type DB, right-click and select Edit Load Types:

8 Construction Tab
The Load Type Editor appears:
All currently defined load types are listed, giving the full and abbreviated descriptions for
each one. Click Details to show detailed settings for a load type. Click again to hide the
details.
Click to add new load types to the list and to delete the currently selected load
type.
Addinga New Load Type
Click the button, the new load type will be appended to the list:

8 Construction Tab
The descriptions can be changed:
The ProDesign Load Type should be selected to ensure that the selected load type
matches the load type in the software. This ensures that during the calculation, the circuit
containing the load type is checked using the correct rules for BS7671. For example, this
will ensure that for socket circuits a 30 mA RCD will be required. Hovering over the Info
button provides guidance.
The default load type can also be selected; this can be changed after the circuit in the LDS
has been defined.
Next the Load Type Rules can be set. These enable you to define the defaults and limits of
what settings can be used for this load type. You can set up rules to suit local requirements
and ensure they are complied with. These limits are over and above the normal BS7671
rules.
EXAMPLE– This example describes the rule functions:
– The ELCB Setting (mA) will have a default value 100; the ‘=’ selection imposes a rule that
the only acceptable setting will be 100.
– The default ELCB Rating (A) will be 40 and any setting value of 40 or above will satisfy the
rules.
– The MCB Rating (A) must remain at the 40 setting.

8 Construction Tab
– The Wire Size will default to 2.5 and allowed to be larger but not smaller.
The second part of the rule settings apply to the load point settings made in a circuit:
l The first load point will have a default quantity setting of 5 and no more than five can be
set. The default load will be 200 W and can be set to any other value
l The second load point will be limited to a maximum quantity of the default value of 4.
The default 100 W will be the maximum load that can be set.
l The settings for load points 3 and 4 allow any number of points at any loading to be
added to the circuit.
Where the settings for a load type are changed or deleted, this will have an impact on loads
of that type which have already be added to any board in the project. A warning message
will appear at the bottom of the editor:
When making settings within a circuit, where the value within a cell does not agree with the
set rule, the cell shows a red border and a hint appears when the mouse pointer is
hovered over the top right-hand corner:

8 Construction Tab
Any rule contraventions that are not corrected are listed at the top of the Errors panel
when the project is calculated:
Copyingand PastingCircuits
Right-clicking a single circuit displays a menu with Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete commands
that apply to the selected circuit:
With a single circuit selected, right-click and select Copy to save the circuit details to the
clipboard (not available when more than one circuit is selected).
Select a single circuit or a group of circuits, right-click and select Paste to replace the
selected circuit details with those saved to the clipboard.
Select a single circuit or a group of circuits, right-click and select Delete. The selected circuit
details will revert to the default condition labelled ‘SPARE’.
The keyboard shortcuts Ctrl-C(copy) and Ctrl-V(paste) are also available.

8 Construction Tab
Load Distribution Schedule: DEWA

The Load Distribution Schedule enables the final circuits connected to a distribution board
to be defined within the format of the Load Distribution Schedule model shown in the
DEWA Regulations.
The defaults and limits for the settings marked (* ) are defined by the type of Load Point
selected, which in turn is set in the Load Type Editor.
ELCB (RCD)
The following settings can be made for each individual circuit:
l Setting mA: 10, 30, 100, 300, 500, None.*
l Rating (A): 40, 63, 80, 100*
Where you need to define more than one circuit protected by a single RCD, the circuits can
be grouped:
1. Select a contiguous group of circuits and right-click:
2. Select Group Circuits. The selected circuits will be grouped and suitable settings can be

8 Construction Tab
then made for the single device:
To undo the grouping, select all the circuits in the group and then select Ungroup Circuits.
In an ungrouped circuit (represents an RCBO protected circuit), the ELCB rating is locked to
be the same value as the MCB Rating.
SL No.
The column is automatically numbered 1, 2, 3, 4 ...
Circuit No.
This is the way designation. Down the column the circuits are automatically numbered: R1,
Y1, B1, R2, Y2 ... (three-phase); C1, C2, C3, ... (single-phase).
MCB Rating (A)
The Rating (In) of the circuit protective device. Select a rating from the list.*
Circuit Wire Size mm 2
The size of the line conductors (mm 2). Select a size from the list of available sizes.*
ECCWire Size mm 2
The CPCsize (mm 2). Select a size from the list of available sizes. The default size is the same
as the line conductor size.
Design Length (m)
Enter the design length of the cable in metres.
Apply Design Allowance
Select whether the Design Allowance as set in the project settings should be applied to the
design length.

8 Construction Tab
Total Length (m)

The total length of cable.
Cable Type
Select a cable type from the list:
List Box Name ProDesign Cable Type
PVC/Single/non-arm DEWA Single-core, PVCInsulated, non-armoured, stranded
PVC/Multi/Armour DEWA Multicore, PVCInsulated, armoured
XLPE/Multi/Armour DEWA Multicore, XLPEInsulated, armoured
XLPELSF/Multi/Armour DEWA Multicore, XLPEInsulated, armoured
XLPELSF/Multi/non-armour Multicore, XLPELSFinsulated, non-armour, Table 4E2
Prysmian FP600S Prysmian FP600S
Room / Area
Text that you define; used as the load identity.
Connected Loads / Points
Under the main header, there are four sets of columns: No, Type and W. This allows for
four different matching load types in a single circuit. The settings are limited by the rules set
in the Load Type Editor.
Within one board schedule, to match the output schedule layout a maximum limit of 14
different load types is imposed.
For each load type:
l No. – The number of points indicates the number of loads of the indicated type.*
l Type – The type of load selected from the list in the Type column.* The selections are
interlocked to ensure that only similar load types can be added to any one circuit. For

8 Construction Tab
example, lights and sockets cannot both be defined for a single circuit.
l W – The loading per point for the selected load type.*
Load Per Circuit (W)
The value shown is the sum of the loadings of each of the point types multiplied by the
Connected Load per Point.
For a three-phase load, the value entered in each phase will be a third of the total Watts
value.
At the foot of each of the phase columns the sum of the loads in that phase column is
shown:
Power Factor
The power factor of the load. The power factor is used to convert loads expressed in watts
into amperes for purposes such as cable sizing. The default value is 1.00.
Diversity
The loading for each circuit will be multiplied by its diversity setting when the board loading
is calculated. The default value is 1.00.
Remarks
Any notes that you enter.

8 Construction Tab
Load Distribution Schedule: ADDC

The Load distribution Schedule enables the final circuits connected to a distribution board
to be defined within the Load Distribution Schedule model shown in the RSB Regulations.
The defaults and limits for the setting marked (* ) are defined by the type of Load Point
selected, which in turn is set in the Load Type Editor.
Busbar Section / RCD

The following RCD settings can be made for each circuit:
l Setting (mA) – 10, 30, 100, 300, 500, None.*
l Rating (A) – 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100*
The default values for these setting are defined by the type of Load Point selected. The
defaults can be changed in the Load Type Editor.
Where it is required to define more than one circuit protected by a single RCD, the circuits
can be grouped:

8 Construction Tab
1. Select a contiguous group of circuits and right-click:
2. Select Group Circuits. The selected circuits will be grouped and suitable settings can be
then made for the single device:
To undo the grouping, select all the circuits in the group and then select Ungroup Circuits.
In an ungrouped circuit (represents an RCBO protected circuit), the RCD rating is locked to
be the same as that selected for the MCB.
CCT REFNo.
The way designation. The circuits are automatically numbered down the column: R1, Y1,
B1, R2, Y2 ... (three-phase); C1, C2, C3, ... (single-phase).

8 Construction Tab
MCB Rating (A)

The rating (In) of the circuit protective device. Select a rating from the list.*
Cable Size
CCTWire Size mm2
The size of the line conductors (mm 2). Select a size from the list.*
ECCWire Size mm2
The cpc size (mm 2). Select a size from the list. The size will be defaulted to match the line
conductor size.
Design Length (m)
Enter the design length of the cable in metres.
Apply Design Allowance
Select whether the Design Allowance as set in the project settings should be applied to the
design length.
Total Length (m)
The total length of cable.
Cable Rating A (kW)
Tabulated rating of the selected cable in amperes; and kW in brackets. (kW rating based on
pf = 0.85).
Circuit Name / Point Reference
Text that you enter; used as the load identity.
No. of Points (Double Single)
There are three sets of columns under the main header, each set comprising: No, Type,
and kW. This allows for three different load types in a single circuit.
For each load type:

8 Construction Tab
l No. – The number of load points.*

l Type – The type of load selected from the list box.* The selections are interlocked to
ensure that only similar load point types can be added to any one circuit. For example,
lights and sockets cannot be defined for a single circuit.
l kW – The loading per point for the selected load type.*
Cable Type
Select a cable type from the list:
Listed Cable ProDesign Cable Type ADDCCable Type

Type
Single Core non- Single-core, 70 °Cthermoplastic non- PVCsingle core cable (non-
arm PVC arm Cu Table 4D1 armoured)
Multicore non- Multicore, 70 °Cthermoplastic non- PVCmulticore cable (non-

arm PVC arm Cu Table 4D2 armoured)
Multicore arm Multicore, 70 °Cthermoplastic PVCmulti-core cable

PVC armoured Cu Table 4D4 (armoured)
Multicore arm Multicore, 90 °Cthermosetting Thermosetting (XLPE) multi-

XLPE armoured Cu Table 4E4 core cable (armoured)
Multicore arm Multicore, 90 °Cthermosetting N/A

XLPELSF armoured LSFCu Table 4E4
Multicore non- Multicore, 90 °Cthermosetting non- N/A

arm XLPELSF armoured LSFCu Table 4E2
Pirelli FP200 Fire Pirelli FP200 Fire Resistant Cable N/A

Resistant
Prysmian Prysmian FP600S N/A

FP600S
Circuit Type
The circuit types correspond to the ProDesign load types that are defined in the Load Type
Editor (see Load Type Editor section below):
ADDCCircuit Type ProDesign Load Type
LTG Lighting, radial circuit
RNG All ring socket circuit types
RAD All other load types

8 Construction Tab
You will not be able to select circuit types other than those listed above.
In a circuit, the first load point type entered determines the types that can be used in the
remaining columns, ensuring that only matching types are included in any one circuit. For
example, once a LTG point has been defined, any further points in that circuit must also be
LTG.
Circuit Load in kW
The value shown is the sum of the loading for each of the load points multiplied by the
number of points.
For a three-phase load, the value entered in each phase will be a third of the total Watts
value.
At the foot of each of the phase columns the sum of the loads in that phase column is
shown:
Diversity
Type
The Diversity Type is associated with the Load Type and is used to track diversities for
different load categories in the ADDCschedules.
The default Diversity Type can be set in the Load Type Editor.
Factor
The default Diversity Factor is associated with the Diversity Type.

The default Diversity Factor can be set in the Load Type Editor.
Remarks
Any notes that you enter.
Schedule Footer
The footer contains the following settings:

l Gross Floor Area – Used to calculate the Floor Area Diversified Load in the output
schedule.

8 Construction Tab
l Ambient Temperature – The current-carrying capacities of the cables connected to the

board will be corrected according to the temperature setting.
l Power Factor – Used to convert board loadings from kW to A for cable sizing and so
forth.

8 Construction Tab
Consumer Unit
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit.
Most of the data in the dialog is contained in groups with related items together.
The Consumer Unit Settings dialog contains data that defines the Consumer Unit settings.
The default screen is split into the following sections:
l The top section (Dark Blue) relates to drawing parameters.
l The middle section (Light Blue) relates to templates.
l The lower section (Grey/White) beginning with Summary, relates to design parameters
and additional settings.
ID

8 Construction Tab
ID Displayed
'eye' icon.
Name
Name Displayed
the 'eye' icon.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference for the cable or busbar supplying the distribution board.
FEEDING SUPPLY: Gives the reference for the source supplying the distribution board.
In this section:
l Board Details pane
l Protection pane
l Board Loading Method pane
l Earthing pane
l Display Results pane
l Comments pane
l Attachments pane
Board Details
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Board Details.
Phase
Shows the distribution board phase connections.

8 Construction Tab
Sections
The Sections panel contains to add and to delete sections as required. It also
allows for the number of ways in each section to be edited, and the device used to protect
each of the sections.
The maximum number of sections for a consumer unit is three.
In the Number Of Ways column, the number of ways can be set for each of the selected
sections. The total number of ways contained in the board is shown below in the Total
Ways section. Any number of ways can be selected for each section, up to a limit of 30 ways
in total.
A description of the devices protecting the selected sections is listed under Sections
Protected By. Click next to a description to display the Protective Devices Selector
where a different device selection can be made. Device selections for sections 2 and 3 are
limited to residual current devices. For the first section, it defaults to No Protective Device
'No RCD'. You can select an ‘RCD’ in the Protective Devices Selector if required by selecting
the check box:
Deleting Sections
Whenever the number of sections is reduced, a check is made as to whether there are
circuits connected to any of the sections to be deleted. If there are, the delete symbol will
appear greyed out and the section cannot be deleted until all the final circuits have been
removed from the section.
Deleting Ways
When the controls in the Sections field are used to reduce the number of ways in any
section, or to delete a complete section, a check is made as to whether there are circuits
connected to any of the ways to be deleted. If there are, a red warning box and dialog will

8 Construction Tab
be displayed ' ' this will still not allow the way to be deleted unless it is moved or
deleted.
Load Rating/Fault Rating/Function/Location/Model No
The data contained in the Load Rating/Fault Rating/Function/Location/Model No. fields are
included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information only and is not used in
any part of the calculations.
Protection
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Protection.
Incomer Protection
The incoming device can be selected as Terminals or Isolating Switch. The rating of the
Isolating Switch can be selected as: 63, 80, or 100 A.
Default Protective Device
The default protective device is the outgoing circuits protective devices that would be
implemented into the Consumer Unit when a load is added.

To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Board Loading
Method.
The contents within this pane are the same as those described in Switchboard / Board
Loading Method, except for the Circuits settings described below.
Circuits
Circuit Diagram Consumer Unit
l The Board contents are normally arranged with the isolator on the right and the
outgoing circuits to the left. If required, the Board Arrangement can be changed to the
isolator on the left.
l The number of sections and the number of ways in each section will be displayed as
defined in the Board Details pane.
l The available ways are initially shown as Spare (unused). Each spare way can be set to
have a circuit connected to it, or be equipped with a protective device only with no
circuit connected.
Earthing
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Earthing.
The contents within this pane are the same as those described in Switchboard / Earthing.

8 Construction Tab
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Display Results.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Comments.
report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Boards / Consumer Unit / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Other group
To access these settings, select Construction / Other.
In this section:
l PFCorrection
l Junction Box
l Surge Protective Device
l Automatic Transfer Switch

8 Construction Tab
Power Factor Correction Settings

To access these settings, select Construction / Other / PFCorrection.
The Power Factor Correction Settings dialog contains data that defines the Power Factor
correction unit settings. The default screen is split into three sections:
ID
The text reference for the Power Factor Correction used in reports. It is also displayed on
the drawing if the Displayed reference box is selected.
Name
The secondary text reference for the Power Factor Correction used in reports. It is also
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of the cable supplying the Power Factor Correction.

8 Construction Tab
Target pane
Target Power Factor
The power factor that the system is to be corrected to by the equipment.
Existing Conditions
These fields give the power factor, kW, kVA, and kVAr of the system at the point of
connection. They are calculated by the ProDesign software and cannot be edited.
Target conditions
These fields give the power factor, kW, kVA, and kVAr of the system at the point of
connection when the corrected power factor is applied. They are calculated by the
ProDesign software and cannot be edited.
Required Capacitance
This field gives the calculated kVAr rating of the correction unit to obtain the required
power factor at the distribution board. It is calculated by the ProDesign software and
cannot be edited.
Comments pane
report.
Attachments pane

8 Construction Tab

8 Construction Tab
Junction Box
To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Junction Box.
The Junction Box Settings dialog contains data that defines the junction box information.
The default screen is split into three sections:
ID
'eye' icon.
Name

8 Construction Tab
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of the cable supplying the junction box.
TO: Gives the reference of the cable connected to the junction box.
Comments pane
report.
Attachments pane

8 Construction Tab
Surge Protective Device (SPD) Settings

To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Surge Protective Device.
The Surge Protective Device Settings dialog contains data that defines the Surge Protective
Device unit settings. The default screen is split into three sections:
ID
The text reference for the Surge Protective Device used in reports. It is also displayed on
the drawing if the Displayed reference box is selected.
Name
The secondary text reference for the Surge Protective Device used in reports. It is also
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference of both the cable supplying the Surge Protective Device and the
Board it is connected to.

8 Construction Tab
SPD
Type
Max Backup Rating
device.
Fault Rating
The ISCCRRating of the Surge Protective Device. This value can usually be found on the
component's data sheet, but otherwise the SPD manufacturer can provide this value.
The value is used to perform a check against the breaking capacity of the CPD (where
applicable). A warning is shown if the Fault Rating of the SPD is greater than the ultimate
breaking capacity (Icu) of the selected CPD.
BS7671:2018.
Manufacturer
Optional Text field to enter the Manufacturer of the Surge Protective Device
Model
Optional Text field to enter the Model of the Surge Protective Device
Part Number
Optional Text field to enter the Part Number of the Surge Protective Device
Comments pane
report.
Attachments pane

8 Construction Tab
Auto Transfer Switch

To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Auto Transfer Switch.

8 Construction Tab
The Auto Transfer Switch Settings dialog contains data that defines the Auto Transfer
Switch (ATS) settings, grouped by related items. The default screen is split into the following
sections.
ID
A unique text designation for the equipment that is displayed on the drawing. The same
ID Displayed
'eye' icon.
Name

8 Construction Tab
Name Displayed
the 'eye' icon.
Connections
FROM: Gives the reference for the conductor supplying the switchboard.
Template
In this section:
l Auto Transfer Switch Details
l Circuits
l Display Results
l Comments
l Attachments
Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) Details

To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Auto Transfer Switch / ATSDetails.

8 Construction Tab
Phase
Shows the ATS phase connections.
TIP – If connected to a three-phase load and you want to change the ATSto single
phase, disconnect the ATSfrom the main system, change the ATSto single phase
and then reconnect to the system.
Wired
Select the wiring system for the ATS. For a Three Phase system, the options are TP (three-
phase) or TPN (three-phase and Neutral). If the feeding system is TP only, an alternative
selection cannot be made.

8 Construction Tab
Load Rating / Fault Rating / Function / Location / Model No.

The data contained in the Load Rating / Fault Rating / Function / Location / and Model No
fields are included in reports, if values are entered. The data is for information only and is
not used in any part of the calculations.
Circuits
To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Auto Transfer Switch / Circuits.
Reference
The reference of the Incoming cable(s) or Outgoing Load.
Incomers are indicated by "Incomer:" prefixed to the cable name.

8 Construction Tab
Circuit Protective Device

Defines the type of Protective Device assigned to the circuit. Double click on the description
to open up the dialog to define the Protective Device.
There are three options available: Terminals, Isolating Switch and Protective Device.
For details on data inputs for the circuit protective device, see Construction / Cables /
Protection. I
Switch Status
The Switch Status list enables you to set the switch to state to Open or Closed. The state of
this switch is reflected in the calculations.
Only a single incoming connection can be closed at a time.
Phase
Define the phase of the connections. Whilst three phase connections are shown, this drop
down can only be used for the single phase ATSto set the required phase.
Switching Order
Define the order in which the Incoming connections are switched. For example 1 would
indicate the 'normal' connection.
Display Results
To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Auto Transfer Switch / Display
Results.
Values
Display
ResultsPer Line
Separator
Line value is greater than one. This setting is only shown once the Results Per Line is set to
greater than 1.

8 Construction Tab
Appearance
changed per source.
Comments
To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Auto Transfer Switch / Comments.
Contains a comments text box, the contents of which are printed with the related report.
Attachments
To access these settings, select Construction / Other / Auto Transfer Switch / Attachments.

8 Construction Tab
Annotation group
To access these settings, select Construction / Annotation.
The Annotate group contains tools that can be used to enhance a completed network
drawing.
All annotation tools can be edited after placing an annotation on the drawing area by
either double-clicking, using the Properties toolbar, or right-clicking the item and selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu.
Text
Provides a tool to place text on a drawing.
Line
Selects the Line drawing tool. Once drawn, the line style can be edited as required.
Text in Box
Creates a multi-line Text in box on your schematic. Use this to add detailed annotation
comments and other multi-line text entries. Double-click on a text box border to select the
text box.
Circle
Selects the Circle drawing tool.
Arrow
Selects the Arrow drawing tool.
Image
Selects the Image tool. Use to insert an image file onto the drawing area.
Symbol
The Symbol library contains electrical symbols that can be used to annotate the network
drawing. To access the library, click the Symbol tool.

8 Construction Tab
Unlike ‘intelligent’ symbols, such as cables and boards, these symbols should not be
used to create any part of the distribution network. They should be placed on top
of, or alongside, an existing completed network.
Box
Selects the Box drawing tool.
Note
Adds a text note to your schematic. A Note icon is placed on your drawing. Double-click the
Note icon to displays its contents or see the properties toolbar if visible.

8 Construction Tab
General group
To access these settings, select Construction / General.
Cut
Removes the currently selected drawing item(s) and saves them to the ProDesign
clipboard (Ctrl+X).
Items on the ProDesign clipboard cannot be accessed from the Windows clipboard and
vice-versa.
Copy
Saves the selected drawing item(s) to the ProDesign clipboard (Ctrl+C).
Paste
Pastes the item(s) saved on the ProDesign clipboard into the drawing (Ctrl+V).
Delete
Deletes the selected drawing item(s) (Del).
Undo
Undo the last action (Ctrl+Z).
Redo
Redo the last undo.

8 Construction Tab
Settings Group
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings.
The Settings group relates to project and drawing settings, as well as helping with mass
data entry into the project.
Snap to Grid – To snap to grid, click .
Orthogonal Conductors – To have orthogonal lines, click .
Persistent Connection – To have a persistent connection, click .

Switch Scenarios – Switch scenarios.
Project Settings – See Project Settings.
Data Entry – You can edit data within the project from on location. See Settings / Data Entry.
Project Settings
The ProDesign software provides a range of features for applying various types of settings
across an entire project and enables them to be reused for new projects.
To access the project settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings
.
To access the project settings, select Project Settings.
The Project Settings dialog appears.
In this section:
l Project Details, page 246
l Drawing
l Logo, page 388
l Calculations, page 263
l Overload Setting Methods, page 279

8 Construction Tab
l Reports pane, page 280

l Attachments Manager

8 Construction Tab
Project
The project setting features are contained in groups with related items together.
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings.
Project Details
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Project.
The project setting features are contained in groups with related items together.
Reference
Enter a reference text for the project.
Job No
Enter a job number for the project.
Document No.
Enter a document number for the project.

8 Construction Tab
Client/Owner
The name of the client or the owner of the property for which the project is being
designed.
Main Contractor
The main contractor responsible for the construction of the property.
Electrical Contractor
The electrical contractor responsible for the electrical installation.
Consultant
The consulting engineers responsible for the project design.
Address/Location
The address or location of the property for which the project is being designed.
Planned Completion Date
Where the selected Regulatory Authority is DEWA, this field is included in the Project
Details.
The date entered in this field is displayed in the exported DEWA schedules.
Project Type
For DEWA projects, select Building or Villa.
Created
Identifies who created the project and that date and time it was created. This information
can be edited if required. It also includes the software version that it was created with.
Last Saved
Information regarding when the project was last saved. This includes by when, and what
version of the software it was saved in.
File
The file path for the project.

8 Construction Tab
Regulatory Authority
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Project /
Regulatory Authority.
The Regulatory Authority should be set according to the authority to which the project
design is to be submitted, DEWA or ADDC. This can be set when the project is initially
created or in Project Details:
When set for ADDC, the Apply ADDCFactor for Final Circuits checkbox is set by default. This
ensures that a rating factor of 1.15 is applied when sizing final circuit cables, in compliance
with Section G2 of The Electricity Wiring Regulations (Third Edition) applicable in Abu Dhabi. If the
setting is not selected, cable sizing will proceed using standard BS7671 rules.
If the Regulatory Authority is changed for a project where MEtype distribution

boards have already been defined, as the load types in DEWA and ADDCboards are
not compatible, this will cause all the circuits details in those boards to be deleted.
Comments
report.
Revisions
This feature allows changes made to a project to be documented.

8 Construction Tab
Revision History
Displays a list of the revision history for the current project.
Revision
This area is used to record the details of project revisions. The Revision field should be
used to record a revision number. The large space to the right (description) should be
used to record details of the changes.
To add a revision history entry, complete the fields listed below noting the following:
l The Revision reference needs to be a unique entry.
l The Revised On column indicates the date of the revision, this can be entered using the
calendar pop-up window. The software checks that the revision references and dates
entered are in an appropriate order. A message is displayed if a newly entered low
revision reference is associated with a newer than previously entered date.
l The Revised By column will contain the names of previous users. A new name can be
entered, if required.
l The large empty area Description area is used to describe the details of the revision.
To update an existing revision entry
Click on the area that requires to be changed and make the required changes.
To add a revision entry
Click ; a row will be added to the revision history.

8 Construction Tab
To delete a revision entry
Select the revision that is required to be deleted and then click .

8 Construction Tab
Drawing
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings.
In this section:
l Paper Settings
l Connection Settings
l Grid Settings
l Font
l View
l Default Symbols
l Colour Configuration
l Annotation
l Component Numbering
Paper Settings
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Drawing.
Allows the size of the on-screen drawing to be selected from a list of standard paper sizes
or a user-defined height and width (mm, cm, or inches). The scale of the printed drawing
depends on this setting and the size of paper the drawing is printed on; for example,
drawing size = A3, printer paper = A4, scale of printed drawing = 1:2.
Connection Settings
The connection setting sets up the electrical single-line in the software to be produced in
one of four ways:
1. Supply source at top of drawing.
2. Supply source at bottom of drawing.
3. Supply source at left of drawing.
4. Supply source at right of drawing.
The single-line drawing should be constructed radially starting from the Source (Source,
Transformer, or Generator) or Sources, through the main switchboard (optional) then
through distribution boards and consumer units as required and finally to loads as
required [A].
Depending on the connection setting, the following rules in the table need to apply.

8 Construction Tab
Supply connection to com- Load connection to com-

Connection setting
ponents ponents
Supply source at top of Top Bottom

drawing
Supply source at bottom of Bottom Top

drawing
Supply source at left of Left Right

drawing
Supply source at right of Right Left

drawing
Sources, the main switchboard, distribution boards, consumer units, loads, and so forth,
must be interconnected with cables or busbars. The exception to this is that a single source
can be connected directly to the main switchboard without any intervening cable or
busbar [B].

8 Construction Tab
Any component not connected to an active source of supply will be displayed as the “Not
Active” colour; the default colour is grey. To assist in the drawing of a connected network,
when View / Show Unconnected Ends is selected, components not successfully connected
are displayed with a cross at the point of the connection failure; a red cross indicates an
unconnected end at the source end of the object, a blue cross at the load end.
Before a system can be calculated it must have a validly connected source. A partial system,
for example, a distribution board or a load in isolation will be highlighted as problem when
a calculation is attempted.
Grid Settings
Display or hide the drawing grid. When the grid is selected, the dots or lines that mark the
intersections of the grid are displayed.

8 Construction Tab
Grid Mode
The drawing grid can be set as either No Visible Grid, Grid Dots Visible, or Grid Lines Visible.
Spacing
The grid spacing can be set at either a Standard '5 or 10 mm', or it can be a user-defined
spacing—preferably at the beginning of a project.
Font
Displays the Font dialog so you can select the default font style for text on the drawing.
To change the default font style for the project, use the list for each section identified
below:
l Font
l Style
l Size
A sample preview is available in this dialog to help illustrate the text font style that is
selected.
Changes to the font style are effective for text added to the drawing only after the changes
have been made. Annotations created before any change in the font style are not affected.
View

8 Construction Tab
Allows for Show Note icons on Printouts and Show Error/Warning Symbols to either be
shown or hidden.
Default Symbols
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Drawing / Default
Symbols.
Select a default symbol for a load or motor load:
The selected symbols will be used for objects drawn after the default selection has been
made. Symbols for objects drawn before the change of settings are not affected. If you
want to use the same symbol throughout the project, we recommend that you select the
required symbol before starting the drawing.
Colour Configuration
The Colour Settings pane shows the current colours and markings. The colours used for
the different parts of the drawing, including phase markings, are set in this pane:

8 Construction Tab
MEversion: The default phase colours and markings are: Red, Yellow, Blue, and R, Y, B.
Changinga colour setting
To change the colour for a particular item:

1. Click the item in the Colour Configuration list:

8 Construction Tab
2. Select the colour required from the custom colour:
3. Click outside this custom colour box and then click OK:
The new colour is applied to the drawing.
Changingphase markings
Phases are identified by text markings, for example, R, Y, B or L1, L2, L3. These phase
markings are used in the Cable, Busbar Consumer Unit and Distribution Board dialogs and
reports to identify phases.

8 Construction Tab
To change a phase marking setting, select a phase (or three phase) in the Colour
Configuration list; the Marking box will be displayed showing the current descriptive text.
Before change
Enter a new description and click OK.
Savinga colour configuration template
Complete sets of colour and marking settings can be saved as templates for re-use. To
define a template:
1. Enter a template name into the Save into box below the Colour Configuration list.
2. Click Save into. The settings are saved and the name of the template is added to the
User Template.
3. To apply the template settings as the default settings, click Apply. The template name is
shown in the Template box. A template can be deleted by going to the Template
Navigator.
Annotation
Displays the Annotation pane, which enables you to select whether the ID number or
name is displayed on the schematic and the orientation that the text will be displayed in,
that is, Source, Cable and so forth.

8 Construction Tab
Component Numbering
Displays the Component Numbering pane. Here it is possible to set up the format of the ID
number that the system automatically gives the components when they are first drawn.
By default, all the network annotations are automatically annotated with a text description
as they are added to the diagram.

8 Construction Tab

8 Construction Tab
Logo
To access these settings, select Reports / Logo.
Enables you to show a logo on the schematic or report, as well as allowing the option to
replace, edit, or revert back to the standard logo for the project.
The image file (Logo.bmp) for the logo displayed on the drawing and in the report headers
is stored in the ProDesign ME/ Reports folder.
The displayed image can be modified either in the Logo Editor or by replacing the supplied
image file with another of the same name.
Show Logo on Schematic
To hide the logo on the drawing, clear the Show Logo on Schematic check box in Project
Settings / Drawing / Logo. Alternatively, right-click on the logo in the schematic and then
select Hide.
Show Logo on Reports
To hide the logo on the reports, clear the Show Logo on Reports check box in Project
Settings / Drawing / Logo.
Choose New Logo
If a suitable company logo already exists as an image file, it can be used to replace the
default image. Click Choose New Logo.

8 Construction Tab
TIP – The image dimensions must be no larger than 500 x 128 pixels. If the image
dimensions are greater than this, the displayed image will be distorted.
Open Logo Editor

The Logo Editor is available from the Reports tab, Project Settings / Logo pane or right-
clicking on the logo in the schematic and selecting properties. It can be used to edit the
image used to display the company logo that appears on the drawing and on reports.
The Logo Editor uses the standard Paint program supplied with the Microsoft Windows
operating system. Click Open Logo Editor.
The drawing/editing features in Paint can be used to create a suitable image. When the file
is saved (do not change the location), the new image will appear on the drawing and
reports.
Revert to Default
The logo will default to the project logo that is located in ProDesign ME/ Reports folder
labelled Logo.

8 Construction Tab
Calculations
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Calculation.
Earth Fault Protection Propagation

In some types of installation, for example, an installation with a TT source, it is common to
install an RCD at the source of supply. If an earth fault occurs on one of the sub-mains in
the system, the upstream RCD may be the device that causes automatic disconnection
rather than the device that is associated with the sub-main. The Earth Fault Device
Propagation feature allows this scenario to be modelled.
When this option is selected, the following occurs during project calculation:
l The software searches upstream for any earth fault protective devices.
l If such a device is found upstream then the earth fault disconnection time is calculated
(using the downstream circuits’ earth fault level). The maximum Zs of the earth fault
device is also obtained.
The disconnection times obtained from the upstream earth fault protection and the local
device are compared. The quickest disconnection time and highest maximum Zs are used.
When the Earth Fault Protection Propagation check box is not selected, each circuit will be
considered individually with respect to earth fault disconnection, that is, the presence of
upstream earth fault devices will not be taken into account when calculating downstream
earth fault disconnection.
Lighting Circuits Domestic
When the Lighting Circuits Domestic (default) check box is selected, all new lighting load
types are selected as domestic lighting circuits. When this check box is cleared, all new
lighting load types are seen as non-domestic lighting circuits.
Display Active Power in kW
Power shown in the final circuits will be displayed in Watts (W) or kilowatt (kW).
Minimum Cable Sizes
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Calculation /
Minimum Cable Sizes.
This fields in this pane are used to set the minimum sizes that will be used to calculate
automatic cable sizes in a project. Different minimum sizes can be set for circuits with
different load types.

8 Construction Tab
For each load type listed, separate settings can be made for copper or aluminium, for
either the phase conductor or any separate CPCconductor in use.
l The different load types listed are those shown in the Type setting box in the Load
details dialog, and also for motor and sub-mains.
The minimum sizes can be set within the following limits:
l Copper conductors: 1.5 to 50 mm 2 (except Lighting load type : 1 to 50 mm 2);
l Aluminium conductors: 16 to 50 mm 2.
Any setting made will determine the smallest size of conductor in the list of conductor sizes
available for selection.
MakingSettings
To make settings for a single load category, click the row for that category and make the
required settings using the settings at the top of each column. If a different minimum size is
required for the phase and CPCconductors, make the selection for the phase first and
then the CPC.
To make settings for multiple load categories, click or click and drag to select the block of
rows required and then make the settings as described above.

8 Construction Tab
Clicking Reset will reset all the settings to the default values, such as Copper conductors = 1
mm 2, Aluminium conductors = 16 mm 2.
Maximum CPCSizes
In a circuit with a separate CPCset to Auto, the size of that CPCmay be automatically
increased by the calculation if the circuit is failing to disconnect for earth fault within the
specified time limit (5s, 0.4s, and so forth). To prevent the CPCbecoming disproportionately
large in comparison to the size of the phase conductor in the circuit, a maximum size limit
is set.
This pane contains settings that limit the number of sizes a separate CPCwill be increased
by the automatic calculation process. The size limit is set in the Maximum Separate CPC
Sizes pane. Separate settings can be made for copper and aluminium conductors in sub-
mains or final circuits.
The Maximum Size setting sets the number of sizes above the phase conductor size to
which the separate CPCwill be permitted to rise. For example: Setting = 2 ; Phase
Conductor Size = 16 mm 2; Maximum Separate CPCSize when set to Auto = 35 mm 2.
To make settings for a single circuit/conductor material, click the relevant row for that and
make the required settings using the setting at the top of the Maximum Size column.

8 Construction Tab
Clicking Reset will reset all the settings to the default value, such as 3. Printing.
In the CPCtab of the Cable dialog, a message is displayed next to the CPCSize setting
which, when the project has been calculated, shows the absolute value of the maximum
size.
Selectivity Settings
For many distribution systems checking selectivity is an essential part of the design
process. The scope of selectivity checks, and when and how they are carried out can be set
in the Selectivity Settings pane. The settings made apply to the current project. Each time a
new project is created, new settings need to be made to suit that project. Further
information on selectivity checks can be found in the Calculations section under Selectivity.
The pane contains the following sections.
Selectivity Check Selection
The Selectivity Check Selection section contains the following settings:

8 Construction Tab
l Two check boxes Energy-based check and Time-current check allow the selection of
either or both of the Selectivity checks.
l When the Time-current check check box is selected, either or both of the phase fault
and earth fault Selectivity checks can be set.
Phase Fault Selectivity Check at
The phase fault Selectivity can either be selected from Source End or Load End.
Time-current Selectivity Settings
This section contains the setting that determines how time-current Selectivity checks are
to be carried out.
A table contains option for the Minimum, Nominal, or Maximum portions of the
characteristics for both the Upstream and Downstream protective devices. The image
alongside the table shows the characteristics with the selected portion of each
characteristic drawn with a solid line.
Below the table the Minimum Time Margin in milliseconds can be set. This defines the
acceptable time clearance between characteristics when selectivity checks are made. A

8 Construction Tab
zero setting means that characteristics with no overlap would be acceptable. A setting of,
say, 100 would mean that at no point should the compared characteristics be any closer
than 100 ms; if the characteristics are less than 100 ms apart, an error message is
generated.
Diversity Settings
Diversity is applied on the basis of the anticipated loadings that are likely to result from all
loads not being connected at the same time.
Diversity can be set and calculated for load currents in a number of ways:
l Project Diversity Setting
l User-defined at a distribution board or consumer unit; diversities are automatically
calculated and applied to each individual load connected to the board according to
the settings you made.
l Table H2 at a distribution board or consumer unit; diversities are automatically
calculated and applied to each individual load connected to the board according to
settings defined in IEEGuidance Note 1, Appendix H.
You can also make these diversity changes in the following ways:
l Individual Board or Load Diversity Setting
l Set manually at a distribution board or consumer unit, the setting being applied to
all final circuits connected to that board.
l Set manually at individual load dialogs.
l Also, at any individual distribution board or consumer unit a fixed amount of load
can be defined, which is not subject to any diversity calculation.
The ways these various settings can be used are described below.
Project Diversity Setting
Diversity settings for the project are made in the Diversity Settings dialog accessed from
Project Setting / Calculations / Diversity. The settings are divided into two areas: Premises
Type and Load Diversity Method.

8 Construction Tab
Premises Type
The first three premises types are those defined in IEEGuidance Note 1, Appendix H. The
Guidance Note contains a table, Table H2, that lists categories of load types with diversity
settings for each of the load types which vary depending on the type of premises in which
they are being applied.
When one of these three premises is selected, the settings in Table H2 can be selected to
be applied automatically at any of the distribution boards (DBs) or consumer units (CUs) in
the project; alternatively user-defined settings can be applied.
(Manual diversity settings can also be made. These are described in the Distribution Board
Settings below.)
When the fourth type, ‘General premises’ is selected, Table H2 settings will not be available
at DBs. The name of ‘General premises’ is editable; when selected a box appears in which a
new name can be typed, which is the name used in reports:
Load Diversity Method

The diversity settings shown are for the premises type currently selected.
The box labelled Purpose contains a list of load types that have the purposes described.
When one of these items is selected its diversity settings are shown below. The settings
shown correspond to the drop down list selected; IEEGuidance Note 1, Table H2 or User
Defined.
For each load type, there are three settings. These are applied automatically when the
relevant diversity type is selected in a board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer
Unit). Where a number of loads of the same type are connected to a single board, the first
setting ‘Largest’ is applied to the load of that type with the highest load current; the ‘2nd
Largest’ setting is applied to the load of that type with the second highest load current and
the ‘Remaining’ setting is applied to all other loads of that type connected to the board.
The diversity settings for User Defined can be edited; the IEEGuidance Note 1, Table H2
settings are displayed for information only.
The complete list of settings for the premises type currently selected, and IEEGuidance Note
1, Table H2 or User Defined as selected, can be viewed by clicking the View button. A copy
can be printed if required.
Individual Board or Load Diversity Setting
Manual Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)

The Manual setting is selected in the Diversity pane of the board dialog and the diversity
setting is made in the box below. The setting can be made within a range of 0 to 2
(therefore the setting can be used to allow for spare capacity, for example).

8 Construction Tab
The setting is applied to the total design current of all the final circuits connected to the
board. For example, if the total connected final circuit load is 88 A and the diversity setting is
0.85, the diversified load current will be: 88 x 0.85 = 74.8 A.
Diversity is applied to final circuits only, not to sub-main circuits supplying other
boards.
User Defined Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)

The User Defined setting is selected in the Diversity pane of the Board dialog; the calculated
diversity appears automatically in the box. For details on how board diversities are
calculated, see Calculations / Diversity.
The settings applied depend on the settings made in the Diversity Settings dialog accessed
from Project Setting / Calculations / Diversity.
Table H2 Diversity at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)

The Table H2 setting is selected in the Diversity pane of the Board dialog; the diversity
calculated from settings defined in IEEGuidance Note 1, Appendix H, Table H2 appear
automatically in the box.

8 Construction Tab
For details on how the board diversities are calculated, see Calculations / Diversity.
Define Load at a Board (Switchboard, Distribution Board, Consumer Unit)

Select Define Load in the Diversity pane of the Board dialog. This setting overrides the load
calculation for any final circuits connected to the board. The data entered into the dialog is
used to calculate the total final circuit load to that board, regardless of any loads
connected to that board—no diversity will be applied.
The Define Load setting should normally only be used when load data for a board is not
available. For example, to allow a total loading for a board of 120 A / 0.85 PFwith a 3rd
harmonic content of 8 %, without defining any final circuits, make the settings shown
above.

8 Construction Tab
When the details of the actual load circuits to be connected to the board subsequently
become available, these should be added to the board (by drawing them connected to the
board on the single-line diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) and
diversity changed to one of the other settings, such as Manual.
If load circuits are added to a board and the diversity setting is left at Define Load, a
situation could arise in which the connected load exceeds the nominated load
current. This could lead to the connected load exceeding the capacity of the board.
Where this, occurs a Note will be shown in the Errors and Warnings dialog when the
project is calculated. The level at which a Note is generated is set by the Defined
Load Threshold Settings.
For any board with diversity set at Define Load, the Defined Load Threshold settings define
the level at which a note will be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog, advising when
the load connected to the board has become excessive.
Global Settings
Select Defined Load Thresholds from the Project Setting / Calculations / Define Load
Threshold to display the Defined Load Thresholds pane. The pane contains settings that
define the percentage of the value of Define Load setting at a board at which a note will be
displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog. These are default global settings that can be
replaced by local settings at individual boards as required. See Local Settings below.

8 Construction Tab
Local Settings
The Defined Load Threshold group appears in the board Diversity pane when diversity is
set to Define Load. The setting in the box defines the level at which a note will be displayed
in the Errors and Warnings dialog. By default, the Global Setting option is applied:
The global setting is defined in the Defined Load Thresholds dialog, displayed by selecting
Defined Load.
Thresholds from the Preferences / Calculations menu. Alternatively, the Local Setting
option can be used:
diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) exceeded 132 A (120 x 110/100), a

8 Construction Tab
Note would be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog whenever the project is
calculated.
Diversity at a Final Circuit

Diversity can be set for individual final circuits in the Load Details dialog for circuits created
on the network drawing and in the Load/Motor tab of the Circuit dialog for circuits created
in the board circuit diagram. A setting of 1 is normally applied. To change the setting, select
‘Duty’ and type in a value within the range 0 to 2.
The setting made at the final circuit is multiplied by any setting applied at the board to
which the circuit is connected. The total diversity is shown in the dialog.
NOTE– When the diversity method for the feeding board is Table H2, the diversity setting
at the final circuit dialog will be fixed at 1.
When the Standby option is selected, diversity is set to 0. (Note: The Upstream factor also
default to 0)

8 Construction Tab
The diversity setting for a circuit has no effect on the cable sizing for that circuit. For
example, for a circuit protected by a BS88 fuse and where the load and diversity are set at
80 A and 0.8, the fuse rating will be set at 80 A and the cable size will be selected for a rating
of 80 A or greater. At the feeding board the diversified load current for the circuit will be
calculated as 80 x 0.8 = 64 A. This amount of current will be added to the total load
calculated for that board.
SwitchingScenarios
You can save the state of all the switches in the project, or apply a project state that has
been saved earlier.
Switching scenarios can be selected by clicking the arrow from the switching Scenarios
symbol this will bring up a drop-down list for each switching scenarios
that have been created, then select the required switching scenarios.
For any board with diversity set at ‘Define Load’, the Defined Load Threshold settings
define the level at which a note will be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog, advising
when the load connected to the board has become excessive.
Global Settings
Select Defined Load Thresholds from the Project Setting / Calculations / Define Load
Threshold to display the Defined Load Thresholds pane. The pane contains settings that
define the percentage of the value of Define Load setting at a board at which a note will be
displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog. These are default global settings that can be
replaced by local settings at individual boards as required. See Local Settings below.

8 Construction Tab
Local Settings
The Defined Load Threshold group box appears in the board Diversity tab when diversity
is set to Define Load. The setting in the box defines the level at which a note will be
displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog. By default, the Global Setting option is applied:
The global setting is defined in the Defined Load Thresholds dialog, displayed by selecting
Defined Load.
Thresholds from the Preferences / Calculations menu. Alternatively, the Local Setting
option can be used:

8 Construction Tab
diagram or defining them in the board circuit diagram) exceeded 132 A (120 x
110/100), a Note would be displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog whenever the
project is calculated.
Diversity at a Final Circuit
Diversity can be set for individual final circuits in the Load Details dialog for circuits created
on the network drawing and in the Load/Motor tab of the Circuit dialog for circuits created
in the board circuit diagram. A setting of 1 is normally applied. To change the setting, select
the Duty option and enter a value within the range 0 to 2.
The setting made at the final circuit is multiplied by any setting applied at the board to
which the circuit is connected. The total diversity is shown in the dialog.
NOTE– When the diversity method for the feeding board is Table H2, the diversity
setting at the Final Circuit dialog will be fixed at 1.
When the Standby option is selected, diversity is set to 0. (Note: The Upstream factor also
default to 0)

8 Construction Tab
The diversity setting for a circuit has no effect on the cable sizing for that circuit. For
example, for a circuit protected by a BS88 fuse and where the load and diversity are set at
80 A and 0.8, the fuse rating will be set at 80 A and the cable size will be selected for a rating
of 80 A or greater. At the feeding board the diversified load current for the circuit will be
calculated as 80 x 0.8 = 64 A. This amount of current will be added to the total load
calculated for that board.
Switching Scenarios
You can save the state of all the switches in the project, or apply a project state that has
been saved earlier.
To switch scenarios, click the arrow next to the Switch Scenarios field .
A list appears for each switching scenarios that have been created. Select the required
switching scenario.
Cable Length Settings
To access these settings, select Project Settings / Calculation / Cable Length Settings.

8 Construction Tab
Add Allowance
Design Allowance
Adds an allowance of cable to the length specified in the Cable Dialog.
A selected check box signifies the allowance is applied by default to each cable.
If the project setting default is not selected, a design allowance can still be applied by
selecting the allowance within the Cable Dialog.
The design allowance can be specified as a length in metres, or as a percentage of the
design length.
Overload Setting Methods

For an adjustable protective device, it is possible to use one of the following methods to set
the overload:
l Set at Maximum – The selected overload setting is the maximum setting available.
l Set to Auto – When the project is calculated, the overload is adjusted to the lowest
setting equal to or greater than the design current.
l Fixed – A setting is selected by the user.
When a project is first created, the Overload Setting Methods field will be Set at maximum.
Each new adjustable protective device added to the project has its overload initially set to
maximum. Individual devices can have their setting method changed to Auto or Fixed as
required.
If the Overload Setting methods is changed to Auto when the project is first created, the
overloads of all protective devices subsequently created will initially be set to Auto.
If the Overload Setting methods is changed during or after the construction of a project,
the new setting will be applied to all existing devices and any devices subsequently added.
To change the Overload Setting methods, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings /
Protective Devices / Overload Adjustment.

8 Construction Tab
To set the Overload Setting Methods to Auto, select the Set to Auto option and click OK.
A similar procedure can be used at any time to change the setting method to Set at
maximum.
To apply Set to Auto or Set at maximum for all protective devices, select the Apply to All
Protective Devices check box and click OK.
Reports pane
To access these settings, select Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Reports.

8 Construction Tab
Print full project file pathname in report footer

Select this check box to include the full pathname of the project file in the footer of reports,
for example, C:\Building Designs\Superstores\Project 1.pds. When not selected, only the
file name is displayed, for example, Project 1.pds.
Economy printing to reduce ink consumption
When this check box is selected, all reports are printed using minimum ink/toner. The
reports simply use blank text on a white background. No shaded areas appear on the
reports except those on your company logo.
Attachments Manager pane

This feature enables you to associate documentation files, such as images and PDFfiles, to
each component. For example, technical literature relating to an air conditioning load
could be attached to the relevant ProDesign Load item, which enables easy access to this
information.

8 Construction Tab
Type
The Attachment Manager can be used to add or modify attached files associated with any
component in your ProDesign project.
To add an attachment, click Add and browse to the required file.
Double-click on a row number to open an attached file, or select the row and click Open.
To disassociate an attachment select the row and click Remove. Note that if multiply
attachment are attached, check which attachment is highlighted.
The Attachment Manager allows you to filter by each column header, in the same way that
Microsoft Excel filters are used.
Data Entry
The Data Entry pane enables settings to be made to cables and loads, individually or in
groups, without the need to navigate to each component on the single-line diagram and
edit the contents of each individual dialog.
To display the control, select Data Entry from the Construction tab or click the Data Entry
tool :
The control is normally positioned at the base of the ProDesign window. Its height can be
adjusted by dragging the upper edge of the title bar:

8 Construction Tab
The Data Entry toolbar can be docked or floating. For more details, see Docking/Floating
toolbars.
The component data available are generally the same as those in the Cable, Load Details,
and Motor Details dialogs and are contained in the same panes. Additionally, for cables,
there is a Reference menu that contains component data, which controls the format of the
text references used to identify cables.
Data table
A table lists the component data properties for each cable, load or motor, depending on
the selected menu in the project, each row containing the data properties for each cable,
load, or motor.

8 Construction Tab
Data entry
The data entry enables cable, load, or motor data to be entered or edited from this list. To
do this, select the property data that is required to be entered or edited.
The various data entry fields are available as they would be in the component property
dialog. Data property fields are applied as follows:
l Combo Box Settings – For example, Phase, Cable Type, Installation Method. Select a
new setting from the drop-down list. Click the required property that needs to be
changed, and a drop-down list appears. As soon as the new selection is made, it is
applied to the components currently selected.
l Text Box – For example, Length, Ambient Temperature. Click in this box to edit the data
property field. The new value is applied to the selected components when moving to
another property field or by pressing Enter.
Selecting data fields

The properties in the data entry area are applied to the component(s) selected at the time
the property are entry or edit have been applied. To select an individual component, click
on the row for that component; it will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected. The
following graphic shows Cbl_FC-3-FCL-3 is selected:

8 Construction Tab
Multiple component selections can be made, in which case settings made will be applied to
all of the selected components. Multiple selections can be made as follows:
l Contiguous rows can be selected by one of two means:
l Click and drag from the first to the last row to be selected.
l Click the first row, Shift+Click the last row. The following graphic shows Cbl_FC-3-
FCL-3, Cbl_FC-5-FCM1, Cbl_FC-6-FCM2 and Cbl_SM-2 selected:
l Non-contiguous rows are selected by using Ctrl+Click to select each of the rows to be
selected.
l The following graphic shows SM-3, SM-1, FC-3 selected:
Property data applied to multiple components

When applying component data to an individual component, the procedure is exactly the
same as when working in the dialog for that component. Generally the logical way to
proceed is to start at the top and move down the menu options (e.g. starting at the Details
menu then move to the Grouping menu and so on). In this way each component data
change will determine what property will subsequently be available (e.g., if an armoured
cable type is selected, the next property option, e.g. Installation Method, will include
methods such as ‘buried in ground’ which would not be available for non-armoured
cables).
When component data are applied to multiple components, the same principle applies. If a
group of components with widely different data properties are selected, many property
fields will not be available; only those property fields compatible with all the selected
components will be enabled. This should be dealt with by moving through the data fields
from left to right as when making edit to component data for an individual components.

8 Construction Tab
However, some component data, such as Protective Device selection, are not dependent
on other data fields and can be freely made, even to a group of cables of different types
and with different installation conditions. When changes are to be applied to more than
one component at a time a warning box is displayed:
Click Yes to apply the settings; click No to cancel the action.

If preferred, the warning can be suppressed by clearing the check box at the bottom of the
warning. The message will not re-appear during the current session. When the software is
re-opened, the message appears again before changes can be made to multiple
components.
Reference tab
With the exception of the Reference menu, the settings in all the other menu work in a
similar way to the equivalent menus in the component dialogs.
The controls in the Reference menu set the format of the text used to identify existing
cables on the drawing and in reports. The settings are:
Settings Description
Style. The cable is identified by an ID number with a format determined by the

Standard property data entered in the Prefix, Body, Increment and Suffix which are
described below.
Connected The cable is identified by the component which is connected to it on the

To load side (e.g., a cable supplying DB4 will have the Id No. ‘DB4’).
The Suffix setting (see below) can also be used (e.g., a cable supplying DB4
with suffix ‘sub-main’ will have the Id No. ‘DB4- sub-main’).
Connected The cable is identified by the component which is connected to it on the

From supply side (e.g., a cable connected to DB3 will have the Id No. ‘DB3’).
The Suffix setting (see below) can also be used (e.g., a cable connected to
DB3 with suffix ‘sub-main’ will have the Id No. ‘DB3- sub-main’).

8 Construction Tab
Settings Description
Prefix When the Style is set as Standard, the prefix determines the text used for
the first part of the cable.
Id No Sets the numerical part of the cable ID number. By default, this is

automatically generated normally to provide unique numbers in sequence.
Body The Body setting can be used to overwrite the number automatically
allocated for a cable.
Suffix Defines a text string that will be appended to the Id. No. for the selected
cables.
Include Appends Way and Phase details to the ID number (e.g., 3-phase Cable 74
Way/Phase. connected to Way 5: ‘Cable-74-5-L1,L2,L3).
Data Entry toolbar

Undo/Redo
Using the buttons on the toolbar, up to five levels of data properties can be undone or
redone.
The Undo/Redo buttons on the Cable Data Entry toolbar and the Standard toolbar
perform the same actions.
Data Table Sort and Filter
The property fields can either be sorted A-Z or Z-A and filter if required.
Sort
The sort function works by selecting the property field text. This will sort the property field
data first from A-Z, then if selected again Z-A, and if selected a third time it will remove the
sort. To know if a sort is active you will see either an up or down pointing arrow head, as
shown:
Filter
The filter hides all components except those selected by the filter process. Click on the Filter
button to display the Components Filter dialog, the contents vary slightly depending on

8 Construction Tab
the property field:
This filter can either be used by selecting property data (A) from the selection box in the top
half of the filter dialog or using the filter option (B) in the bottom half of the dialog.
To apply the filter, select the filter button. Only the property data selected by the filter
process will be visible in the property data table. All other component item data will be
hidden.
To make hidden component items visible, click either the clear filter button from the filter
dialog or select the Show/Hide Button on the data entry toolbar (see below).
Showing and Hiding Components
The details for all components are normally visible in the data entry table.
Hide – Select one or more components and then click the Hide button. The details for
the selected components will no longer be visible. (The Filter feature can also be used to
hide selected components.)
Show – Click the Show button to display the details for all components. This action can
be used to re-display components previously hidden either by the application of the Hide
button or the Filter function.
Multiple Component Edit Warning Message

8 Construction Tab
By default, a warning box is displayed when attempting to make changes to multiple

components.
Hide Warnings – Click the button to suppress the appearance of the warning box for the
remainder of the current session. On re-opening the software, the setting will revert to
Show Warnings.
Show Warnings – Click the button to restore the appearance of the warning message.
Templates
Click the Template button to reveal a list of the names of all the currently defined templates
for the selected component type. Click a name in the list to apply the template settings to
the currently selected component(s).
Only templates that are applicable for that component can be selected. If they are
not applicable they will be greyed out. An example of this is a three-phase cable that
cannot have a single-phase cable template applied to it.

9
Calculations Tab
The Calculations tab contains the following tools:
l Calculate – To perform a calculation, click .

Performs the Network Logic check and then performs all calculations on the entire
network. For a detailed explanation of the calculations, see Calculate, page 292.
l Selectivity Study – To perform a Selectivity study, click . See Selectivity Check,

page 309.
l Protection Study– Starts Amtech Protect to enable a time/current selectivity study to
be made. A cable, busbar, motor or load must be selected before clicking the button.
Protect will display the protective device characteristic curves for all circuits along the
route back to the Source from the highlighted component. To view the protect, click
. For more information, see Protection Study, page 315.
l Impedance Matrices – To review the impedance matrices, click

(Only for ProDesign Version 100 and later). For more details, see Impedance Matrices,
page 363.
l View Graph – Click

9 Calculations Tab
to display the tripping characteristic of the currently selected

circuit.
In addition to the currently selected device, the characteristics for the following will also
be displayed: the next device upstream (towards the supply source) and the next
device downstream with the highest effective rating (nominal rating multiplied by any
overload settings). Also, when a load is selected, the tripping characteristics for all the
circuits on a route back to the active source are displayed when Adjust Settings is
selected.
l Fix Design – Click to calculate the project and set all ‘Auto’ sized
conductors and protective devices to their calculated values.
l Unfix Design – Click to restore the ‘Auto’ setting for all components
previously set to ‘Auto’.

9 Calculations Tab
Calculate
To access these settings, select Calculation / Calculate .

This section describes the calculations that the software performs.
Calculating the project

To calculate the project, click Calculations / Calculate or press F2.
The calculation procedure involves three stages:

1. A logic check is performed.
2. The network calculations are performed.
Details of the calculations are described below in this section. When the calculations
are complete, if no problems have been detected a message appears to confirm this.
3. Errors and warnings are displayed.

9 Calculations Tab
Errors and Warnings

Errors are displayed to warn of conditions that are likely to involve a failure to comply with
the requirements of BS7671:2018 .
Warnings are intended to alert the designer to conditions that are not necessarily non-
compliant, but may need attention.
A third category, Notes is designed to inform the designer of other, non-critical, calculation
results. For example, a cable may have been increased in size, above the size necessary to
carry the load current, to meet a voltage drop requirement. This will result in a compliant
design, but the designer should be aware that this has taken place.
When the project is calculated, any problems found during the calculations are listed in the
Errors/Warnings dialog, which is displayed at the end of the calculation procedure:
To locate the network component referred to in an error or warning message, double-click

the message. The drawing will scroll to a position where that network component is
centred in the window; additionally, the network component will be flashing.
ProDesign ME
In addition to the Errors and Warnings described below, messages will be listed under the
Load Type Rules category for all instances where any settings for loads in Load Distribution
Schedules do not comply with the limits that you have set in the Load Type Editor. These
messages appear at the top of the list:
Errors and warning messages

Errors and Warnings, grouped together by categories denoted by headings, for example,
‘Sub-mains Voltage Drop’. Error and warning messages contain the following fields:

9 Calculations Tab
Field Description
Reference The reference of the network component.
Name The name of the network component.
Calculated Calculated values relevant to the problem reported.

values
Description A description of the problem.
Status Error for critical messages or warning for advisory messages. The messages
are colour coded, red for errors and blue for warnings.
Error Categories
A list box containing a list of the categories for which error or warning messages are
present. Selecting an item from the list box scrolls the list to the beginning of the block of
messages for the category selected.
Show Errors, Warnings and Notes

All error, warning, and notes are displayed in the Errors Message dialog.
It is possible to filter any field in the error dialog. Select the filter you want to use in each
field (this is located to the right of the field).
Errors and Warnings Count Status

Shows the number of errors present. The count is unaffected by the status of the Show
check boxes.
Export Button
Produces an exported version of the list of messages in Microsoft Excel format. The
content of the printout corresponds to the display list as filtered in the list shown.
For detailed information about the messages, see List of Notes, Error and Warning
Messages.

9 Calculations Tab
List of Notes, Error and Warning Messages

Busbar: Peak Fault Current Withstand
The peak fault withstand declared by the manufacturer for the busbar system must be
greater than the prospective peak fault current, that is, the instantaneous level that could
be reached during the first half-cycle of fault current. An excessive level of peak current
may lead to mechanical damage to the busbar caused by electromechanical stresses.
Likely to occur where a busbar with a relatively low current rating is connected to a supply
with a relatively high level of prospective fault current.
Busbar Sizing
The busbar current rating should be equal to or greater than the required current rating
(Iz). Iz is calculated for the most heavily loaded section of busbar and takes into account the
ambient temperature surrounding the busbar casing and whether the busbar is installed
vertically or horizontally (both set in the Details pane of the Busbar dialog).
If the busbar rating is set to Auto, it may be necessary to select a different type with a
higher range of ratings.
Some busbars are designed for use as risers and are fully rated when installed vertically.
Other types may be derated when used in this way.
Busbar Neutral Sizing

The rating of the neutral busbar conductor should be equal to or greater than the neutral
current.
Generally, the neutral conductor of a busbar will be the same size as the line conductors.
Therefore, if a neutral sizing error occurs when there is no problem with sizing of the line
conductors, a high neutral current resulting from unbalanced line currents is likely to be
the cause.
Cable Neutral Sizing

9 Calculations Tab
The current-carrying capacity of the neutral conductor is less than the required capacity
taking account of the installation conditions. Normally, for single-core cables set to Auto,
the neutral conductor would be sized the same as the line conductors. Where there are
harmonic currents, the current in the neutral could be greater than any of the line
currents, leading to an Auto neutral size greater than the line conductors.
The neutral cable size may be fixed at a value too low to support the neutral current. The
neutral size can be set to Auto, Double (automatically double the size of the line
conductors), or Manual.
Cable Phase Sizing
The tabulated current-carrying rating (It ) of the cable is less than the required rating (Iz).
The required rating may be increased as a result of the application of rating factors (for
such conditions as grouped cables) that reflect the installed condition.
If the cable is set to ‘Auto’ and the tabulated rating of the largest cable size is inadequate, it
may be necessary to use a different cable type or a number of parallel cables.
If the cable size is fixed and the tabulated rating of the selected cable size is inadequate, it
may be necessary to select a larger size or use a number of parallel cables.
Derating for the installed condition (ambient temperature, grouping, and so forth) may be
high. Check the values of rating factors in the Cables Calculations and Cables Analysis
reports.
Circuit Protective Device: Breaking Capcity
There is a general requirement for the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of a circuit protective
device to be equal to or greater than the maximum fault current [both the prospective
short-circuit current (Pscc) and the earth fault current (Ief )] at the supply end of the circuit.
Consider the use of a different CPD with a higher breaking capacity.
Where the breaking capacity of a device is not adequate, the requirement may be met
using Back-up protection – BS7671:2018, 536.1). Select ‘Back-up Protection’ breaking
capacity in the Protection pane of the Cable dialog (requires the use of a suitable circuit-
breaker in the circuit on the supply side of the one under consideration).

9 Calculations Tab
Review the level of fault current defined at the project active supply source.
Circuit Protective Device: Back-up Protection
A Back-up Protection is being used but the fault current (prospective short-circuit current
or earth fault current) is greater than the enhanced breaking capacity provided by back-up
protection.
Review the level of fault current defined at the project active supply source.
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current

The rating of the circuit protective device should be equal to or greater than the design
current (Ib) for the circuit.
For a protective device without an adjustable overload (e.g., fuse, mcb), the nominal rating
(In) of the circuit protective device should be equal to or greater than the design current (Ib)
for the circuit.
If the rating of the CPD is set to ‘Auto’, Ib may exceed the rating of the largest size in the
selected range of CPD – try a different CPD type.
If the rating of the CPD has been set by the user – try a higher setting;
For an adjustable device, check that the overload setting is higher than Ib.
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current
For a protective device with an adjustable overload, the adjusted overload setting (Ir ) of the
circuit protective device should be equal to or greater than the design current (Ib) for the
circuit.
For a device with an adjustable overload, check that the setting is higher than Ib.

9 Calculations Tab
Circuit Protective Device: Rated Current, Motors
The motor rating of the circuit protective device when used to provide short-circuit
protection for a motor circuit should be equal to or greater than the motor load current.
Where the motor load current exceeds the device motor rating, inadvertent operation of
the protective device may be caused by the high level of transient current likely to occur
during motor starting.
Protective device ratings when used for motor loads are generally lower than for other
load types. This is particularly true for circuit-breakers designed for general distribution
loads, for which the motor rating may be very low. Most circuit-breaker ranges have special
overload types for motor protection (consult the manufacturer). These overload types
should be used wherever possible.
The motor rating of a device can be seen in the Protective Devices Selector, and also the
Circuit Protection pane of the Starter dialog (after the project has been calculated when
the device is set to Auto).
Circuit Protective Device: RCD
There is a general requirement for the use of an RCD to protect socket-outlets ≤ 20 A

unless the installation is not in a dwelling and a documented risk assessment has been
carried out or identified for use with a particular piece of equipment (BS7671:2018, 411.3.3).
If one of the two of these exemptions is ticked in the Load Details dialog, the error message
will no longer appear for that circuit.
Circuits supplying mobile equipment with a rating ≤ 32 A are required to be protected by

RCD (BS7671:2018, 411.3.3(ii)).
Circuit Protective Device: Ring Circuit

9 Calculations Tab
For a ring final circuit feeding sockets, the circuit protective device used must have nominal
rating of either 30 A or 32 A (BS7671:2018, 433.1.204).
Earth Fault: Adiabatic

The circuit protective conductor (CPC) has failed the adiabatic test required by BS
7671:2018, 543.1.3 that ensures that following earth fault disconnection, the final
temperature of the CPCdoes not exceed a limit beyond which damage which may occur.
The section (csa) of the conductor is less than the minimum (Smin) calculated using: Smin =
√(I2t)/k
The earth fault disconnection time is less than 0.1 s, therefore the term I2t is calculated as
the energy let-through (A2s) at the calculated level of earth fault current (I).
It will probably be necessary to increase the CPCsize.
The earth fault disconnection time is greater than 0.1 s, therefore the term I2t is calculated
as the earth fault current (I) squared times the disconnection time (t).
Reducing the disconnection time may solve the problem. This could be done by: larger
CPC; avoid the use of devices with high trip level (e.g., type D MCB) unless necessary; for
adjustable devices, ensure the fault tripping level is not set too high.
Earth Fault: Earth Loop Impedance
The earth fault loop impedance (Zs) is greater than the maximum permissible value (Max
Zs) for the protective device and load type. Therefore, the level of earth fault current is too
low to ensure disconnection of the protective device within the disconnection time
specified in BS7671:2018, Table 41.1, for the level of applied voltage and system type.
Earth Fault: External Earth Loop Impedance

9 Calculations Tab
Where the external earth fault loop impedance (Ze) is greater than the maximum earth
fault loop impedance (Max Zs), the circuit will be non-compliant regardless of any change
that may be made to the size of conductors in the circuit.
A device with a higher Max Zs requirement may provide a solution. This may lead to the use
of an RCD.
Measures in the circuits on the supply side, such as increased CPCsizes, may improve the
situation.
Generator Load Rating
The load rating is calculated from the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab in the
Generator dialog. When the total diversified network current exceeds that calculated
rating, an error message is generated.
Ensure that the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab of the Generator dialog is correctly
set.
HV Circuit Protective Device: Primary Rated Current
The transformer rated primary current. Depending on the setting made the requirement
may be for 100 % or 130 % of the rated primary current. The setting and primary design
current are displayed in a panel in the Protection tab of the Transformer dialog.
Ensure that the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab of the Transformer dialog is
correctly set.
Non-compliant Installation

9 Calculations Tab
Cables installed within walls, partitions, ceilings or floors are required to comply with BS
7671:2018, 522.6.201 to 522.6.204 which is intended to ensure that if a concealed cable is
penetrated by a screw, drill, etc., it first has to pass through an earthed conductor thus
ensuring disconnection resulting from earth fault current.
Click Settings in the Cable dialog next to the ‘Non-Compliant’ indicator for a full explanation
of the available provisions for compliance.
Line Conductor Adiabatic Check

The line conductor has failed the adiabatic test required by BS7671:2018, 434.5.2 that
ensures that the final temperature of the conductor, reached at the end of fault
disconnection, does not exceed a limit beyond which damage which may occur.
The fault current flowing through the phase conductor, which has caused the circuit
protective device to disconnect the circuit, could be caused by either a phase fault or an
earth fault condition. The software calculates all possible conditions and an error message
will be produced if a condition arises where the heat energy (I2t) flowing during the time
taken to disconnect exceeds the conductor withstand (k2S2).
The phase fault disconnection time is less than 0.1 s. The energy let-through of the
protective device is greater than the energy fault withstand of the conductor calculated
using: k2S2; where k is from BS7671:2018, Table 43.1 and Sis the section of the conductor in
mm 2.
The energy let-through of the protective device may be comparatively high for the size of
the conductor. For example, using a circuit-breaker with a low current rating in a relatively
large frame size, e.g., a 100 A frame with a 20 A trip.

9 Calculations Tab
The phase fault disconnection time is greater than 0.1 s and greater than the limiting time
(t) calculated using: t = (k2S2)/I2; where k is from BS7671:2018, Table 43.1, Sis the section of
the conductor in mm 2, and I is the minimum phase fault current.
Reducing the disconnection time may solve the problem. This could be done by: avoiding
the use of devices with a high trip level (e.g., type D MCB) unless necessary; for adjustable
devices, ensure that the fault tripping level is not set too high.
If the problem occurs under earth fault conditions, the use of an RCD would probably
provide a solution.
Phase Unbalance
The sizing of the phase and neutral conductors takes into account harmonic currents,
where present in circuits. However, the method used, as described in BS7671:2018,
Appendix 4, 5.5, does not provide for rating factors where the phase imbalance is greater
than 50 %.
Reduced Neutral Harmonics
Because of the level of 3rd harmonic current the rating of the selected neutral conductor
size is insufficient for the level of neutral current. The neutral current is the total of the
current caused by imbalance between the individual phase currents and the sum of the
3rd harmonic currents flowing in each phase. The levels of both are shown in the message.
If the neutral conductor size is set to Auto, the correct size will be normally selected for the
calculated neutral current.
Selectivity: Energy-Based

9 Calculations Tab
The energy-based check ensures selectivity between devices such as fuses and MCBs,
which respond instantaneously to fault currents, with no intentional time delay.
Assessment of short-circuit tripping behaviour and resulting selectivity levels for such
devices depends on the levels of energy (A2s) flowing through the devices and cannot be
determined by inspection of time-current characteristics.
l For fuses, it is normally necessary to ensure a ratio of at least 1.6:1 between the
nominal ratings of the upstream and downstream fuses to avoid a loss of
selectivity.
l For circuit-breakers, greater ratios may be necessary. Also, the frame size of the
device is more important than just the nominal rating. For example, two MCBs of
the same type but with ratings 63 A and 10 A are unlikely to provide energy-
based selectivity.
Selectivity: Time-Current
The time-current selectivity check detects any overlapping of the time-current tripping
characteristics for two successive devices, i.e., levels of current for which operation of the
upstream device will be initiated before the downstream device clears the fault, resulting in
a loss of selectivity.
Where overlaps occur the error message gives the range of current (from If1 to If2) across
which the overlap occurs and for which selectivity is likely to fail.
Using successive devices with dissimilar characteristics (for example, fuses and circuit-
breakers) increases the likelihood of overlaps.
With adjustable circuit-breakers, use View Graph to optimise settings.
Transformer Load Rating
The load rating is calculated from the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions pane in the
Transformer dialog. When the total diversified network current exceeds that calculated
rating, an error message is generated.

9 Calculations Tab
Ensure that the Rating (kVA) in the Fault Conditions tab of the Transformer dialog is set
correctly.
Voltage Drop
The voltage drop between the supply and the load end of the cable in the circuit exceeds
the setting in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog. The Reference and Name columns show the
ID No. and Name of both the final circuit and the load. The Calculated Values column shows
the limit and the actual voltage drop. The Description column states whether the limit is a
user-defined setting or to BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 6.4.
Check that the limit set for the stated load is appropriate. Settings in the Voltage Drop tab
in the Load Details dialog allow a limit to be set for that particular load, without changing
the global limit applied to the rest of the project.
Maximum Disconnection Time
The maximum disconnection time set by the user is higher than the value required by BS
7671:2018, Table 41.1 for the selected circuit type.

9 Calculations Tab
Warning Messages
CPC: Auto Size
This refers to a conflict between the minimum size set for separate CPCs and the maximum
CPCsize limit. The minimum size is set above the maximum size as it applies to this circuit.
The rule applied ensures that the minimum size is used regardless of the maximum size
requirement.
CPD: Breaking Capacity
An optional requirement for circuit-breakers is to ensure that the service breaking capacity
(Ics) is equal to or greater than the prospective fault current at the load end of the circuit
(BSEN 60947-2). Ics, usually lower than the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu), defines a level of
fault current that the circuit-breaker can interrupt and still be capable of full rated service.
Meeting this optional requirement provides an enhanced level of service continuity, in that
the circuit-breaker would immediately be ready for re-use after the interruption of a load
end fault (statistically the most common fault configuration).
Selectivity: Energy-Based
There is no data available for energy-based selectivity for the protective devices used in the
two circuits named. This occurs for: circuit-breakers from different manufacturers; circuit-
breakers from a manufacturer that has not provided data; circuit-breaker upstream and
fuse downstream.
To ensure selectivity when using circuit-breakers, it is necessary to use devices from a
single manufacturer that provides data.
Network Diversity

9 Calculations Tab
For each board, the load calculations determine the load, either by applying the value set
for Define Load, or by factoring the connected load by a diversity setting. This message
indicates that either diversity for the phases listed should be set to Define Load or that the
connected loads should be defined on the single-line diagram or in the board circuit-
diagram.
Surge Protective Device
The warning is shown when the ISCCR Rating of the Surge Protective Device is greater than
the ultimate breaking capacity of the CPD protecting the Surge Protective Device as it is an
uncommon scenario that may need checking with the manufacturer of the Surge
Protective Device.
Adiabatic Check Not Performed
In certain instances, the adiabatic check cannot be performed as there is an insufficient

current to trip the device.
The 'max tolerance pickup current' refers to the most lenient pickup current of the
selected device by using the 'maximum tolerance' curve (rather than nominal or minimum),
and can be seen by using the 'View Graph' or 'Protection Study' feature.

9 Calculations Tab
It's important to note as per BS7671:2018, 533.1.1 the overcurrent protective device
energy let through is used for the adiabatic calculation, however the disconnection time
may still be met by using a specific Earth Fault protective device (e.g. an add-on RCD).
Notes
Compliant Installation: User Defined
Cables installed within walls, partitions, ceilings or floors are required to comply with BS
7671:2018, 522.6.201 to 522.6.204 which is intended to ensure that if a concealed cable is
penetrated by a screw, drill, etc., it first has to pass through an earthed conductor thus
ensuring disconnection resulting from earth fault current.
The circuit complies using a method defined by the user, in the Settings dialog for Cable in
Walls or Partitions or Cable Under Floors or Above Ceilings, rather than one of the
standard listed provisions.
Board Defined Load Threshold Exceeded
Diversity settings can be used to set a defined load at a board in a situation where details of
the load circuits to be connected are not known. The Define Load Threshold can be set to
a percentage of that defined load so that if, subsequently, circuits are connected to the
board, the note will give notice when the total connected load from those circuits exceeds
the Defined load Threshold.
Changing the diversity to Manual enables the ProDesign MEsoftware to assess the load on
the board as the sum of the connected circuit design currents multiplied by the diversity
setting.
Voltage Drop: Upsized Final Circuit

9 Calculations Tab
It is required that the voltage drop across every branch in the network from the supply
source to the load terminals is limited to the value set by either the global setting in the
Voltage Drop Settings dialog (user-defined or to BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 6.4) or a specific
setting made for the load in that branch, in the Load Details dialog.
The final circuit cable will be increased in size from the minimum size required to support
the load current, to a size which will keep the overall voltage drop from the supply source
to the load terminals within the set limit.
Voltage Drop: Upsized Sub-mains
It is required that the voltage drop across every branch in the network from the supply
source to the load terminals is limited to the value set by either the global setting in the
Voltage Drop Settings dialog (user-defined or to BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 6.4) or a specific
setting made for the load in that branch, in the Load Details dialog.
To ensure the overall limit for a branch is met, each cable in the branch is allocated a limit.
Where the allocated limit is exceeded by the cable when sized for current-carrying capacity,
its size is increased to meet the limit.
Earth Fault Disconnection Device
In circumstances where the Over Current Protective Device provides a quicker

disconnection time than a specific RCD that may have been added, a Note for information
is shown.
This Note can be toggled on or off within the Application Settings / Messages section.

9 Calculations Tab
Selectivity Check
Selectivity checks ensure that wherever a fault might occur in the network, the protective
device nearest the fault will operate to disconnect it rather than the next device upstream.
Selectivity is evaluated using the maximum prospective fault current at the load end of the
circuit, protected by the downstream protective device. For example, the following diagram
shows for the calculated level of fault current, protective device B should operate to clear
the fault. At the same time, device A should not trip.
Two methods of selectivity check are available; energy-based and time-current. These
methods are complementary and both should be used to ensure a comprehensive
evaluation of selectivity.
The number of selectivity checks performed, how they are made, and when they are to be
made, is determined by the settings in the Selectivity Settings dialog.
When the selected checks are made depends on the setting in the Selectivity Settings
dialog. The checks can be set to occur following the general network check. Alternatively,
the checks can be set to be performed only when requested from the Calculations group
and clicking Selectivity Study:

9 Calculations Tab
Energy-based Selectivity Check

The energy-based check is essential to ensure selectivity between devices, such as fuses
and MCBs, which respond instantaneously, with no intentional time delay, to short-circuit
currents. Assessment of short-circuit tripping behaviour and resulting selectivity levels for
such devices depends on the levels of energy (A2s) flowing through the devices and cannot
be determined by inspection of time-current characteristics.
How is the check made?

When the Energy-based check option is selected, each time the selectivity checks are
performed, an energy-based check is made for selectivity under short-circuit conditions.
This check determines the level of selectivity available between current-limiting protective
devices with instantaneous short-circuit trip settings.
Because the protection settings on these devices have no intentional time-delay,
verification of selectivity is not possible by inspection of the tripping characteristics on a
graph to determine whether, for a given level of fault current, the downstream device will
trip to disconnect the fault without the upstream device operating.
Manufacturers produce tables listing levels of selectivity between current-limiting devices,
based on test results for devices at various levels of fault energy under short-circuit
conditions. The ProDesign MEsoftware uses these manufacturers’ tables (where available)
when performing the energy-based selectivity check.
EXAMPLE– The example below shows a table entry for a Type ABC250, rating 250 A
circuit-breaker upstream and a Type XYZ100, rating 50 A circuit-breaker downstream.
The level of selectivity is given as 23 kA. Providing the fault level at the downstream
circuit-breaker does not exceed 23 kA, selectivity can be assured. For fault levels
greater than 23 kA, an error message is produced and the Cable report will show:
Selectivity – not OK.

9 Calculations Tab
Where there is no manufacturer’s data available for energy-based selectivity between two
protective devices, a warning message appears. This is likely to occur for two devices of
different manufacture.
Where circuits are protected by devices with time delayed short-circuit protection settings
it is not necessary to make an energy-based check; selectivity will occur providing the
device tripping characteristics do not overlap – this can be verified by inspection on a
graph (see: Time-Current Selectivity Check below).
Time-Current Selectivity Check

Time-current selectivity is normally determined by a visual inspection of the time-current
tripping characteristics for two successive devices to ensure that the characteristics do not
overlap. That is, there are no levels of current for which operation of the upstream device
will be initiated before the downstream device clears the fault.
Evaluating time-current selectivity

Time-current selectivity between two protective devices can be checked by visual
inspection of their time-current tripping characteristics. Providing the characteristics do
not overlap, that is, there are no levels of fault current for which the upstream device may
operate more rapidly than the downstream device, time/current selectivity is assured [A].
Where an overlap does occur, selectivity will fail over the range of current covered by the
overlap. However, where an overlap occurs at levels of fault current greater than the
maximum prospective fault current (Ipf ) at the downstream protective device, there is no
likelihood of a selectivity failure in practice [B].

9 Calculations Tab
How is the check made?

When the Time-current check option is selected, each time the selectivity checks are
performed, a time-current check is made. The check carries out the visual inspection of
characteristics electronically, eliminating the necessity of making visual checks. For every
protective device in the network, its tripping characteristic is compared to the
characteristic of the upstream device. For each instance where overlapping characteristics
are detected, an error message is generated describing the extent of the overlap in terms
of the level of current at which the overlap starts to the level of current at which it ends.
The scope of the check extends up to the two following limits:
l The level of maximum prospective short-circuit current (PSCC) at the downstream
device. Overlaps beyond this level will not lead to failure of selectivity because they are
beyond the theoretical limit of fault current that can flow through the two devices.
l Times below 0.07 seconds. Tripping times represented on the characteristic below this
level may give useful data about the total operating time of a device for a given level of
current, but cannot be used to reliably check selectivity. Selectivity in this area can only
be properly checked using energy-based data.
How overlaps of characteristics are evaluated and reported on depends on the Time-
current settings at the time of the check.

9 Calculations Tab
Example A
Example B
EXAMPLE– Where the settings are: Upstream = minimum; Downstream = maximum;

Minimum Time Margin = 0 ms, the full characteristics will be compared including the
full range of minimum and maximum tolerances. Any area of overlap of two
characteristics will be reported as a selectivity failure.
If the Minimum Time Margin is set to, say, 10 ms: any two characteristics that are separated
by a time margin less than 10 ms will give be reported as a selectivity failure.
EXAMPLE– Example B: Where the settings are: Upstream = nominal; Downstream =

nominal; Minimum Time Margin = 0 ms, the tolerances are ignored and a selectivity
failure will be reported for any area where the nominal tripping time of the
downstream device exceeds the nominal tripping time of the upstream device.
Protective Device Setting Check

During the selectivity check a useful check is also made regarding the level of short-circuit
setting compared to the PSCCin the relevant circuit. If the short-circuit protection has
been set to a level exceeding the PSCC, it will never operate resulting in the circuit having

9 Calculations Tab
no short-circuit protection. Where this condition is detected, a note appears in the Errors
and Warnings dialog.
Selectivity Check dialog

During the selectivity check, the Selectivity Check dialog summarising the progress of
checks appears:
At the end of the check procedure, if any failures have been detected, the Errors and
Warnings dialog will be displayed listing the details of those failures. Also, the Selectivity
Check dialog remains displayed until the Cancel button is clicked.
The Selectivity Check dialog contains the following:
l A progress bar showing the percentage of the checks that have been completed.
l The locations of the two devices currently being checked.

9 Calculations Tab
Protection Study
Protective device characteristics can be viewed and adjusted using the Protection Study
tool. These include overcurrent and earth fault operating characteristics and energy let-
through characteristics. Also shown are the thermal withstand characteristics of circuit
conductors.
The following functions are available within the Protection Study tool:
l Inspection of overcurrent and earth fault time/current characteristics, including
operating time in relation to fault current levels.
l Time/current selectivity.
l Protection setting adjustments.
l Inspection of overcurrent and earth fault energy let-through characteristics, including
comparison with conductor thermal withstand characteristics.
Performing a Protection Study and Displaying the Graph

The Graph can be displayed by:
l The project single-line diagram – Select a component such as Load or Cable and then
click the Protection Study[ ] button on the Calculate toolbar.

l The characteristics of the device protecting the selected component and those
upstream on a path back to the supply source will be displayed.
l The Circuit Protection tab of the Cable dialog. Click the View Graph button [
], the characteristic of the selected device will be displayed.
Graph Navigation
The log/log graph view in Protect extends for six decades in both directions, for example:
l Current: 1 A to 1 MA
l Time: 0.01 s to 10,000 s
l Energy: 102 to 108

9 Calculations Tab
1. Horizontal scroll bar. Becomes active when the graph is zoomed in and not set to
'Zoom Extents' (see Item 3).
2. Displays values from the graph where the mouse pointer is placed.
3. Zoom Extents button. Sets the graph to fit within the size of the toolbar.
4. Zoom bar. Sets the current zoom level of the graph. Move left to zoom out and right to
zoom in.
5. Vertical scroll bar. Becomes active when the graph is zoomed in and not set to 'Zoom
Extents' (see Item 3).
6. Additional settings button. When the toolbar width is not long enough to
accommodate all buttons, they are condensed and made accessible by pressing this
button.

9 Calculations Tab
7. Graph view adjustments. Use these to change between the different graphs.
8. Drop-down protection study single-line diagram. Shows the active protective device.
TIP – Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out by scrolling back and forth. To pan
around the graph, click and hold the middle mouse button while moving the mouse.
Additional Buttons
Additional buttons from left to right:

l Voltage selector: Select the active voltage for the graph.
l Curve Selector: Switch between nominal or tolerance band representations of the
characteristics (where available).
l Display Parameters: Drop-down menu showing additional parameters that can be
displayed on the graph.
l Grading Margins: Set up and toggle on/off grading margins between devices.
l Help button: Loads the help file.
Selecting a Device
To make a device the 'active device' either click on the relevant curve on the graph, or for
curves that are overlapping, selection of the device can be made from the single-line
diagram drop-down menu.
Selecting Graph Views

The graph views can be changed by using the drop-down menus:
to give one of four graph views available:

l Overcurrent + Time/Current (default)
l Earth Fault + Time/Current
l Overcurrent + Energy/Current
l Earth Fault + Energy/Current
The Time/Current views can be used to check selectivity; the Energy/Current views to
compare conductor thermal withstands with protective device energy let-through levels.
The features available in each of the views are described below.

9 Calculations Tab
Setting Devices
For devices with adjustable settings, adjustments can be made to any of the settings for a
displayed characteristic by pressing the button, at the top of the Protection
Study toolbar. Where a protective device is selected with no adjustable settings, the
button will be greyed out.
TIP – When device settings can be adjusted, double-clicking on the curve on the
graph will activate the keypad.
When active and clicking Edit Keypad, the following dialog appears:
The settings are grouped in categories:

L: overload; S: short-circuit; I: instantaneous; G: earth fault
Each setting is labelled with the identifier used by the manufacturer.

9 Calculations Tab
Settings are adjusted by clicking on the arrow buttons. The results of any changes can be
seen on the graph as they are made. Once limits are reached the arrows will become
greyed out.
Clicking OKsaves the changes for that device. Clicking Canceldiscards any changes for that
device.
NOTE– Settings are only active in the relevant view, that is Overcurrent settings in
the Overcurrent views and Earth Fault in the Earth Fault views:
Graphical Selectivity
The time/current characteristics of the selected protective devices are displayed in the
'Overcurrent + Time/Current’ and ‘Earth Fault+Time/Current’ views.

l Vertical axis: time 0.01 s to 10,000 s;
l Horizontal axis: current 1 A (10 mA, Earth Fault) to 1 MA;
The data displayed in the graphs allow visual inspection of time/current selectivity.
Overlaps in the characteristics for two devices indicate areas where selectivity may fail.
The devices are identified in the single line diagram drop-down menu as detailed above.
See also: Selectivity.
Graphical Energy Let-through

The energy let-through characteristics of the selected protective device is displayed in the
‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ and ‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ views, together with the
thermal withstand characteristics of the conductors in the associated circuit.

9 Calculations Tab

l Vertical axis: Energy 1x102 to 1x1011 A2s
l Horizontal axis: current 1 A (10 mA, Earth Fault) to 1 MA

The data displayed in the graphs allow a visual comparison of the relative levels of energy
let-through by the protective device and the thermal withstand of the conductor in the
circuit being protected. This provides a graphical representation of the adiabatic check. For
the line conductor, the adiabatic requirement is satisfied where the conductor withstand is
equal to or greater than the device energy let-through at the minimum prospective fault
current (Pscc Min). The earth fault adiabatic check compares the circuit protective
conductor (cpc) withstand to the device let-through at the earth fault current (Ief ).
The devices are identified in the single-line diagram drop-down box at the top of the
toolbar (Item 8 above).
The following items are shown on the graph for the selected device:
l The protective device let-through characteristic
l The thermal withstand characteristic of the conductor in the circuit protected by the
selected protective device
l The thermal withstand characteristic of alternative conductors
For adjustable devices, protection settings can be changed as required.
Where no graphical thermal energy let-through data is held for a protective device type, a
message is displayed on the graph when that device is selected:

9 Calculations Tab
‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ View

The following graph shows a typical ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ graph view:

l Line conductor (25 mm 2) thermal withstand (solid line)
l Withstand characteristics for the next available size below (16 mm 2) the selected
conductor and the one above (35 mm 2) (dashed lines)
l Minimum fault current (Pscc Min) for the selected circuit
The line conductor adiabatic check is performed at Pscc Min. Providing the amount of
energy let-through by the device is not greater than the conductor withstand at Pscc Min,
the circuit is compliant with the line conductor adiabatic check. In the example shown, the
withstand is 8.53 x 106 A2s and the let-through is 6 x 104 A2s, therefore the circuit is
compliant.

9 Calculations Tab
‘Earth Fault+Energy/Current’ View

The following graph shows a typical ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’ graph view:

l Circuit protective conductor (cpc) thermal withstand (solid line).
l Withstand characteristics for the next available size below the selected separate cpc
and the one above (dashed lines). For armour, sheath, earth conductor, conduit or
trunking only as cpc, alternative sizes are not shown.
Additional display parameters can be :
l Earth fault current (Ief ) for the selected circuit.

9 Calculations Tab
For a circuit with overcurrent protection and an Add-on RCD, click on the additional
RCD device on the single-line diagram drop-down to see its characteristic:
Withstand Data Panel

When the Overcurrent + Energy / Current or Earth Fault + Energy / Current graph is
selected and a device is active, a data panel appears at the top right of the graph listing
data about the conductor withstand and the protective device energy let-through at the
fault current (Pscc Min for the line conductor and Ief for the CPC) at which the adiabatic
check is carried out.
The background colour of the panel, which is normally green, is orange when the adiabatic
check is in a failed condition, that is, the energy let-through is in excess of the conductor
withstand.
Cable Withstand Data Calculations

In the ‘Overcurrent + Energy/Current’ graph view, the line conductor thermal withstand is
calculated and displayed for a range of current associated with fault durations of up to 20
seconds. The following example shows the characteristic of a 4 mm 2 thermoplastic
insulated copper cable:

9 Calculations Tab
The straight horizontal line starting at the point labelled 2 is the A2s adiabatic characteristic
for fault durations of 5 seconds and below. For adiabatic conditions it is assumed that, for
the relatively short duration of the fault current, no heat energy is lost to the surrounding
environment and that it is all absorbed by the conductor. This is calculated using:
A2s = k2S2
For the above example this is: 1152 x 42 = 2.116 x 105
The characteristic for fault durations between 5 and 20 seconds is plotted between points
1 and 2 using a non-adiabatic calculation. For relatively long fault durations, it is assumed
that a proportion of heat energy is dissipated to the surrounding environment reducing
the amount absorbed by the conductor. In the non-adiabatic calculation, a correction
factor is applied to the adiabatic value, the value of which depends on the type of
conductor and the fault duration.
In the above example, for a fault duration of 20 seconds, the non-adiabatic limiting current
is 144 A. The correction factor is 1.394, that is, the adiabatic limiting current for the same 20
second fault duration would be 144/1.394 = 103 A.
In the ‘Earth Fault + Energy/Current’ graph view, the earth conductor withstand includes
only the adiabatic characteristic for fault durations of 5 seconds or less. The adiabatic
calculation is the same as that used for the line conductor.

9 Calculations Tab
Cable Sizing
The cable sizing calculations verify for each circuit in the network that the selected cable is
adequately rated for the design current (Ib) of the circuit in which it is installed. In other
words, the cable is adequately rated to withstand the thermal effects of both continuous
normal loads and overload conditions up to the level at which the circuit protective device
is designed to operate. The effects of short-circuit faults are assessed in the Phase Fault
Calculations.
The correct cable size can be selected automatically or the designer can set a size, in which
case its suitability is assessed during the calculation process. Assessment of current rating
takes into account:
l the design current (Ib)
l the nominal current (In), (Ir ) of the circuit protective device (CPD)
l the cable type
l the installation methods used
l the number of cables in parallel
l the number of cables grouped together
l the ambient temperature
The calculations result in cables sized to adequately carry load currents in all parts of the
network. Where this is not possible, error messages will be displayed.
The Voltage Drop Calculations that follow the cable sizing calculations may result in further
increases in the sizes of some cables in a network where voltage drop problems are
encountered.
The cable sizing calculations follow the procedures described in BS7671:2018 Appendix 4,
and uses data from Tables 4A2, 4A3, 4B1, 4B2, 4B3, 4B4, 4C1, 4C2, 4C3, 4C4, 4C5 and 4C6
together with the cable current-carrying capacity tables, Tables 4D1Ato 4J4Ato determine
the correct cable sizes for the defined installed conditions.
The parts of Appendix 4 dealing with voltage drop (Section 6 and Tables 4D1B to 4J4B) are
considered in the section describing voltage drop calculations.
The software includes a number of cable types not listed in Appendix 4 (fire resistant types,
etc.). It also provides ratings for ground installation methods other than those included in
BS7671:2018.

9 Calculations Tab
Installed in Air
Cable Rating Data
BS7671:2018 lists the ratings of cables in Tables 4D1Ato 4J4A. For any cable type and size,
the rating given is the maximum continuous load current the cable can withstand without
exceeding the conductor operating temperature given at the head of the table (e.g.
thermoplastic insulated = 70 °C). The rating applies for the installation method indicated
and an ambient temperature of 30 °C. The ratings are valid for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz
operation.
When use is made of the comparatively higher current ratings provided by thermosetting
insulated cables, consideration must also be given to the higher associated operating
temperature (90 °C). The terminals of equipment connected by cables of this type must be
able to sustain the increased temperature. There is no way to check this in the software.
Similarly, where thermosetting and thermoplastic insulated cables are run together in a
group, the thermosetting cables should be run at a maximum operating temperature of 70
°C. A warning is given in the Grouping pane of the Cable dialog for this condition.
Among the cable types listed in the software, there are flexible variants of the cables
described in the BS7671:2018 tables: 4D1, 4D2, 4E1, 4E2. These are shown as ‘* Flexible’ and
have the same properties as their standard equivalent, except their data are multiplied by
the following factors, in compliance with BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 2.4:
l Current-carrying capacities: 0.95 (≤ 16 mm 2), 0.97 (>16 mm 2);
l Voltage drop resistances: 1.10 (≤ 16 mm 2), 1.06 (>16 mm 2).
Installation Methods
The majority of the installation methods defined in the Cable dialog correspond to the
Installation methods defined in BS7671:2018, Table 4A1. The full definition of the installation
method is defined by the user in the data boxes: Installation, Configuration, Distance and
Grouping, as applicable.
For the defined installation method, the calculations determine the appropriate Reference
method, which is then used to find the tabulated cable rating (It ) from the cable rating
tables, i.e., Table 4D1A, etc.
EXAMPLE– For the installation method selection shown below, the appropriate
Reference Method would be Cand the tabulated rating (It) would be found in column
7 of Table 4D1A; the voltage drop data from Table 4D1B, column 7.

9 Calculations Tab
The rating factor for grouping (Cg) would come from row 2 of Table 4C1 ‘Single layer on wall
or floor’, for five cables in a group the rating factor would be 0.73:
Rating Factors
As described above current ratings in BS7671:2018 tables relate to specific installation
methods at an ambient temperature of 30 °C. Any variations in installation conditions
(change in ambient temperature and/or grouping of cables, etc.) affecting the dissipation
of heat energy from the cable must be reflected in the application of rating factors to the
cable current-carrying capacity. For cables installed in air, the corrected current ratings for
these conditions are determined by the use of rating factors: Ca Ci, Cf , Ch and Cg, as
described below.
Ambient Temperature Rating Factor (Ca)

Ambient temperature is the temperature of the free air in the immediate vicinity of the
cable installation. For enclosed cables (e.g., conduit) it is the temperature of the air
surrounding the enclosure.
Tabulated ratings (Tables 4D1Ato 4J4A) in BS7671:2018 are based on an ambient
temperature of 30 °C. For a higher ambient temperature the cable rating will need to be
corrected downward to avoid the operating temperature of the cable exceeding its
maximum value. Conversely, when a cable is operated at lower temperatures, the cable

9 Calculations Tab
rating can be increased. For all ambient temperatures, the corrected current rating is the
maximum the cable can carry continuously without its temperature exceeding its
conductor operating temperature.
These corrections are made using the values for the ambient temperature rating factor
(Ca) given in BS7671:2018, Table 4B1.
Thermal Insulation Factor (Ci )

Where a cable is to be totally surrounded by thermal insulating material over a length of
more than 0.5 m, a rating factor (Ci) of 0.5 is to be applied. For shorter distances the value of
the rating factor is given in Table 52.2 of BS7671:2018. In the software, select the Run
through thermal insulation installation method.
Semi-enclosed Fuse BS3036 Factor (Cf )

Where a circuit is protected by a fuse type to BS3036, because of its inferior overload
protection characteristic, a factor Cf of 0.725 is to be applied when sizing the cable for the
circuit.
Harmonic Rating Factor (Ch)

Harmonic currents can cause an increased level of temperature rise in conductors. Where
the load current in a circuit includes a substantial proportion of harmonics, a rating factor
should be applied to prevent the cable overheating.
In the software, a rating factor Ch is applied for levels of 3rd harmonic current above 15 %.
In each Load dialog there is an input for the harmonic current level.
For more information, see the section: Calculations / Harmonics.
Grouping Rating Factor (Cg)

Where cable are bunched or grouped together, dissipation of the heat generated by load
currents to the surrounding air is impaired. Consequently, current ratings for grouped
cables need to be corrected downwards. These corrections are made using the values
given in BS7671:2018, Tables 4C1, 4C4, 4C5, 4C6 for the Grouping Rating Factor (Cg).
Grouping Arrangements: Touching/Spaced

For non-enclosed installation methods, there are two sets of factors depending on
whether the cables are touching (Fig.1a) or spaced (Fig.1b). ‘Spaced’ here means spaced at
least one cable diameter apart, but not more than two.

9 Calculations Tab
For example, for multicore cables installed on perforated cable tray (Installation Method
31), the Arrangement ‘Horizontal, touching’ in the Grouping pane of the Cable dialog
corresponds to Fig. 1a above (Cg = 0.82 from Table 4C4); ‘Horizontal, spaced’ to Fig. 1b (Cg =
0.98 from Table 4C4).
Total circuits in group

Care should be taken to make appropriate inputs to ‘Total number of grouped circuits’ to
avoid excessive derating of cables at one extreme and over-optimistic assumptions at the
other.
Rating factors are for multiples of either circuits of single-core cables or multi-core cables.
This means that where, for example, a three-phase and neutral circuit is wired in single-
core cables, all four of the cables employed counts as one item for grouping purposes
(Fig.2); Total number of grouped circuits – unchecked.

9 Calculations Tab
Where a cable is spaced horizontally more than two cable diameters from the rest of the
cables in the group it can be disregarded for the purposes of grouping (Note 2, Table 4C1),
e.g., for the condition shown in Fig. 3, the Total number of grouped circuits should be set to
2.
If a grouped cable is expected to carry not more than 30% of its grouped rating, it can be
disregarded for the purposes of grouping (Note 9, Table 4C1). Because there is no facility in
the software to identify the individual cables in a group, it is not able to apply this rule.
Therefore, you should assess whether there are cables that can be ignored on this basis.
Cables in parallel
The cabling of a ring socket circuit constitutes one circuit only and should not be defined as
having two parallel cables.
Cables in a circuit are considered to be paralleled where:
l more than one single-core cable is used in each phase;
l more than one multi-core cable is used.

9 Calculations Tab
When parallel cables are set in the software, grouping is automatically applied. This is done
by automatically setting Total number of grouped circuits = Cables in Parallel. Although, the
paralleled cables are part of the same circuit, if they are grouped together, they should be
derated in the same way as similar cables in separate circuits.
If you want to define the parallel cables as being installed with spacing >2 dia., Total
number of grouped circuits check box can be cleared to remove the grouping previously
applied.

9 Calculations Tab
Where circuits with parallel cables are grouped together, care needs to be taken to ensure
that grouping is correctly applied. For example, two grouped circuits, each with two parallel
cables:
Determination of required cable size

The derating parameters discussed above are used to determine the minimum suitable
size of cable for the design current (Ib) for a circuit, taking into account any installation
conditions affecting the cable rating.
The continuous current-carrying capacity of a cable (Iz) is the actual required minimum
capacity taking into account all relevant rating factors, i.e.:
Iz = [In / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
(Ca, ambient rating factor; Cg, grouping rating factor; Ci, rating factor for installation in
insulation material; Cf , rating factor for BS3036 fuse; Ch, rating factor for harmonic current)
The general rule for cable sizing is:
It ≥ [In / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
Therefore, the following rule ensures that the selected cable is suitably rated:
It ≥ Iz
For adjustable circuit protective devices:
Iz ≥ [Ir / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)] (Ir is the adjusted rating of the CPD)
For motor circuits:
Iz ≥ [Ib / (Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch)]

9 Calculations Tab
Simultaneous Overload
The software allows rating for grouping assuming the grouped cables are either ‘Subject to
simultaneous overload’ or ‘Not Subject to simultaneous overload’ (BS7671:2018, Appendix
4. 5.1.2):
Subject to simultaneous overload

It ≥ [In / Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch] --------- (Appendix 4. 5.1.2 Equation (2))
Not Subject to simultaneous overload

It ≥ [Ib / Ca x Cg x Ci x Cf x Ch] --------- (Appendix 4. 5.1.2 Equation (3))
It ≥ (1 / Ca x Ci)√{(In/Cf )2 + 0.48 Ib2 [(1 – Cg2)/ Cg2]} ---------(Appendix 4. 5.1.2 Equation (4))
Installed in Ground
BS7671:2018 Methods
Installation Methods 70 and 71 describe multi-core and single-core cables installed in cable
ducting in the ground. Installation Methods 72 and 73 describe multi-core cables installed
direct in the ground, with or without added mechanical protection. For all of these
methods, a rating factor Cc of 0.9 is applied for cable sizing.
The current-carrying capacities given in the tables are based on the following conditions,
and modified by the rating factors described:
l Ground temperature of 20 °C. For other ground temperatures, the value of the rating
factor Ca is given in Table 4B2.
l Soil thermal resistivity of 2.5 K.m/W. Table 4B3 gives the value of the rating factor Cs for
other resistivities.
l Buried depths of 0.7 m. Table 4B4 gives the values of the rating factor Cd for other
depths.
Tables 4C2 and 4C3 give the value of the rating factor Cg for groups of cables.
General Methods
Cable sizing for ground installation methods (‘Buried direct in ground’ or ‘In underground
single-way ducts’), although similar in principle to the sizing for air installation methods
described above, uses different parameters. Also, the calculation for ‘Not Subject to
simultaneous’ overload does not apply.
The installation methods and ratings used are as described in the publication BICCCables
‘Fixed Power, Control and Wiring Cables’ Publication No. ECF3-91.

9 Calculations Tab
The correction factors used are listed below. The values in square brackets describe the
conditions for which no derating is required:
Ca = rating factor for Ground Temperature (°C); [Ca = 1 @15 °C]
Cd = rating factor for Depth of Lay (m); [Cd = 1 @0.5 m]
Cs = rating factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity (K.m/W); [Cs = 1.2 K.m/W]
Cg = rating factor for grouped cables.
For both of the above sets of buried methods, the minimum cable capacity (Iz) for a given
cable type and installation condition is obtained by dividing the product of all the factors
into the nominal rating of the circuit protective device, thus:
Iz = In/(Ca x Cd x Cs x Cg x Ch) [Ch, derating factor for harmonic current]
Cable selection is made using:
It ≥ Iz
Motor Circuits
In motor circuits there are some important differences in the cable sizing calculations as
compared to non-motor circuits.
Motor Overload Setting at Starter

The motor overload setting (see Motor Loads) is used to determine the cable sizing for a
motor circuit.
For a non-motor load the required rating (Iz) for the cable is found by dividing the nominal
rating (In) of the device by any rating factors applicable: Iz = In/factors. In the case of an
adjustable overload, the overload setting (Ir) is used, i.e., Iz = Ir /factors.
For a motor circuit, the motor overload provides protection for both the motor and the
circuit cables, therefore the motor overload setting (Irm ) is used to determine Iz, i.e., Iz =
Irm /factors.
Circuit with no Motor Overload

Where a motor circuit has no motor overload, the circuit protective device provides
overload protection for both the motor and the cables. Therefore, cable sizing will be the
same as for a non-motor load.
Protective Device Motor Rating

A protective device, when used with a motor load, will generally require an increased rating
to avoid inadvertent operation caused by the high levels of transient current that occur
during the motor starting cycle. have a lower rating than when used for a non-motor load.

9 Calculations Tab
Consequently, protective devices tend to have lower ratings when used for motor
protection rather than non-motor loads.
The motor ratings given are based on manufacturers’ data and take into account the
selected method of motor starting.
In a motor circuit, the motor rating is shown in the Circuit Protection pane in both the
Motor Starter and Cable dialogs:
Short-circuit Protection
As described in Motor Overload Setting at Starter, the motor overload will provide
overload protection for the cables in a motor circuit. At the same time a check is made to
ensure that the circuit protective device will adequately protect the cable from damage
under short-circuit conditions. This check is made for all circuits but is particularly
important in motor circuits where the protective device rating may be increased to deal
with the motor starting inrush current.
Star Delta Started Motors

Six conductors are required for Star Delta started motors to connect the motor windings
to the starter:
l Multicore cable: 2 × 3c
l Single-core cable: 6 × 1c
These conductors are sized for the motor design current divided by √3 (the delta current).
Since these conductors are normally installed in a group, grouped circuits will be set in the
Grouping pane for the cable connected to the motor resulting in the application of an
appropriate group rating factor Cg:
If it is intended that the cables will be installed spaced apart, the Grouping check box can
be cleared resulting in a group rating factor of 1.

9 Calculations Tab
EXAMPLE– The following example shows the calculation for sizing the cables between
the starter and motor for a star/delta started motor:
Cable: Single-core, 70°Cthermoplastic non-arm Cu Table 4D1; Size = Auto;
Installation: 20 – Clipped direct on a wooden/masonry wall (Ref. Method = C); Flat
Touching.
Grouping: 2.
Load: Motor, Star Delta started, three phase; Ib = 38.45 A, PF= 0.89
Required rating Iz = Ib/(√3 x Cg) = 38.45/(√3 x 0.85) = 26.12 A
Selected Cable size: 4 mm 2 (Cable tabulated rating It ≥ required rating Iz; 33 A ≥ 26.12)
User Defined Rating

The User defined installation method is available for all cable types. When selected, it
replaces all derating factors (except Ch, the derating factor for harmonic current) with the
value that you enter:
The minimum cable capacity (Iz) is then calculated thus:

Iz = In/(Cu x Ch) [Cu, user defined derating factor]
The cable size is then selected using the tabulated current-carrying capacity for Reference
Method E(multicore) or Method F(single-core).

9 Calculations Tab
Busbar Sizing
The general principles for sizing busbars are similar to those for cables (see Cable Sizing),
but the details are significantly different. Generally, there are no installation methods for
busbars as the busbar casing provides a standardised environment for the conductors.
Also, there is no requirement for assessing ratings for parallel and grouped conductors.
Busbar Data
There is no busbar data in BS7671:2018 . The ProDesign software uses data from the
relevant manufacturer for each of the busbar types listed in the Busbar Details dialog.
Busbar Ratings
A busbar size is given as an actual rating in amperes rather than as a section in mm 2. The
section of the busbar conductors, although not stated, is stored in the ProDesign
database and used for such purposes as voltage drop and fault calculations.
Derating Factors
Unlike cables, not all busbars are rated for an ambient temperature of 30 °C. A number of
busbar types are fully rated at 35 °Cor 40 °C. Consequently, it is not unusual to see an
ambient derating factor of, for example, 1.02 for a busbar operating in an ambient
temperature of 30 °C.
Because a busbar includes its own enclosure, the current rating given by the manufacturer
does not need to be modified for different installation conditions. An exception is that
some busbars have a different rating according to the whether they are installed in a
horizontal or vertical run. An example of a busbar installed vertically would be a riser
between floors in a building. In the Details pane of the Busbar Settings dialog, you should
set which installation method, either Vertical or Horizontal.
Diversity at Tap Off

At each Tap Off there is a diversity setting that multiplies the load connected to that Tap Off
to give the diversified value of that load.
EXAMPLE–

9 Calculations Tab
Sizing Calculations
The circuit protective device (CPD) rating In (or Ir for an adjustable device) must be equal to
or greater than the design current Ib, i.e., In ≥ Ib or Ir ≥ Ib.
For a busbar, the CPD used for sizing will be the nearest one on the supply side of the
busbar under consideration, usually the CPD for the cable feeding the busbar.
The required busbar current rating Iz must be greater than or equal to the circuit
protective device rating divided by the temperature, harmonic current and installation
correction factors:
Iz ≥ (In / Ca x Ch x installation correction factor)
The tabulated busbar current rating It must be equal to or greater than Iz: It ≥ Iz.

9 Calculations Tab
Voltage Drop Requirements

The voltage drop calculations in the software are designed to comply with the
requirements of BS7671:2018 and PD CLC/TR50480:2011 13.1 to 13.2. The three relevant
areas are:
l 525 – General rules for voltage drop in consumers’ installations.
l Appendix 4, Section 6 – Describes calculation methods used to determine the voltage
drop in a cable using resistances and reactances from Tables 4D1B to 4J4B.
l Appendix 4, 6.4 – Voltage drop limits between the origin of the installation (supply
terminals) and various load types.
Voltage Drop Calculations

The voltage drop across the cables in each circuit in a project are calculated in the software
according to the methods described in Appendix 4, Section 6.
The voltage drop values shown in reports for three-phase, three-phase and neutral, and
single-phase circuits, are the phase to neutral voltage drops. In the case of three-phase
and neutral circuits, the neutral current is determined by adding the complex phase
currents, which for a balanced load condition (the same load current in each phase) will be
zero. The voltage drop in each phase is then found by adding the complex sum of the
phase and the neutral voltage drops.
The impedance data used for the voltage drop calculations is taken from Tables 4D1B to
4L4B for the cable types listed in BS7671:2018. For other types and for busbars,
manufacturer’s data is used. The data used is the complex impedance (resistance and
reactance) for the relevant type of circuit. For three-phase and three-phase and neutral
circuits the tabulated values are divided by root √3 to obtain per conductor impedances.
The calculations are corrected for load power factor and operating temperature using the
methods described in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, Section 6.2.
The generalised formulae for the calculations are:
Single-phase circuits:
Vd1ph = {L x A x [Ct x cos Ø (r 1ph) + sin Ø (x1ph)]} / 1000
Three-phase circuits:
Vd1ph = {L x A x [Ct x cos Ø (r 3ph/√3) + sin Ø (x3ph/√3)]} / 1000
where:
Vd1ph = phase to neutral voltage drop.
L = the total circuit length.
A = the design current Ib.

9 Calculations Tab
cos Ø = the load power factor.

sin Ø = sin (cos-1 Ø).
r 1ph, x1ph = the tabulated conductor resistance/reactance for single-phase circuits
(mV/A/m).
r 3ph, x3ph = the tabulated conductor resistance/reactance for three-phase circuits
(mV/A/m).
Ct = temperature correction factor, where:
Ct = {230 + t p – [Ca2Cg2 – (Ib2/It 2)](t p – 30)}/(230 + t p)
and: t p = maximum normal operating temperature; Ca = ambient derating factor; Cg =

grouping factor; Ib = design current; It = conductor tabulated rating.
Voltage Drop Limits

The software provides two methods for setting voltage drop limits. These are set globally
for the whole project in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog (Preferences / Calculation /
Voltage Drop or click Voltage Drop Settings in the source dialog).
The default setting ensures that the voltage drop up to and including each final circuit is
limited to the values given in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 6.4 (compliance as described in
525.3):
Voltage Drop Limits to BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 6.4 Lighting Other Uses
Public Supply 3% 5%
Private Supply 6% 8%
Alternatively, a user-defined setting can be selected allowing you to set a voltage drop limit
to all final circuits (compliance as described in 525.1, 525.203).
In addition to the global limits, the Load and Motor dialogs contain a Voltage Drop pane
that can be used to set a specific limit for each individual load.
The voltage drop limits given in Appendix 4, 6.4 are between final circuits and the ‘origin of
the installation (usually the supply terminals). Therefore, if the source of the network in
ProDesign MEis not the ‘origin of the installation’ then the limits given will not necessarily
be appropriate. In other words, if there is a supply cable connected to the ‘origin of the
installation’ which is not included in the ProDesign MEmodel, allowance needs to be made
for the voltage dropped in that cable when setting limits. Also, it should be noted that
misunderstandings can and do arise between contractors and clients on what constitutes
the ‘origin of supply’ for a particular installation.
MEversion: The default setting for the Voltage Drop limit is 4 %, User Defined.

9 Calculations Tab
Compliance With Voltage Drop Limits

By default, the Phase Conductor Sizing setting in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog is set to
Auto size for current-carrying capacity and voltage drop limits. Where conductor sizes are
set to Auto, their sizes will firstly be set to comply with the current-carrying capacity
requirements and secondly sizes, where necessary, will be adjusted upwards to deal with
voltage drop requirements, as described below.
If the setting is changed to Auto size for current-carrying capacity only, sizing for voltage
drop will not be carried out. The voltage drop calculations will still be performed and any
non-compliances will be indicated by error messages.
Where cable sizes or busbar ratings are set to Auto, the voltage drop routine may result in
an increase in the size of cables (rating of busbars) above the sizes set for current-carrying
capacity. If low voltage drop limits are set, or if the network involves long circuit lengths,
considerable upsizing may take place. For each circuit where upsizing occurs to satisfy
voltage drop limits, a note is displayed in the Errors and Warnings dialog.
Where the software is not able to meet the voltage drop limits set, an error message is
generated indicating the load where the voltage drop is excessive. Errors may occur
where:
l Phase Conductor Sizing in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog is set to the Auto size for
current-carrying capacity only option.
l The largest cable size for the type selected does not meet the voltage drop
requirement.
l For a final circuit cable, the ‘Limit maximum cable size to’ control has been set to a cable
size that does not meet the voltage drop requirement.
Identifying branches to final circuits

Each load is located at the end of a branch extending back to the source.
The branches for the loads shown below include the following:
l Load 1: Cable 4 + Cable 3 + Cable 2 + Cable 1.
l Load 2: Cable 7 + Cable 2 + Cable 1.

9 Calculations Tab
Initial voltage drop allocation

For each of the branches in the network an initial voltage drop limit is allocated to each
circuit. The allocation for each circuit will be a percentage of the voltage drop limit for the
load at the end of the branch. The calculation setting the allocated voltage drop for each
individual circuit takes into account the conductor cross-section, its length, and the load
current flowing through it. The sum of the individual allocations in a branch equals the
voltage drop limit for the load at the end of the branch.
Voltage drop assessment

Taking each of the branches in turn, the voltage drop in each circuit is calculated, using the
sizes determined by the cable and busbar sizing routines for current-carrying capacity (see
Cable Sizing and Busbar Sizing). For each circuit, the actual voltage drop is calculated and
then compared to the allocation for that circuit. If the actual voltage drop is equal to or less
than the allocation, the cable size remains as previously calculated.
If the actual voltage drop in a conductor is greater than its allocation, it will be increased
one size and the check repeated. This process continues until all allocations are satisfied
or, in cases where the largest available conductor size does not meet the allocation, an
error message is displayed.

9 Calculations Tab
Voltage Drop Reserve at Distribution Boards

For distribution boards (and switchboards and consumer units), where the Load Diversity
Method is set to Define Load, a Voltage Drop Reserve setting is enabled.
The Define Load setting is intended to be used when there are no details for the loads to
be connected to the board. Enter an estimate of the level of load that will be connected to
the board. At the same time, the Voltage Drop Reserve field should be set to an estimate of
the level of voltage drop that will occur across any of the final circuits to be eventually
connected to the board.
User intervention
The process described above should produce an acceptable solution but you may wish to
optimise the design by adjusting the finalised cable sizes while remaining within the setting
limits.
EXAMPLE– For example, in Fig. 6, the resizing routine may have resulted in Cable 1
being increased in size to meet a voltage drop problem in branch: Cable 1/Cable
5/Cable 8/Cable 10. You may prefer a solution that increases the size of Cable 5 and

9 Calculations Tab
leaves Cable 1 unchanged. This can be done by fixing Cable 5 at the increased size
required and re-calculating. The size of Cables 1 should then return to the size set by
the cable sizing routine for current-carrying capacity. Alternatively, Cable 1 can be
fixed at the required size leading to the resizing of Cables 5 and 8 to fit within smaller
allocations.
If the sizes of all the conductors in a branch are fixed, then the ProDesign MEsoftware can
no longer resize them and you have manual control of the voltage drop.
A Limit maximum cable size to setting in the Load/Motor dialog allows a limit to be set to
cable upsizing. This can be used for purposes such as the prevention of the selection of a
size too large to connect to the load terminals.
Radial Lighting Circuits

Where the load description for the circuit is Lighting Radial Circuit, the voltage drop
calculation takes account of the fact that the loads are distributed along the length of the
circuit instead of being concentrated at the extreme end. This gives a lower and more
realistic level of voltage drop for lighting loads.
The following figure shows the layout for a circuit with a conventional load. The voltage
drop is the simple product of the circuit impedance and the design current.
The following figure shows a radial lighting circuit. The voltage drop will be the sum of the
voltage drops Vd1, Vd2, Vd3, Vd4, Vd5.
A completely accurate assessment would require the load currents for each individual
luminaire and the distances between them. In the software, a good approximation is
obtained by the following method:
l The length to the first fitting. The standard calculation is applied to this length.
Vd1ph = { Ct x L x A x [cos ∅ (r 1ph) + sin ∅ (x1ph)]} / 1000

9 Calculations Tab
l The remaining circuit length. The standard calculation is used and the result divided by
2.
Vd1ph = { Ct x L x A x [cos ∅ (r 1ph) + sin ∅ (x1ph)]} / (1000 x 2)
The reported voltage drop is the sum of the results from the two above calculations.
This calculation is not used for street lighting circuits. The full details of all conductor
lengths and luminaire loadings are provided by the user and full voltage drop detail is
reported.
Motor Starting Voltage Drop

525.102 describes the need to check that the voltage drop associated with motor starting
inrush currents do not cause the voltage at the terminals of other loads to fall to
unacceptable levels.
When the Assess Voltage Drop on Starting check box is selected in the dialog for a motor
circuit, the voltage drop associated with the increased level of motor current during
starting is calculated.
Typical values for the starting current and power factor are inserted into the data boxes in
the dialog. These can be overwritten with other values, if required.
The Assess Voltage Drop on Starting check box can be selected for any number of motors,
so that the impact of a group starting simultaneously can be seen across the distribution
network.
In the Motor Starting Voltage Drop report (Reports / Motor Starting Voltage Drop), the
voltage drop during motor starting is shown for the selected motor circuits and any sub-
mains between those circuits and the supply source.

9 Calculations Tab
Phase Fault Calculations

The phase fault calculations cover three areas:
l Phase fault currents
l Circuit Protective Device (CPD) breaking capacity
l Adiabatic check protection of line conductors
Calculation Method
To find the value of prospective fault (Ipf ) current at any point in the network, a sum is made
of the impedances in the network between the Source of Supply (including the source
impedance) and the point at which the fault is assumed to occur, i.e., the path through
which the fault current will flow. The summed impedance (Z) is then divided into the
nominal applied voltage (Uo) to find the fault current (If ):
Fault Current Ipf = Uo/Z
The impedance Z is the complex impedance, i.e., Z = r + jx.
The value of applied voltage (Uo) will depend on the voltage at the Source of Supply and the
type of fault current being calculated. For example, if the voltage at the Source of Supply is
defined as 400 V/230 Vand the fault being calculated is line to neutral, the applied voltage
will be 400V/√3.
Two fault currents, maximum and minimum, are calculated at all points in the network.
Maximum Fault Current

The calculation is for the fault configuration that gives the highest possible prospective
fault current. For example, for a three-phase and neutral circuit, a symmetrical fault (all
three phases shorted) would give the highest current. The calculation also uses circuit
resistances measured at 20 °C(lowest resistance, highest fault current).
The formulae used to calculate the maximum fault current are:
Three-phase and three-phase and neutral circuit:
Max. fault current = 3ph symmetrical fault current (Isym )
Isym = Uo / (Ze + Z1)
Single-phase circuit:
Max. fault current = Phase to neutral fault current (Iph-n)
Iph-n = Uo / (Ze + Z1 + Zn)
where:Ze = external phase impedance;Z1 = line conductor impedance @20ºC;
Uo = phase to neutral voltage;Zn = neutral impedance @20ºC.

9 Calculations Tab
For a single-phase circuit in a three-phase distribution system, the external phase

impedance Ze is the sum of the Phase and Neutral impedances @20 ºCof all upstream
conductors in the route back to Source plus the Source impedance.
Minimum Fault Current

The calculation is for the fault configuration that gives the lowest possible prospective fault
current. For example, for a three-phase and neutral circuit, a phase-neutral fault would
give the lowest current. The calculation also uses circuit resistances at full load operating
temperature.
The formulae used to calculate the minimum fault current are:
Three-phase and neutral circuit:
Iph-n = Uo / (Ze + Z1> + Zn>)
Three-phase circuit:
Iph-ph = UL / 2(Ze + Z1>)
Single-phase circuit:
Iph-n = Uo / (Ze + Z1> + Zn>)
where: UL = line (phase to phase) voltage;
Uo = phase to neutral voltage; Ze = external phase impedance
Z1> = line conductor impedance at full load operating temperature
Zn> = neutral conductor impedance at full load operating temperature
In general, the fault calculation routine in the software follows the above methodology. The
difference is in the way that the software evaluates and stores the impedances. The
software evaluates all of the phase and neutral conductor impedances at 20 ºCand
operating temperature. The impedances are then stored in a matrix. For the Phase fault
calculations, four matrices are created:
1. Phase 20 ºC.
2. Phase&Neutral 20 ºC.
3. Phase Operating temperature.
4. Phase&Neutral Operating temperature.
The software gets the relevant impedances from the appropriate matrices when
performing the fault calculations. For more information, see the Model Calculation
document, Section 5:Phase Fault, which is available from the Help menu:

9 Calculations Tab
Breaking Capacity Check

The breaking capacity of every circuit protective device (CPD) in a network is checked
against the prospective fault current conditions at the point at which the device is installed.
If the breaking capacity of any CPD is less than the maximum prospective fault current, an
error message appears.
The fault current could be caused by either a phase fault or an earth fault condition.
Fully Rated CPDs

It is generally a requirement to ensure that the breaking capacity of each Circuit Protective
Device (CPD) is equal to or greater than the maximum prospective fault current at the point
of installation (434.5.1). The software carries out a check on the breaking capacity of each
CPD.
The Breaking Capacity (also known as interrupting capacity) of a CPD, is the maximum level
of fault current that the device can safely interrupt. If the device is expected to interrupt a
fault current greater than its declared breaking capacity, it will not be suitable for that duty.
The breaking capacity (Icu) data used by the software is taken from manufacturer’s data at
nominal U = 400 V.

9 Calculations Tab
Circuit-breakers have two breaking capacities: Icu and Ics. In contrast to circuit-breakers,
fuses generally have a single breaking capacity.
Breaking Capacity Definitions

Icu / Icn
Icu is defined as the ‘Ultimate Breaking Capacity’ of a circuit-breaker (Icn is the ‘Normal
Breaking Capacity of an MCB, with the same meaning as Icu). This is the maximum level of
fault current that the circuit-breaker can safely interrupt. Therefore, Icu (or Icn - as
applicable) has to be equal to or greater than the maximum prospective fault current at
the point of installation.
Ics
Ics is defined as the ‘Service Breaking Capacity’ of a circuit-breaker and is the maximum level
of fault current that the circuit-breaker can interrupt, subject to more stringent
requirements than those applicable to Icu. The requirement for Icu is simply to safely
interrupt the fault current and it is acceptable that, having done this, the circuit-breaker
may well be no longer serviceable. For Ics, the circuit-breaker must be able to perform a
further close/open operation under fault conditions.
For some circuit-breakers, the Ics rating may be lower than the Icu rating (as low as 50 %).
For larger circuit-breakers the two ratings are often the same.
The standard, BSEN60947-2, recommends that any circuit-breaker should be selected and
installed such that its Ics rating is equal to or greater than the maximum prospective fault
current at the load end of the circuit in which it is installed. This is a recommendation not a
requirement. Ics and its application, is not mentioned in BS7671:2018 . Where this
recommended condition is not met, a warning message appears.
Breaking Capacity for Fully Rated CPDs
For each circuit where the CPD has been set to Fully Rated (see Protection pane of the
Cable dialog), its ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) is checked against the calculated maximum
fault current at the source end of the circuit.
Back-up Protection CPDs
Generally it is a requirement that the breaking capacity of each Circuit Protective Device
(CPD) should be equal to or greater than the maximum prospective fault current at the
point of installation (434.5.1). Alternatively, it is permissible to select a protective device on
the basis of a Back-up Protection (otherwise known as Series Rating or Back-up Rating).
Back-up Protections are listed in manufacturer’s tables showing combinations of two
devices, one upstream (nearest to the supply) and one downstream (furthest from the
supply). For each combination, a maximum fault capacity is given which is the maximum
prospective fault permissible at the point of installation of the downstream device. This will

9 Calculations Tab
be higher, sometimes much higher, than the breaking capacity (Icu) of that device. This is
made possible by the energy limiting performance of the upstream device which ensures
that the downstream device will never be expected to interrupt a level of fault current
beyond its breaking capacity.
The Cascaded Rating applies to the downstream device, the upstream CPD has to be
selected according to the rules for Fully Rated devices.
Back-up Protection is only valid for published combinations of protective devices and
should only be used up to the maximum ratings by given manufacturers.
Breaking Capacity for Back-up Protection CPDs
You can only select Back-up Protection, (Protection tab of the Cable dialog) where a valid
cascade breaking capacity is available for a combination of the CPD type under
consideration and the CPD used in the upstream circuit.
For each circuit where you have indicated that the CPD should be Back-up Protection, the
following checks are made:
l The Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu) is checked against the calculated maximum fault
current at the source end of the circuit. If the Icu is less than the fault current, the CPD
Back-up Protection is then checked.
l The Cascaded Breaking Capacity is checked against the calculated maximum fault
current at the source end of the circuit.
Line Conductor Adiabatic Check

Purpose of Calculation
The calculation is used to check that the energy let-through of the CPD does not cause the
temperature of the line conductors in a circuit to exceed their maximum admissible limiting
temperature (e.g., for thermosetting insulated cables this would be 250 °C) under fault
conditions.
The fault current could be caused by either a phase fault or an earth fault condition. The
software calculates all possible conditions and checks whether or not the heat energy (I2t)
flowing during the time taken to disconnect exceeds the conductor withstand (k2S2).
Description of Calculation
The calculation determines the time it would take for the conductor temperature to rise
from the highest permissible temperature in normal load conditions to the maximum
admissible limiting temperature. Providing the CPD disconnects within this time, the circuit
is considered to be adequately protected (434.5.2). The formula used is:
t = (k2 S2) / I2
where:

9 Calculations Tab
t = the maximum permissible disconnection time.

k = a factor for the type of conductor being used. The value of k reflects the behaviour of
the conductor under thermal conditions.
S= the section of the conductor in mm 2.
I = the fault current in amperes.

Where the disconnection time is less than 0.1 s, the energy let-through (I2t) of the CPD has
to be less than the value of the cable withstand (k2 S2), i.e.:
I2t < k2 S2
Data for the calculation is obtained as follows:

l For disconnection times greater than 0.1 s, the protective device actual disconnection
time is taken from the maximum tolerance of its operating characteristic at the
calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph View with settings: Overcurrent
+ Time/Current (see also Graph View).
l For disconnection times less than 0.1 s, the energy let-through is taken from the device
I2t characteristic at the calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph View
with settings: Overcurrent + Energy/Current (see also Graph View).
Busbar Fault Rating

The fault rating of busbars are checked in two ways:
l Short time withstand. The busbar has to thermally withstand a level of rms through
fault current for a stated period, e.g. 25 kA rms/1 sec.
l Peak withstand. The busbar has to be able to withstand the mechanical stresses
associated with the peak value of fault current.
Short time withstand

This is a check to ensure that the busbar conductors do not become excessively heated by
the fault current, i.e., that a maximum value of heat energy A2s is not exceeded.
The load end minimum phase fault current (IFLMin) is found for the first section of busbar
(the one nearest the supply) in the relevant busbar system (for a centre-fed busbar, using
the highest of the fault currents for the two sections nearest the supply). Using this fault
current, the disconnection time is found from the CPD database, and this is then used to
find the I2t on the supply side of the busbar system, as follows:
l Disconnection time less than 0.1 s: I2t is the energy let-through in A2s from the CPD
database for the fault current (IFLMin);
l Disconnection time greater than 0.1 s: I2t is (IFLMin)2 x disconnection time.

9 Calculations Tab
The following check is then made:

Irms2 x t rms ≥ I2t
where: Irms, t rms are the busbar short time withstand current and time.
Where a busbar fails the check an error message will be displayed.
Peak withstand
The busbar has to withstand the stresses associated with the maximum peak value of the
maximum prospective fault current. This peak value (Ipk) occurs in the first half-cycle of fault
current and is calculated as follows:
where:
Ifault(max) is the maximum rms fault current at the load end of the first section of busbar
(the one nearest the supply) in the relevant busbar system.
The following check is then made:
Ipk ≥ Ifaultpk
where: Ipk is the busbar peak fault current withstand.
Where a busbar fails the check an error message will be displayed.

9 Calculations Tab
Earth Fault Calculations

The earth fault calculations cover four areas:
l Impedance calculations
l Automatic disconnection check
l Additional protection (by RCD) check
l Circuit protective conductors (CPCs) adiabatic check
Purpose of Earth Fault Calculations

Chapter 41 of BS7671:2018 is entirely devoted to requirements for Protection Against Electric
Shock. The chapter describes measures for protection against shock using both Basic
Protection (insulation, barriers, and so forth) and Fault Protection (Automatic
Disconnection of Supply and Additional Protection).
Basic protection measures are outside the scope of the software, being mechanical in
nature – obstacles, insulation etc. The only exception to this is the use of RCDs additional to
the basic protection. RCDs used for this purpose must have a sensitivity (IΔn) of 30 mA and
operate within 40 ms at 150 mA (415.1.1). You can specify a 30 mA RCD in any circuit but the
software does not carry out any checks related to the use of RCDs for the purpose of
protection additional to the basic protection. However, where an RCD is used, the software
will check automatic disconnection of supply using the RCD tripping characteristic.
The purpose of the earth fault calculations in the software is to check in every circuit in a
network that shock protection is provided by automatic disconnection of supply within the
times given in Table 41.1.
The software is not suitable for the design of IT systems (systems having a source with no
earth connection or a high impedance earth connection) and therefore does not comply
with (411.6).
Earth Fault Current

To find the value of earth fault current at any point in a network, a sum is made of the earth
fault impedances in the network between the Source of Supply (including the source
impedance) and the point at which the earth fault is assumed to occur, i.e., the path
through which the earth fault current will flow. The summed earth fault impedance (Zs) is
then divided into the nominal phase to earth voltage (Uo) to find the fault current (Ief ). BS
7671:2018 introduces the use of Cmin for earth fault calculations in accordance with PD
CLC/TR50480:2011 and IEC60909.
Cmin is the voltage constant used for the calculation of minimum fault levels. At LV
(<1000Vac) Cmin takes the value of 0.95.
Earth Fault Current Ief = (Cmin x Uo) / Zs

9 Calculations Tab
When performing earth fault calculations all conductor resistances are calculated at full
load temperature.
The value of the nominal voltage (Uo) is taken from the Single Phase Voltage setting in the
Source dialog.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance

For each circuit in any network, the total earth fault impedance, known as the earth fault
loop impedance (Zs), is calculated using:
Zs = Ze + Z1 + Z2
where:
Ze = external earth impedance
Z1 = line conductor impedance
Z2 = circuit protective conductor (CPC) impedance
Fig. 1 shows the path of an earth fault in a TN-C-Ssystem and the impedances through
which the fault current flows. The source impedance Ze comprises both the line
impedance (Z0) and the impedance of the PEN conductor (ZPEN). Z0 will include the
transformer phase winding and the external line conductor cable.
For a network connected directly to a transformer, Ze would be the transformer phase
winding only.
For a circuit directly connected to the source of supply, Ze is taken from the data that you
enter into the source dialog.
For other circuits, Ze is the earth fault loop impedance Zs for the previous circuit, i.e., the
circuit on the supply side of the circuit under consideration.

9 Calculations Tab
Earth Fault Disconnection

For each circuit it is necessary to verify, using the calculated value of Earth Fault Loop
Impedance Zs, that the CPD will disconnect within a specified time under earth fault
conditions (411.4.5, 411.5.4, Table 41.1).
This is checked using:
Zs ≤ (Cmin x Uo) / Ia or (Zs x Ia) ≤ (Cmin x Uo)
where:
Zs = earth fault loop impedance
Uo = nominal voltage line to earth
Cmin = voltage constant for minimum fault level calculation at LV(0.95)
Ia = earth fault current causing operation of the circuit protective device (CPD) within a
specified time
Generally, Ia is the current causing operation of the CPD but where an RCD is used this is
replaced by the RCD sensitivity IΔ n.
The specified times for disconnection at Uo = 230 Vare:
l 5 s (TN) and 1 s (TT) for sub-main circuits and final circuits > 32 A
l 0.4 s (TN) and 0.2 s (TT) for final circuits ≤ 32 A
See Table 41.1 for disconnection times for other voltages.
The software automatically selects the appropriate disconnection time according to the
circuit type for the circuit under consideration. Additionally, you can set shorter times for
final circuits.
Earthing Arrangements
In addition to the earthing connection defined at the active supply source, it is also
possible to define a local earth connection at a board (switchboard, distribution board,
consumer unit). How a board is earthed is defined in the Earthing pane.

9 Calculations Tab
The default condition is for the Earthing Arrangement to be set to the Earth at Supply
Source Only. No Local earthing at Board option. In this condition, the board external earth
loop impedance is calculated from the sum of:
l the external impedance (Ze) at the distribution system supply connection
l the total line conductor impedance (Z1) to the board
l the total cpc impedance (Z2) back to the supply connection
Therefore, Board external earth impedance = Ze + Z1 + Z2.

9 Calculations Tab
Fig. 1 shows the existing arrangement, where the earth fault loop impedance Zs would be:
Zs = ZL1 + ZL1A + ZL1B + ZcpcB + ZcpcA + ZE
and the return earth path impedance ZRwould be:
ZR = ZcpcB + ZcpcA + ZE [Fig. 3]
Fig. 2 shows an arrangement with a local earth at Board 2 which will be possible with the
this development. The board earth connection EL will have an impedance ZEL defined in
the Board form.
The earth fault loop impedance can now be calculated as:
l Simplified Assumption: Zs = ZL1 + ZL1A + ZL1B + ZcpcB + ZEL
l Full evaluation: Zs = ZL1 + ZL1A + ZL1B + ZcpcB + [(ZcpcA + ZE) x ZEL]/( ZcpcA + ZE + ZEL)
That is, the return path includes the impedance of the local earth connection EL in parallel
with the sum of the impedances of cpcA and the source earth conductor E.
And the return earth paths:
l Zs = ZcpcB + ZEL [Fig. 4]
l Zs = ZcpcB + [(ZcpcA + ZE) x ZEL]/( ZcpcA + ZE + ZEL) [Fig. 5]
Using the settings in the Board form (see below), you will be able to model all three of the
earthing arrangements described above:
l Earth at Supply Source Only: applies the existing method unchanged (return circuit as
Fig. 3).
l Local Earth at Board:
o Calculate for local earth only checked: return path calculated from local earth,
supply source earth ignored (return circuit as Fig. 4);
o Calculate for local earth only not checked: parallel paths between local earth and
supply source earth calculated (return circuit as Fig. 5);

9 Calculations Tab
The various calculations are handled in the Zbus module.

To calculate the parallel paths between the local board earth and the supply source earth
(return circuit as Fig. 5), the impedance of the supply earth conductor (E) is required. This a
part of the external impedance (Ze) defined in the Source form that also includes the
transformer winding and line conductor impedances.
For the purposes of the calculation, it might be reasonable to ignore the transformer
winding impedance (much lower than the supply cable impedances) and assume the
supply cable line and earth conductors have the same impedance. Therefore the
impedance used for the supply earth conductor would be the Ze value divided by 2.
However, where the supply cable is armoured with the armour being the earth conductor
or combined neutral-earth conductor, this would not be the case.
The difference in calculating for a TT connection with no supply earth conductor (E) and a
TN supply (includes E) needs to be taken into account. The return path in Fig. 5 applies for a
TN connection but for a TT supply, the return path would be as in Fig. 6 below.
Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance

The software finds the maximum earth fault loop impedance (Max Zs) by inspecting the
tripping characteristic for the CPD to find the level of current (Ia) that causes the device to
operate at exactly the required disconnection time (5 s, 0.4 s, etc.). Ia is found from the
maximum tolerance of the characteristic and gives the slowest operation – see Fig.1.

9 Calculations Tab
Max. Zs = (Cmin x Uo) / Ia

where:
Max. Zs = maximum earth fault loop impedance
Uo = nominal voltage line to earth
Cmin = voltage constant for minimum fault level calculation at LV(0.95)
Ia = fault current that causes disconnection in exactly 5, 0.4 or 0.2 seconds as appropriate
Checking Earth Fault Loop Impedance

The software checks for each circuit that the value of the earth fault loop impedance Zs
does not exceed that of Max. Zs, thus ensuring that disconnection will occur within the
specified time.
If Zs exceeds the permitted value, there are three possible outcomes:
l The external impedance Ze is greater than Max. Zs:
The disconnection time will be excessive. It will not be possible to correct this by
increasing the section of either the line or CPCconductors in the circuit. Therefore, an
error message appears to alert you of this condition.
l The CPCSize is set to ‘Auto’ and Ze is less than Max. Zs.
The software will attempt to rectify the problem if possible by increasing the section of
the CPCup to the size limit set in the Maximum CPCSize Settings dialog (Calculations /
Maximum CPCSizes). The possible outcomes depend on the CPCconfiguration
selected.

9 Calculations Tab
l You have selected a specific CPCSize in the Cable dialog, then an error message
appears to alert you of this condition.
Additional Protection
Together with the requirement to disconnect automatically in a specified time as described
above, additional protection in the form of an RCD is necessary for certain final circuit types
(411.3.3):
l Socket-outlets with a rated current not exceeding 20 A. They are exempt where, either
the installation is not in a dwelling and a documented risk assessment has been carried
out, or in the case of a socket specifically labelled or identified for use with a specific
item of equipment.
l Mobile equipment with a current rating ≤ 32 A for use outdoors.
An RCD used for this additional protection has to have a rated residual current not
exceeding 30 mA and an operating time not exceeding 40 ms at 5 times the rated residual
current (415.1).
Disconnection using earth fault protection

When selecting protection for a circuit it is possible to select, either an RCD in addition to
the overcurrent protective device, or an overcurrent protective device that includes an
earth fault protection function. RCDs and earth fault protection are available with earth
fault current settings ranging from as little as 10 mA to hundreds of amperes. Some
devices also have settings for time delay rather than instantaneous operation.
An RCD can be usefully employed in circuits where, for example, the level of earth fault
current is low and consequently disconnection by means of a fuse or circuit-breaker
cannot be achieved. It can have high sensitivity to earth fault currents and be unaffected by
phase fault currents.
Where an RCD is selected, the software assesses the disconnection time using both the
overcurrent protective device characteristic and the RCD characteristic and uses the
results from the device that gives the shortest disconnection time.
Earth Fault Adiabatic Calculation

Purpose of calculation
This calculation is a check to ensure that the cross-section of the CPCis sufficient to allow it
to withstand the energy let-through of the Circuit Protective Device (CPD), i.e., fuse or
circuit-breaker under earth fault conditions.

9 Calculations Tab
Where an RCD is selected in addition to an overcurrent protective device, the

disconnection time and energy let-through data will correspond to the device that
provides disconnection, almost always the RCD.
Description of Calculation
The calculation determines the minimum section required to ensure that the heating effect
of the CPD energy let-through under earth fault conditions does not cause the
temperature of the CPCconductor to exceed its limiting temperature.
The formula used (543.1.3) is:
S= √(I2t) / k
where:
S= the minimum section of the conductor in mm 2
I = the earth fault current in amperes*

t =the CPD disconnection time at the earth fault I*
k = a factor (k) which ‘takes account of the resistivity, temperature coefficient and heat
capacity of the conductor material, and the appropriate initial and final temperatures’. k
factors are given in (Tables 54.2 to 54.6).
* where the CPD disconnection time is less than 0.1 s, I2t is the CPD energy let-through in
ampere squared seconds (A2s). Where the disconnection time is greater than 0.1 s, I2t is
the earth fault current squared times the disconnection time.
If the CPCfails the adiabatic test an error message will be displayed. The CPCthat has been
selected for earth fault disconnection purposes will be tested and no attempt will be made
by the calculation routine to change its size or configuration.
Data for the calculation is obtained as follows:
l For disconnection times greater than 0.1 s, the protective device actual disconnection
time is taken from the maximum tolerance of its operating characteristic at the
calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph View with settings: ‘Overcurrent
+ Time/Current’, or ‘Earth Fault + Time/Current’ where the circuit has residual current
protection (see also Graph View).
l For disconnection times less than 0.1 s, the energy let-through is taken from the device
I2t characteristic at the calculated fault current – this can be seen in the Graph View
with settings: Earth Fault + Energy/Current (see also Graph View).
CPC Cable Equivalent Section

Where the CPCconfiguration comprises two parallel conductors of dissimilar materials (for
example, a steel cable armour plus a separate or integral copper conductor) a

9 Calculations Tab
complication arises because the k factors for the two conductors are different. This means
it is not possible to calculate S=√(I2t)/k directly. This is overcome in the software by
converting the armour section to a ‘Cable Equivalent’ section compared to the line
conductor and then using the line conductor k factor for the armour in the calculation.
This Cable Equivalent section has the same thermal withstand capability as the original
steel section for the purposes of the adiabatic.
This is done using:
Cable Equivalent section mm 2
= Actual Section mm 2 x (armour k factor / line conductor k factor)
Table 54.7
As an alternative to the calculation method described above (Table 54.7) offers a simple
rule-of-thumb method of CPCsizing that avoids any calculation. The software does not
make use of Table 54.7; there are two principal objections to its use:
1. It is generally uneconomical. It calls for the following minimum CPCsections:
l the same section as the line conductor (line conductor < 16 mm 2)
l 16 mm 2 (line conductor 16 to 35 mm 2)
l half the section of the line conductor (line conductor > 35 mm 2)
The calculated size is invariably less than that given in Table 54.7.
2. Sizing CPCs to Table 54.7 only deals with the adiabatic requirement and does not
necessarily ensure satisfactory earth fault disconnection.
NOTE– MEVersion: The selection of Earth Continuity Conductors (ECCs) in the

software for suitability for earth fault disconnection and protection under fault
conditions (adiabatic check) is done by calculation. To comply with Appendix 12 of the
DEWARegulations for Electrical Installations 1997 Edition, it will be necessary to make
manual selections as the calculated sizes may not comply.
The calculation method used is compliant with A5(j) of the RSB Wiring Regulations
(Third Edition) March 2014 – refer to Note 4.

9 Calculations Tab
Impedance Matrices
The software uses the Zbus matrix method to analyse and calculate impedances. Once
conductors have been sized, the Zbus routine converts the project to an impedance
network. The impedance network always starts from the Reference Node, node 0. Each
element in the project is mapped as an impedance.
An example project is shown below in both ProDesign schematic and derived impedance
network forms.

9 Calculations Tab
Calculation takes place at nodes. The Zbus matrix yields the resolved network impedance
at every node. In fact there are five matrices which are constructed which are required due
to circuit phasing and wiring and the different fault levels being calculated. To evaluate Max
and Min phase fault levels in TP, TPN, and SP circuits requires four impedance matrices.
l Phase impedances at 20 ºCand at full operating temperature
l Phase and Neutral impedances at 20 ºCand at full operating temperature
l The fifth matrix requires the CPCimpedances at full operating temperature
Zbus Viewer
The Zbus matrices can be viewed once the project has been exported to, and opened in
ProDesign (please view the ProDesign help file for instructions).
Users of ProDesign100 or later can view the Zbus matrices and calculated impedances
using the Zbus Viewer. Access this through the Calculations menu.

9 Calculations Tab
This opens the Matrix dialog:
The dialog has seven tabs :

l Nodes
l Conductor Impedances
l Ia. Phase Fault Max TP
l lb. Phase Fault Min TP
l IIa. Phase Fault Max TPN

9 Calculations Tab
l IIb. Phase Fault Min TPN

l III. Z2 CPC
Three-phase and neutral circuits will use matrix Ia for the phase max fault levels and matrix
IIb for phase min fault levels.
Three-phase only circuits will use matrix Ia for the phase max fault levels and matrix Ib for
phase min fault levels.
Single-phase circuits will use matrix IIa for the phase max fault levels and matrix IIb for
phase min fault levels.
All circuits will use matrices Ib and III for the earth fault levels.
The Nodes tab lists the correlation between project elements and the node mapping:
The Conductor Impedances tab lists the conductor impedances Phase and Phase-Neutral
at both operating temperature and at 20 °Cand the CPCimpedances at operating
temperature. The impedances are in ohms and are for the actual conductor lengths. The
red corner mark in some cells indicates that the complex impedance values (R+jX) can be
viewed by hovering the cursor over the red mark.

9 Calculations Tab
The Ia Phase Fault Max TP, lb Phase Fault Min TP, IIa Phase Fault Max TPN, IIb Phase Fault
Min TPN] and III Z2 CPC] tabs display the Zbus matrices. Impedances are in per-unit on a
100 MVA base. The key elements of the matrix are the diagonal. The element at [1,1] is the
resolved network impedance to node 1, element [2,2] is the resolved network impedance
to node 2 and so forth.
The diagonal is highlighted in yellow. Hover the cursor over any of these highlighted cells
and an information box appears. The infomation box gives the individual items impedance,
the overall impedance magnitude at that node and the phase fault max fault level. Clicking
on any highlighted cell will also display this information in the lower half of the dialog.
The data shown in the tabs can also be printed or exported to Microsoft Excel for further
use.

9 Calculations Tab
Harmonics
An increasing number of types of electrical and electronic equipment generate harmonic
currents. Desktop computers and electronic fluorescent lighting are common load types
that create triple harmonics. In distribution systems supplying loads that create significant
levels of triple harmonics, conductors selected using conventional sizing rules can become
dangerously overheated.
Triple harmonics are those with a frequency 3, 9, etc., times that of the fundamental system
frequency (50/60 Hz) – 3rd, 9th, etc., harmonics.
From the point of view of cable sizing, an unfortunate effect of triple harmonics is that the
peaks and troughs of the harmonic waveforms in each phase of a three-phase circuit are
aligned. Therefore, the sum of the phase harmonic currents will be three times the level of
harmonic current in each phase.
This results in a much higher level of current flowing in the neutral conductor than would
be the case for a circuit with no harmonic content. For this reason it is necessary to take
harmonics into account when sizing conductors to avoid the possibility of dangerous
overheating when the designed network is put into service.
The problem is associated with three-phase and neutral circuits. Single-phase circuits,
where the neutral current will always be equal to the phase current, require no special
consideration.
In the software, a rating factor Ch is applied for levels of 3rd harmonic current above 15 %.
In each Load dialog there is an input for the harmonic current level.
Multi-core Cables and Busbars

The factor Ch is applied for multi-core cable sizing as described in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4,
5.5. This method assesses the rating of the whole cable, taking into account the current
levels (and consequent temperature rises) in the line conductors as well as in the neutral.
BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.5 contains a table that gives the value for the rating factor
depending on the level of harmonic current as a percentage of the phase current:
The method used considers the total thermal effect of the current flowing in all the
conductors (phases and neutral) of a multi-core cable or busbar. Depending on the level of

9 Calculations Tab
harmonic current, the busbar or cable sizing will be based on the line conductor (< 33 %) or
the neutral conductor (≥ 33 %).
The rating factors given in BS7671:2018 are not valid where the phase unbalance of load
currents exceeds 50%. Therefore, an error message is displayed for such conditions.
NOTE– The derating method described is based on assessment of 3rd harmonic

currents only, higher order harmonics are not considered.
The rating factors are applied as follows:

Calculate the neutral harmonic current Ihn = (3h x Ibph)/100
Where:
h = percentage 3rd harmonic; Ibph = phase design current
Calculate the minimum cable rating (Iz) using the harmonic correction factor Ch from the
table:
3rd harmonic < 33%: Iz = [In / (Cg x Ca x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
3rd harmonic ≥ 33%: Iz = [Ihn / (Cg x Ca x Ci x Cf x Ch)]
Harmonic Current and Neutral Protection

Where cable size selection is based on the current in the neutral conductor (level of third
harmonic current is greater than 33 %), it is a requirement that a four-pole protective
device with overcurrent protection of the neutral be used.
The software gives a warning message for this condition if the circuit is protected by fuses,
since excess current in the neutral will not lead to disconnection of the line conductors.
A note is also displayed where the protective device is a circuit-breaker to remind you that
a device with protection in the neutral pole should be used.
Single-core cables
BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.5 does not give guidance for the sizing of single-core cables for
harmonic currents. In the software for circuits with single-core cables, the neutral
conductor is sized independently from the phase conductors. The phase conductors are
sized as normal—ignoring the proportion of harmonic content present. The neutral
conductor is then sized on the basis of the sum of two current components:
l Non-harmonic neutral load current due to phase current unbalance (Iun); the complex
sum of non-harmonic currents for each of the phases.
l Harmonic neutral current (Ihn).
This current is calculated in the same way as that described above for multi-core cables.

9 Calculations Tab
The complex line currents are added to give the total neutral current Intot = Iun + Ihn
The minimum neutral cable size is then found from the relevant cable data table using the
installation method for the phase cable, that is, It ≥ Intot .
Accumulation of Harmonic Loads

Cable sizing correction applies only to three-phase and three-phase and neutral circuits.
For final circuits, the harmonic content for cable sizing is taken from the value entered in
the Load dialogs. For each sub-main circuit, the percentage of harmonic load for each
phase (resulting from the harmonic content of loads connected downstream) is calculated.
The example below summarises the method used.
The loads and the corresponding percentage harmonic contents are shown for each final
circuit (e.g, 10 A, 20 %). Loads connected to DB 3 are all single-phase (e.g., L1), all remaining
loads are three-phase (L1,2,3).
The procedure finds, for each circuit starting from final circuits and working back to the
source, the total load and percentage harmonic for each phase.
Cable 4
There is only one load per phase, so:

9 Calculations Tab
L1: Total load = 10 A; % Harmonic = 20 %

Only three-phase loads present, so values the same for each phase.
L1,2,3:
Total Load = 20 + 10 = 30 A
% Harmonic
= [(Load 3 x % Harmonic 3) / Total Load] + [(Load 4 x % Harmonic 4) / Total Load]
= [(20 x 30) / 30] + [(10 x 36) / 30] = 20 + 12 = 32 %
Cable 2
L1:
Total Load = Cable 4 + Load 1 + Load 2 = 10 + 30 + 16 = 56 A
% Harmonic
= [(Load Cable 4 x % Harmonic Cable 4) / Total Load]
+ [(Load 1 x % Harmonic 1) / Total Load] + [(Load 2 x % Harmonic 2) / Total Load]
= [(10 x 20) / 56] + [(30 x 20) / 56] + [(16 x 40) / 56] = 3.57 + 10.71 + 11.43 = 25.71 %
L2:
Total Load = 15 + 30 + 16 = 61 A
% Harmonic = [(15 x 30) / 61] + [(30 x 20) / 61] + [(16 x 40) / 61]
= 7.38 + 9.84 + 10.49 = 27.71 %
L3:
Total Load = 5 + 30 + 16 = 51 A
% Harmonic
= [(5 x 25) / 51] + [(30 x 20) / 51] + [(16 x 40) / 51] = 2.45 + 11.77 + 12.55 = 26.76 %

9 Calculations Tab
Diversity
BS7671:2018 Section 311 states that diversity may be taken into account when assessing
the maximum of an installation.
Details of how to make diversity settings are contained in Project Settings / Diversity
Settings. This section describes how the settings are applied.
The diversity settings made at a board or a busbar tap-off modify the sum of final circuit
load currents calculated at that switchboard, distribution board, or consumer unit.
A diversity setting made at a load modifies the proportion of load design current added to
the total load at the board to which it is connected. The diversity setting does not affect the
design of the final circuit.
In a well designed network, the diversity settings should modify the connected load
current in each sub-main circuit to closely approximate the anticipated maximum demand.
The example below describes how settings are applied and calculated.
Diversity Example
The user has selected User Defined as the Diversity method at DB1.

9 Calculations Tab
In the table, the diversities shown are the ones the user has set for the premises selected
in Preferences / Diversity Settings.
The diversities for the motors are different for the largest, second largest, and remaining
loads of that type. When assessing diversity ‘Standby’ loads are disregarded. So, in this
case, the diversities applied to the motor loads will be:
Motor 1 – 1.00 (largest load);
Motor 2 – 0.00 (Standby);
Motor 3 – 0.85 (third largest load, but second largest when Motor 2 is disregarded,
therefore 0.85 not 0.65).
For Load 1, Load 2, and Load 3, the user has applied a diversity setting at the Load dialog.
The load for DB 2 has been set at 40 A using the ‘Define Load’ setting. No diversity is
applied.
The diversity at DB 1 is set at 0.9.
Results:
Cables 3 to 8 will be sized for the individual circuit design currents (Ib) ignoring any diversity
settings.
The total diversified load at DB1 is calculated as follows:
DB 2 = 40 A
Load 1 = 16 x 0.95 x 0.90 = 13.68 A
Load 2 = 25 x 1.00 x 0.80 = 20.00 A
Load 3 = 20 x 0.80 x 0.90 = 14.40 A
Motor 1 = 32 x 1.00 x 1.00 = 32.00 A
Motor 2 = 20 x 0.80 x 0.00 = 00.00 A
Motor 3 = 16 x 0.85 x 1.00 = 13.60 A
Total = 40.00 + 13.68 + 20.00 + 14.40 + 32.00 + 00.00 + 13.60 = 133.68 A
The total connected load at DB 1 will be:
40 + 16 + 25 + 20 + 32 + 20 + 16 = 151 A
The design current for the cable feeding DB1 will be the diversified load at DB1 times the
diversity setting at DB1:
Ib for Cbl_1 = 133.68 x 0.9 = 120.3 A

9 Calculations Tab
Displaying device characteristics

Once any selectivity checks have been made, it may be necessary to view a number of
characteristics curves and to make adjustments to their settings. There are a number of
ways to do this:
1. In the Protection pane for the relevant circuit, click View Graph to display
the graph view showing the characteristics of the protective device; the one upstream
and the downstream device (the one with the highest setting of those devices
immediately downstream). The settings for any one of these devices can be adjusted
and saved to the ProDesign project by clicking Save to ProDesign.
NOTE– If either the upstream or downstream device has its rating set to Auto
and the project has not been calculated, its characteristic will not be displayed.
2. Select a circuit on the single-line diagram and click Protection Study
on the Calculate toolbar.

9 Calculations Tab
Source Calculations
REC Supply Fault Level Calculator
Sets the fault level conditions for the distribution system supply source when Apply is
clicked.
The fault level calculator estimates the prospective fault current level at the point of supply
(the source in a ProDesign MEnetwork; the board’s cut-out)of a distribution system
connected to the LVsupply network of a regional electricity company (REC).
Estimated fault levels are based on a declared fault level at the LVDistribution Main (or sub-
station, where applicable) being attenuated by the impedance of the service line between
the distribution main and the point of supply.
There are three possible supply arrangements. For each of these there is a different level of
declared prospective fault current (Ipf ) at the point where the service line is connected to
the RECdistribution network:
Supply type Connection to Pscc (kA/ PF)
230 V 1-phase + N LVDistribution Main 16 / 0.55
400 V 3-ph / 3-ph+N LVDistribution Main 18 / 0.50
400 V 3-ph / 3-ph+N LVSub-station 25 / 0.23
For each of the three supply arrangements, attenuated fault levels are taken from a table
according to the service cable cross-section and length.
NOTE– The Service Cable length entered into the calculator should be the length of
service cable within the boundary of the consumer’s premises. The remaining
length is subject to change by the RECand its inclusion in the calculated length may

9 Calculations Tab
result in an underestimation of the future level of Pscc.
TT Calculation Requirements
The following requirements for distribution systems with TT system supplies are covered
by the calculations when the supply source is selected as ‘TT’.
Earth Fault Disconnection Times (Table 41.1)

Different disconnection times to those for TN systems are applied as described in Table
41.1. This requirement is ignored in a network where: Protective Equipotential Bonding
connections comply with 411.3.1.2. This can be specified in the Source dialog.
RCD protection for final circuits ≤ 32 A

Where an RCD is used to obtain earth fault disconnection in a final circuits rated ≤ 32 A, the
Max Zs value is taken from Table 41.5.
Electrode resistance should be less than or equal to 200 Ohms

NOTE2 of Table 41.5 in BS7671:2018 advises that an electrode with a resistance greater
than 200 ohms may not be stable. Therefore, an error message is generated for this
condition.
Bonding conductor adiabatic check

The bonding conductor connecting the earthing electrode to the supply terminals is
checked to ensure that it meets the adiabatic test.
TT Supply Fault Level Calculator

The electrode resistance is calculated as described in the Electrode Resistance Calculator
section and then, when Apply is clicked, used to calculate the source earth fault conditions,
as described in the Calculating Earth Fault Impedance section.
Electrode Resistance Calculator

Calculations for plate type

9 Calculations Tab
Calculations for rod type
Calculating earth fault impedance

The TT Supply Fault Level Calculator produces the impedance of the earth connection
(bonding conductor and electrode) ZEC. To calculate the total external earth fault
impedance and the earth fault current, the value produced by the calculator is added to
the supply transformer impedance (ZT) and the impedance of the supply line conductor
(ZPE).

9 Calculations Tab
The Phase Fault Current (Ip) and/or the Phase Ze etc. is taken from the Prospective Fault
Conditions pane. When Apply in the calculator is clicked, the Earth Ze and earth fault
current data inserted into the Prospective Fault Conditions pane, is calculated from the
earth connection impedance ZEC from the calculator, added to a proportion of the phase
impedance, as described below.
The proportion of phase impedance added to the earth connection impedance ZEC
depends on whether the supply is single-phase or three-phase (set in the Voltage tab).
Three-phase supply
The phase fault current for a three-phase or three-phase and neutral supply is the
symmetrical fault current, calculated using:
Isym = Uo / Phase Ze.
The impedance Phase Ze is made up of the sum of the transformer and the supply line
conductor impedance (ZT + ZPE).
The earth impedance Earth Ze is determined by adding to Phase Ze the earth connection
impedance ZEC, i.e.:
Earth Ze 3-phase = ZT + ZPE + ZEC
Single-phase supply
The phase fault current for a single-phase supply is the phase to neutral fault current,
calculated using:
Iph+n = Uo
/ (ZPE + ZNE).
The impedance Phase Ze is made up of the sum of the transformer and the supply phase
and neutral conductor impedances, ie.: Phase Ze = (ZT + ZPE + ZNE).
The earth impedance Earth Ze is determined by adding the earth connection impedance
ZEC, to the Phase Ze minus the neutral conductor impedance ZNE, i.e.:
Earth Ze = ZT + ZPE + ZEC
9 Calculations Tab
The values of the separate impedances that comprise Phase Ze are not known. It will be
assumed that the line and neutral conductor impedances are equal (ZPE = ZNE) and that,
compared to the cable impedances, the transformer impedance is negligible (ZT = 0). Any
inaccuracies will be very small compared to the electrode resistance.
Therefore:
Earth Ze 1-phase = 0.5 Phase Ze + ZEC
Identical Parallel Supplies

This option is only available in versions ProDesign100 and higher.
This feature applies to a source of supply, transformer or generator connected to a
Selecting Parallel Supplies

To define parallel sources, in the Identical Parallel Supplies panel in the Voltage pane of the
Source dialog, select Parallel Sources and select the number of parallel sources:
Calculation of Fault Conditions

Where parallel supplies are used, calculation of fault conditions at the switchboard and the
main cables need to take into account the fault contribution from all supplies connected
simultaneously.
The following example shows a supply arrangement with two identical parallel
transformers each connected to a switchboard through a supply cable.

9 Calculations Tab
A. Fault contribution from one source.

The level of fault contributed by each transformer will be the same as when only one
transformer is connected to the system. This is the fault condition experienced by the
supply circuit-breaker for a fault at its load terminals.
B. Through fault in supply cable.
The maximum fault current experienced by either supply cable will be for a fault at the
load end of the cable, with the transformer connected to that cable supplying the fault
current. For arrangements with more than two parallel transformers, the maximum
fault current will result from a fault at the supply end of the cable, with fault
contribution from all the transformers except the one connected to that cable.
C. Fault at switchboard.
The fault level is the sum of the fault contribution from the two transformers,
decremented by the impedances of the supply cables.

10
Reports Tab
The ProDesign MEsoftware provides a wide variety of reports. These are intended to help
during the design process and to provide comprehensive documentation for a completed
design.
The types of reports are:
l Errors and Warnings – These automatically appear at the end of the calculation
process to alert the designer of any problems found.
l Quick Results – Allows the quick display of the values of key parameters for all or part of
the network, as required.
l Display Results – Allows selected parameters to be displayed next to selected circuits.
l Reports wizard – Allows simple custom reports to be designed and produced.
l Full reports – A wide range of reports used to document a completed design.
In this section:
Last Report, page 382
Reports, page 383
Custom Reports, page 385
Logo, page 388

10 Reports Tab
Last Report
To access these settings, select Reports / Last Report.
This runs the last report that was generated.

10 Reports Tab
Reports
To access these settings, select Reports / Reports.
Viewing and printing

When selecting a report, a Report Selector dialog appears in which all the components in
the project of the type to be reported are listed.
Selecting items for a report

Select or clear the check boxes next to the component.
To sort the report, click a header name. This will sort the column either A to Z or Z to A.
Once you have the selected items, click OK to generate a PDF copy of the requested report
.
Document Control
The header of each report shows data taken from the Project revision feature (see Project
Settings / Project Revision) that can be used to identify the project and its current status at
the time the report was created.

10 Reports Tab
The footer provides information on the date of printing and the program version used for
the calculation.

10 Reports Tab
Custom Reports
To access these settings, select Reports / Custom Report.
To create your own custom reports, use the Reports wizard. The format of the reports is
similar to those produced by Quick Results.
Custom reports enable you to create customisable sets of data for exporting in Microsoft
Excel, CSV, or Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) formats.
To produce a report, select a template or create a template that describes the data items
to be included in the report. Data to be included can be selected from all the parameters
for which values are calculated in the software.
Once a template has been created, it can be re-used to produce a report of the same
format for any other ProDesign project. A selection of templates defining different report
formats can be created and re-used as required.
Producing reports
1. Click the Reports Wizard button on the Calculate toolbar:
2. Select a template. From the Available Templates list, select a template. If no templates
have been previously produced, select the field parameters that need to be included in
the report.
By default, all the electrical components and field parameter are included in the report.
3. To remove an electrical component, deselect them from the Change Components list:

10 Reports Tab
4. To remove an electrical field parameter, deselect them in the Fields section of the
custom report:
5. When only the items that you want included in the report are selected, select a format
that the report is to be exported as:

10 Reports Tab
6. Select if all the electrical component data is to be exported, otherwise only the electrical
components that are activate/displayed will be exported.
If the Export All check box is selected, the Merge Into Single File option appears. if this
check box is selected, the electrical components will be all merged into a single file,
otherwise the electrical components will be exported as separate files.
7. To export the custom report, click Export.
Creating a report template
1. Click the Reports Wizard button on the Calculate toolbar.

2. Follow Step 3 and Step 4 above (Producing Report) to select what should be included in
the report.
3. Click Save As. The Save this Electrical Component as a New Template dialog appears:
4. Enter a template name. This saves the template, which can be used next time the
report needs to be run by selecting it from the Templates list as shown above.
5. To complete the report, follow Step 6 through Step 8 above (Producing Report).
Changing the field order

To change the order of the data fields, simply drag a field to its new location:
To hide or remove a column (see Step 5 in Producing Report), deselect it from the field
section of the screen.

10 Reports Tab
Logo
To access these settings, select Reports / Logo.
Enables you to show a logo on the schematic or report, as well as allowing the option to
replace, edit, or revert back to the standard logo for the project.
The image file (Logo.bmp) for the logo displayed on the drawing and in the report headers
is stored in the ProDesign ME/ Reports folder.
The displayed image can be modified either in the Logo Editor or by replacing the supplied
image file with another of the same name.
Show Logo on Schematic

To hide the logo on the drawing, clear the Show Logo on Schematic check box in Project
Settings / Drawing / Logo. Alternatively, right-click on the logo in the schematic and then
select Hide.
Show Logo on Reports

To hide the logo on the reports, clear the Show Logo on Reports check box in Project
Settings / Drawing / Logo.

10 Reports Tab
Choose New Logo

If a suitable company logo already exists as an image file, it can be used to replace the
default image. Click Choose New Logo.
TIP – The image dimensions must be no larger than 500 x 128 pixels. If the image
dimensions are greater than this, the displayed image will be distorted.
Open Logo Editor

The Logo Editor is available from the Reports tab, Project Settings / Logo pane or right-
clicking on the logo in the schematic and selecting properties. It can be used to edit the
image used to display the company logo that appears on the drawing and on reports.
The Logo Editor uses the standard Paint program supplied with the Microsoft Windows
operating system. Click Open Logo Editor.
The drawing/editing features in Paint can be used to create a suitable image. When the file
is saved (do not change the location), the new image will appear on the drawing and
reports.
Revert to Default
The logo will default to the project logo that is located in ProDesign ME/ Reports folder
labelled Logo.
Quick Results
Quick Results displays key parameters for selected circuits without the need to produce
reports. It is useful for diagnostic purposes during the design process.
Displaying Quick Results

Quick Results can selected for display from one of the following menu:
Right-click in an empty area of the drawing and from the shortcut menu, select Quick
Results:
The project is automatically calculated and the Quick Results menu appears:

10 Reports Tab
The circuits listed depend on what objects are selected on the drawing at the time Quick
Results is selected:
l No circuits selected – The details for all the circuits in the project are listed.
l One or more circuits selected – The details for those circuits are listed.
l One or more boards selected – The details for all the circuits connected to the selected
board are listed.
All the parameters available to the Quick Results feature are contained in data fields, each
of which are displayed either in Quick Results or in the Field Chooser.
Each of the columns contains a data field with the header containing the name of the
parameter and the values of the parameter for each of the circuits listed below. It is
possible to change the order of the fields and which of the fields are or are not displayed.
The Field Chooser is used to select the fields to include or exclude.
Changes made to the layout and content of Quick Results, as described below, will be
saved with the project.
Fields
The Fields selector is displayed on the right side of the Quick Results dialog.

10 Reports Tab
By default, all the parameter fields available for use in Quick Results are displayed. When a
check box next to a parameter is cleared (unchecked), it will not appear in the Quick Results
dialog.
Moving fields
To move a field in Quick Results:

10 Reports Tab
Click and drag the required field to be moved. The field will float above the initial starting
location. Move the field to the require column location and the field will then be inserted in
this location:
Removing a field
A field can be removed from Quick Results by deselecting the field in the right hand menu.
Adjusting the column width

The width of the columns can be adjusted using the mouse to click and drag the right-
hand border of the header.
Display Results
Using Display Results, calculation results can be displayed on the drawing for any network
component, for example, Cable Consumer Unit. The values of any results that have been
selected for display are updated each time the project is calculated.
Results can be displayed in either of two formats:
l Text alongside – The text appears alongside the component, and can be formatted to
appear vertically or horizontally
l Text in box – The text appears in a box connected to the component by a line.
Setting Display Results

To set the results to be displayed:
Select the components for which results are to be displayed, using one of the following
methods:
l Click on a single component to select it.
l Using Shift+click, select a number of components.
l To select all the components in the network, ensure that no components are selected.
Right-click to display the shortcut menu:
Select Display Results. The Display Results dialog appears:

10 Reports Tab
The dialog contains two main areas:

l Display results properties.
l Settings tabbed sheets.
Setting Display Results Properties

The Display Results properties defaults to the following properties.

10 Reports Tab
Results can be adjusted by changing any of the properties above.
CAUTION – A global change is not possible. If the default selection is not suitable, this
change needs to be done to each electrical component.
l Text in box – The results appear enclosed in a box attached to the related component
by a line. The box initially appears at a default position. The position can then be
adjusted as required.
NOTE– This setting is only available when a single component is selected. The
box background can be set to be transparent or opaque.
l Show Connecting Line – When selected, the Text in Box results are connected by a line
between the piece of electrical equipment and the text in box.
l Fill Colour – The colour shown in the fill colour is the colour that will appear in the Text
In Box in the drawing area. Note if you want a transparent box, change Alpha (A) to 0 %.
l Text/Border Colour – The colour of the Text in Box border in the drawing area.
l Not Calculated Colour – Helps to identify any displayed components that have not
been calculated by highlighting the text in a different colour.
l Border Thickness – This will allow the Text In Box Border to be increased or decreased
as required in the drawing area.
l Font – Change the text font.
l Size – Change the size of the text.
l Header Alignment – This changes the header to the required alignment in Text in Box.

10 Reports Tab
l Alignment – This allows the alignment of the text to be changed to the required
alignment.
Setting Results to be displayed

The Display Results dialog contains a tabbed sheet of settings for each of the component
types selected. To select a data item for display, click the box next to it. Items with ticked
boxes will be displayed. The example below shows the how the following data items are
selected and displayed:
l Design Current for each phase (alternatively, by selecting Max, the load current in the
highest loaded phase could have been displayed).
l Diversity setting.
l References of the phases to which the component (Load) is connected.
Group Together
Final load and cable information can now be placed separately on the schematic when
using Display Results by deselecting the Group together option. To display the required
information, select the Display check-box for the component (Cable or Load) so that it is
shown on the schematic.
Moving the Results Box

To move a box containing results, click and drag on any point within the box and move it to
its new position. Click on the clear part of the drawing background to confirm the move.

10 Reports Tab
Full Reports
Full reports are selected from the Reports tab, Reports section. The menu lists the
items for which reports are available. For each of the items, a sub-menu lists the report
types available:
Viewing and Printing

When selecting a report, a Report Selector dialog appears in which all the components in
the project of the type to be reported are listed.

10 Reports Tab
Selecting Items for Report

Check boxes enable all components or selected items to be reported.
To view the report, click OKto produce a PDFof the selected report.
To sort the report, click a header name. This will sort the column either A to Z or Z to A.
Document Control
The header of each report shows data taken from the Project revision feature (see: Project
Settings / Project Revision) that can be used to identify the project and its current status at
the time the report was created.
The footer provides information on the date of printing and the program version used for
the calculation.
Source Details report

Source Details report details

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Source Identity The ID number and name of the source as defined in the Source
dialog.
Parallel Operation Where the source is selected as Parallel Supplies, the number of
parallel supplies is shown.
This option is only available in ProDesign versions, ProDesign100 or
later.
Source Type The type of source as defined by the settings in the Fault Conditions
tab of the Source dialog, for example, RECSupply from LVMain.
Active – Indicates whether the source was the active source used in
the calculation when the report was produced.
Supply Voltage Shows the single phase and three-phase voltage of the supply as
defined in the Voltage tab of the Source dialog.
Voltage Drop A summary of the global project voltage drop settings as set in the
Settings Voltage Drop Settings dialog.
Fault Level Data Shows the phase and earth fault conditions at the supply and at
interconnections with the main board:
l The fault contribution from the source (the values set in the Fault
Conditions tab of the Source dialog).
l Level of through fault in main cable. Used for adiabatic
calculations.
l Fault at board.
For more details on these parameters for parallel supplies, see
Calculations / Source Calculations / Identical Parallel Supplies.
later.
Network Load l Diversified Load – The sum of all final circuit loads modified by
Data diversity settings.
l Connected Load – The sum of all final circuit loads ignoring any
diversity settings.
l Absorbed Power – The power consumption of the total
diversified load given in kW, kVA, and kVAr.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Network The heat losses (I2r) in the network conductors, based on conductor
Conductor Energy resistances at the actual operating temperature in each circuit. It is
Loss assumed that the load current is continuous, that is, 8,760 hours per
annum.
The losses are given for conductors carrying the design current and,
for comparison purposes, what they would be if the conductors
were fully loaded.
Transformer report
Transformer report details
Field Description
Transformer The ID number and name of the transformer as defined in the

Identity Transformer dialog.
Parallel Operation Where the source is selected as Parallel Transformers, the number
of parallel transformers is shown.
Transformer The rating of the transformer in kVA as defined in the Fault Level tab
Details of the Transformer dialog.
The percentage impedance of the transformer as defined in the Fault
Level tab of the Transformer dialog.
The rating of the transformer secondary winding calculated from the
secondary voltage defined in the Voltage tab of the Transformer
dialog and the rating of the transformer in kVA. IL = kVA / (√3 x VL)
The rating of the transformer primary winding calculated from the
rating of the transformer secondary winding and the primary and
secondary voltages defined in the Voltage tab of the Transformer
dialog. Ipy = Isy x (Vsy / Vpy)
The secondary load current, that is, the total design current for the
whole network.
The primary load current calculated from the secondary load
current and the primary and secondary voltages defined in the
Voltage tab of the Transformer dialog. Ipy = Isy x (Vsy / Vpy).
Active – indicates whether the transformer was the active source
used in the calculation when the report was produced.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Supply Voltage Shows the single phase and three-phase voltage of the supply at the
primary and secondary windings of the transformer as defined in the
Voltage tab of the Transformer dialog.
Fault Level Data Shows the phase and earth fault conditions at the transformer
secondary terminals and at interconnections with the main board:
l The fault contribution from the transformer (the values set in the
Fault Conditions pane of the Transformer dialog).
calculations.
l Fault at board.
Calculations | Source Calculations | Identical Parallel Supplies.
later.
Protection Details of the device protecting the transformer, located at the

transformer primary or secondary connections, as defined in the
Protection tab of the Transformer dialog.
Network Load As for Source Details report.
Network As for Source Details report.

Conductor Energy
Loss
Generator Details report

Generator Details report details
Field Description
Generator Identity The ID number and name of the generator as defined in the
Generator dialog.
Parallel Operation Where the source is selected as Parallel Generators, the number of
parallel generators is shown.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Generator Details The generator rating in kVA and percentage impedance as defined
by the settings in the Fault Conditions tab of the Generator dialog.
Active – Indicates whether the generator was the active source used
in the calculation when the report was produced.
Supply Voltage Shows the single phase and three-phase voltage of the supply as
defined in the Voltage tab of the Generator dialog.
Fault Level Data Shows the phase and earth fault conditions at the generator
secondary terminals and at interconnections with the main board:
l The fault contribution from the generator (the values set in the
Fault Conditions tab of the Generator dialog).
calculations.
l Fault at board.
Calculations / Source Calculations / Identical Parallel Supplies.
later.
Network Load As for Source Details report.
Network As for Source Details report.

Conductor Energy
Loss
UPSDetails (Source Only) Report

UPS Details (Source Only) report details
Field Description
UPSIdentity The ID number and name of the generator as defined in the UPS
dialog.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
UPSDetails The rating of the UPS. For parallel units: the number of parallel units
(N) designated to cover the design load; the number of reserve units
to provide redundant capacity in excess of the design load; e.g. for a
design load 150 kVA, four parallel units each with a rating of 50 kVA
might be provided to give three units to cover the load and a reserve
unit, i.e. N + 1, where N = 3.
Supply Voltage The voltage, phasing and frequency of the supply provided by the
UPSunit.
Voltage Drop Voltage drop limits applicable to the supplied network.

Settings
Fault Level Levels of phase and earth faults contributed by the UPSunit or a
number of parallel units.
Network Load Summary of total network loads.

Data
Network The heat losses (I2r) in the network conductors, based on conductor
Conductor Energy resistances at the actual operating temperature in each circuit. It is
Loss assumed that the load current is continuous (i.e., 8760 hours per
annum).
The losses are given for conductors carrying the design current and,
for comparison purposes, what they would be if the conductors
were fully loaded.
UPS Details (Distribution) Report
Field Description
UPSIdentity The Id No and Name of the Generator as defined in the UPSdialog.
Type Online or Offline.
Status Input Supply / Bypass Supply
UPSactive or on As supply connected to UPSinput.

bypass
UPSOutput Phasing and voltage as in settings dialog.
Rating UPSrating in kVA. [a] indicates rating set to Auto.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Cable Identities The identities of the cables connected to the UPSinputs and
outputs.
Maximum The maximum normal charging current.

Charging Current
Inrush Multiplier The multiple of the normal charging current experienced when the
battery charge is completely depleted.
Output Harmonic 3rd harmonic content in the inverter output current.
Fault Output The maximum output fault current for: 1 cycle; 60 seconds;
continuous – sustainable for 10 min.
Earthing Describes earth connection; Local or system earth at supply source.

Impedance of the local earth connection.
Protective Devices Descriptions of protective devices on UPSand Bypass outputs.
Voltage Drop Voltage drop limits as applicable to network connected to UPS

Settings output.
Distribution Board report

Distribution Board report details
Field Description
Board Data For each board, the board ID number name is shown.
Circuit Data For each circuit, the following is reported:
Way The board way to which the circuit is connected.
Phase The phase or phases to which the circuit is connected.
Id No./Name The identity of the circuit.
Connected Load The total connected load for the circuit.
PF The load power factor.
3rd Harmonic % The percentage of 3rd harmonic current in the load connected to
the circuit.
Protective Device The nominal rating (In), overload setting (Ir ) and Type (Fuse, MCB, etc.)
of the circuit protective device.
RCD The trip setting of the residual current device (mA).

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Cable Type Description of the circuit cable type.
Size The size of the circuit cable in mm 2.
Cores The circuit cable makeup details.

Example: 2 x 4 x 1c = 2 conductors in parallel; four conductors, i.e., L1,
L2, L3, N; single-core cable.
Sep. CPC
The size in mm 2 of a separate conductor used as the circuit
protective conductor.
Length The length of the circuit cable.
Distribution Board Schedule

Distribution Board Schedule report details
Field Description
Board Data For each board, the following data is reported.
ID No/Name The board identity.
Board Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Model No. As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Fault Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
No. of Ways The number of board ways as defined in the Details tab of the
Distribution Board dialog.
Spare The number of unoccupied ways in the board expressed as a

percentage.
Incomer Details Where the board incomer is a protective device, the manufacturer,
type and rating of the device is shown.
Total Connected The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity settings.
Load
Total Diversified The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
Load settings.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Load Diversified/ The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
Connected settings. / The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity
settings. (Report 1 and Report 2)
PF The load power factor. (Report 1 and Report 2)
the circuit. (Report 1 and Report 2)
of the circuit protective device. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Cg The group rating factor used in the cable sizing calculation. Values
less than 1 are applied for circuits grouped with other circuits and/or
cables in parallel. (Report 2)
[u] is displayed next to the rating factor, when the value is User
Defined.
Ca The ambient temperature rating factor used in the cable sizing

calculation. (Report 2)
Defined.
RCD The trip setting of the residual current device (mA). (Report 1 and
Report 2)
Cable Size The size of the circuit phase cable in mm 2. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Cores The circuit cable makeup details. (Report 1 and Report 2)

Cable Type Description of the circuit cable type. (Report 1 and Report 2)

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Grouped with The number of other circuits in the group that are included with this
other circuits circuit. (Report 2)
Sep. CPC The size in mm 2 of a separate conductor used as the circuit

protective conductor. (Report 1 and Report 2)
Length The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the Cable
dialog. (Report 1)
Design Length The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the
Cabledialog. (Report 2)
Phase Sep. CPC The size of the circuit cable and size of separate conductor used as
mm 2 CPC, both in mm 2. (Report 3)
Connected To: The network component at the load end of this circuit. (Report 3)
Overcurrent Description and rating of the circuit protective device. (Report 3)

Protective Device
Earth Fault Description and trip rating of the circuit earth fault protective device.
Protective Device (Report 3)
Modular Distribution Board Report

Schedule 1 report
Field Description
Modular Board
Data
Id No. For each board, the board ID number name is shown.
Name The identity of the circuit name.
Board Rating (A): As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Model No. As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Fault Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Distribution Board dialog.
Number of Rails Numbers of rails in the board
Space Units per The number of Space Units per rail

Rail

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Total Space Units The total number of space unit available in the board
Available
Total Connected The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity settings.
Load
Total Diversified The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
Load settings.
Incomer
Information
CPD Type The Incomer Protection for the board
Device rating The Rating of the Incomer device
Location The Location of the Main incoming device in the board
Cable The Cable Feeding the incomer device
Space
requirement Table
Space Unit levels Identifies the number of level of protect from the main incomer to
outgoing circuit in the modular board.
Space units taken Identifies how many space units are taken up for protection that is
for inactive output not connected electrical in the board.
Total Occupied Identifies the number of space unit used in the board
space units
Remaining space Identifies the number of space units that have not been occupied in
units / % the board plus, as well as identifying what % of space is available
Total Space units The total number of space unit available in the board
Available
Board Information
Level Identifies the protection level and if it is a parent item or a child item
Protective Device Type of protective device installed for that that level.
Rating In,Adjusted Give the In or Ir value for the protection for that device
Ir (A)
RCD (A) The trip setting of the residual current device (A)

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
AFDD (A) The trip setting of the AFDD (A)
Circuit ID / Name The identity of the circuit.
Location Location in the Board for the Protection
Load Type The Final Circuit load type, (eg Fix Equipment)
Cable Type The Cable Type that is connected to the protective device
Phase Size (mm 2) The size of the circuit phase cable in mm 2
CPC Type The type of CPC arrangement that is been use plus the size in mm 2
Cable Config The circuit cable makeup details.

Example: 2 x 4 x 1c
= 2 conductors in parallel; four conductors, i.e., L1, L2, L3, N; single-
core cable.
L1 (A) / PF Circuit Load Current and load power factor.
Diversity Rating Diversity Factor appalled to the Circuit
VD Max / % The calculated voltage drop for the specified length of cable.
Displayed as the calculate voltage drop and voltage drop percentage
of the applied phase to neutral voltage.
Error Identifies if the circuit has a Error or not
Modular Distribution Board Report

Internal Cable
Field Description
Modular Board
Data
Id No. For each board, the board ID number name is shown.
Name The identity of the circuit name.
Board Information

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
From Location that the Internal cable is feed from
To Location that the Internal cable is feed to
Circuit ID / Name The identity of the circuit.
Connected Load The connected load of the cable in Amperes

(A)
Pf The load power factor.
the circuit.
Cable Type The Cable Type that is connected to the protective device
Phase Size (mm 2) The size of the circuit phase cable in mm 2
CPC Type The type of CPC arrangement that is been use plus the size in mm 2
Cable Config The circuit cable makeup details.

Example: 2 x 4 x 1c
= 2 conductors in parallel; four conductors, i.e., L1, L2, L3, N; single-
core cable.
Length (m) Length of cable in meters
Consumer Unit Report

Consumer Unit report details
Field Description
Board Data For each board, the following data is reported:
Id No. / Name The board identity.
Phase The phase to which the board is connected.
Circuit Data The circuit data is split up according to the section to which it is
connected. The header at the beginning of each section listing shows
the section number (numbered 1, 2, 3 from the supply connections),
whether the section is RCD protected, and the trip rating of the RCD.
For each circuit, the following is reported:

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Connected Load The design current of the load connected to the way.
the circuit. (Report 1 and Report 2)
RCD The trip rating of an RCD protecting the circuit.
Size Size of the circuit cable in mm 2.
Cores The circuit cable makeup details. (Report 1 and Report 2)


dialog. (Report 1)
Consumer Unit Schedule

Consumer Unit Schedule report details
Field Description
Board Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Consumer Unit dialog.
Model No. As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Consumer Unit dialog.
Fault Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Consumer Unit dialog.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
No. of Ways The number of board ways as defined in the Details tab of the
Consumer Unit dialog.
Spare The number of unoccupied ways in the board expressed as a

percentage.
Split Load Reports ‘Yes’ if the consumer unit has more than one section.
Total Connected Load The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity
settings.
Total Diversified Load The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
settings.
Incomer Details Where the board incomer is a protective device, the

manufacturer, type and rating of the device is shown.
Circuit Data The circuit data is split up according to the section to which it is
connected. The header at the beginning of each section listing
shows the section number (numbered 1, 2, 3 from the supply
connections), whether the section is RCD protected, and the trip
rating of the RCD.
For each circuit, the following is reported:
Phase The phase to which the circuit is connected.
Load The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
Diversified/Connected settings. / The total connected load per phase ignoring any
diversity settings.
the circuit.
Protective Device The nominal rating (In), overload setting (Ir ) and Type (Fuse, MCB,
etc.) of the circuit protective device.
Cable Size The size of the circuit phase cable in mm 2.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description

Example: 2 x 4 x 1c = 2 conductors in parallel; four conductors, i.e.,
L1, L2, L3, N; single-core cable.
Length The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the
Cable dialog.
Switchboard report
Switchboard report details
Field Description
Circuit Data For each circuit the following is reported:
Load Diversified The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
settings.
Load Connected The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity settings.
the circuit.
Cg The group rating factor used in the cable sizing calculation. Values
less than 1 are applied for circuits grouped with other circuits and/or
cables in parallel. (Report 2)
Defined.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Ca The ambient temperature rating factor used in the cable sizing

calculation. (Report 2)
Defined.

Grouped with The number of other circuits in the group that are included with this
other circuits circuit. (Report 2)

dialog. (Report 1)
Design Length The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the Cable
dialog. (Report 2)
Switchboard Schedule
Switchboard Schedule report details
Field Description
Board Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Switchboard dialog.
Model No. As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Switchboard dialog.
Fault Rating As defined in the Optional Data tab of the Switchboard dialog.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Total Connected Load The total connected load per phase ignoring any diversity
settings.
Total Diversified Load The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
settings.
Load The total connected load per phase multiplied by any diversity
Diversified/Connected settings. / The total connected load per phase ignoring any
diversity settings.
the circuit.
Protective Device The nominal rating (In), overload setting (Ir) and Type (Fuse, MCB,
etc.) of the circuit protective device.


Length The length of the circuit cable as defined in the Cable tab of the
Cable dialog.
Cable Calculation
Cable Calculation report details
Reported items are arranged in boxes according to subject areas, as described below. A

10 Reports Tab
separate single page report is produced for each cable. At the top of the report, before the
first box, the following two items are shown:
Field Description
Error Messages Where the cable is subject to one or more error conditions, an
abbreviated error message is shown.
Only one error condition is shown, although there may be multiple
errors. The Errors and Warnings dialog gives full details of all errors.
Active Source The ID number of the source active at the time the calculation took
place.
Where parallel sources have been selected, the total number in
parallel is shown. This option is only available in ProDesign versions,
ProDesign100 or later.
Circuit Cable – The cable identity.

Connection – The ID numbers of the network components between
the which the cable is connected.
Load – The type of load connected to the cable and the design
current.
Comments – Text entered in the Comments pane of the Cable dialog.
Length to First Fitting – For a radial lighting circuit, shows the circuit
length to the first fitting as set in the Details pane of the Load Details
dialog. In the calculation for a radial lighting circuit, the voltage drop
for the length to the first fitting is calculated in the normal way. Over
the remaining length, the calculated voltage drop is halved to
approximate the effect of the reduction of the load current along the
length of the circuit.
Protective Device Details of the overcurrent protective device for the circuit are shown
together with the trip rating of residual current protection where
installed.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
The Rating and l [a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. This means that
Overload Setting when the project is calculated the appropriate setting will be
are annotated automatically made to meet protection requirements for the
with the following: circuit. The report shows the value of the automatic setting.
l [f] indicates a fixed setting value applied by the user. The value
will be unaffected by the calculation.
l [m] indicates that the overload setting is set to maximum. This
means that, even if the design current is relatively low, the cable
will be sized to handle a level of continuous load current equal to
the maximum overload setting.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Conductors l Phase Conductor – The cable type, makeup, size and length are
shown. The following example describes the meaning of the
makeup details:
The size is annotated with one of the following:

l [a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. This means that
when the project is calculated the cable size will be
automatically selected to meet the load current and
installation conditions. The report shows the automatically
selected size.
l [f] indicates a fixed size selected by the user. The value will be
unaffected by the calculation.
Neutral Conductor – The size of the neutral cable is shown. The
size is annotated with one of the following:
when the project is calculated the cable size will be
automatically selected to meet the neutral load current and
installation conditions, and also be at least equal to the phase
conductor size. The report shows the automatically selected
size. For a multicore cable the neutral conductor size will
result from the automatic selection of the phase conductor
size (for most cable types the phase and neutral conductor
sizes will be the same).
l [f] indicates a fixed size selected by the user. This condition
applies to single-core cables only.
l [d] indicates that the neutral conductor has been set to
Double. This means that two conductors will be provided for
the neutral connection, each conductor the same size as the
phase conductor.
Installation Method – The installation Method is shown, including
the number of the method which corresponds to the method
numbers listed in BS7671:2018 . Also shown are:

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
l Configuration for single-core cables, e.g., flat, trefoil.

l Plastic or Metal for conduit, trunking, or ducting.
l Distance through which the cable is run through thermal
insulation.
l For cables on tray and similar supports, the way the cables
are arranged on the tray and the orientation of the tray, e.g.,
Horizontal Flat Touching.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Rating Factors The rating factors shown are used in the cable sizing calculations to
modify the required cable tabulated current rating depending on
installation conditions such as temperature, etc.
The rating factors and the rules for their use are described in BS
7671:2018, Appendix 4.
In instances where Rating Factors have been defined by the user
(allowing to account for conditions not covered by regulations), a [u]
is shown next to the rating factor.
Temperature – The ambient temperature in which the cable is
installed. In the case of enclosed methods, e.g., conduit, this is the
temperature of the air surrounding the enclosure.
Ca is the rating factor for ambient temperature for cables installed in
air. Normally, Ca = 1 for an ambient temperature of 30 °C.
Cg is the rating factor for ambient temperature for cables installed in
the ground. Normally, Cg = 1 for an ambient temperature of 20 °C[BS
7671:2018], and Cg = 1 for an ambient temperature of 15 °C(BICC
method).
On the same line as the temperature and factor, the source of the
data is given in square brackets.
Grouping – The number of circuits in group is shown, that is, the
number of circuits installed within a distance of not more than two
cable diameters from each other. The number shown is that entered
into the Total number of grouped circuits setting in the Grouping tab
in the Cable dialog.
Cg is the rating factor for grouped cables/circuits. The value shown is
based on the number of parallel cables in this circuit multiplied by
the number of circuits in group, that is, the total number of
cables/circuits grouped together. The total number used for the
lookup of Cg can be modified using the setting in the Grouping pane
in the Cable dialog. The source of the data is given in square
brackets.
For cables installed on tray or similar supports, where applicable, the
number of supports and the number of cables on each of the
supports is shown. These correspond to the settings made in the
Grouping pane in the Cable dialog.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Where cables are installed in groups, there are two different

methods according to BS7671:2018, Appendix 4 that can be used to
apply the factor Cg: ‘Subject to Simultaneous Overload’ or ‘Not
Subject to Simultaneous Overload’ depending on the setting
selected in the Grouping pane in the Cable dialog.
For cables installed in the ground, the rating factor for grouping also
takes into account Spacing. The value of the rating factor Cg shown
reflects both the number of grouped cables and the space between
them.
Depth of Lay – For cables installed in the ground, a rating factor (Cd) is
applied to account for the difference in current-carrying capacity of
the cable according to the depth at which it is installed.
Thermal Resistivity – For cables installed in the ground, a rating factor
(Cs) is applied to account for the difference in current-carrying
capacity of the cable according to the rate at which the surrounding
soil is able to conduct heat away from the cable, that is, its thermal
resistivity.
Buried Circuit Factor – For cables installed in the ground according to
BS7671:2018 methods 70, 72 and 73, the rating factor Cc is used to
apply a factor of 0.9.
User Defined – Where the selected installation method is set to User
Defined, a user-defined rating factor is applied in the Cable tab of the
Cable dialog.
Run Through Thermal Insulation – Where the selected installation
method is set to Run Through Thermal Insulation, a rating factor (Ci)
needs to be applied according to the distance through which the
cable is run through the insulating material (BS7671:2018, Table 52.2).
Harmonics – Where the load in a cable includes a proportion of 3rd
harmonic current, a rating factor (Ch) is applied according to the
table in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.5.
BS3036 Fuse – Factor Cf is used to compensate for the use of a BS
3036 fuse, for which a factor of 0.725 is applied.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Cable Sizing The key variables in the cable sizing calculations are shown. Cable
sizing complies with BS7671:2018, Appendix 4.
Sized For – For multicore cables, depending on the level of current
flowing in the neutral conductor (caused by unbalanced phase
currents and/or harmonic current), the sizing of the cable could be
based on either the neutral current or the phase current. The
message at the top of the box states on which basis the calculation
was performed.
Voltage Drop Limit – A message shows the voltage drop limit
applicable to the individual cable, and whether the setting is to
comply with BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 6.4, or according to a user-
defined limit. Settings are made in the Voltage Drop Settings dialog of
the Active Source and the Voltage Drop Dialog of the Load and
Motor.
Design Current – The Design Current (Ib) for a final circuit is the value
entered in the Load (A) setting in the Load Details or Motor Details
dialogs. For a sub-main cable, it is the total diversified load current
calculated for that cable.
Device Rating – The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device,
which has to be equal to or greater than the design current, i.e., In ≥
Ib.
Overload Setting – For a circuit protective device with an adjustable
overload, this is the value (Ir ) to which it is set. The overload setting
has to be equal to or greater than the design current, i.e., Ir ≥ Ib.
Min. Cable Capacity – This is the minimum required cable capacity (Iz)
taking into account the load current and all installation conditions. It
is found by adjusting the device rating (or overload setting for an
adjustable device) using the various rating factors (see Box 4 above),
according to the formulae in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4. The actual
formula used will depend on whether cables are grouped, and
whether ‘Subject to simultaneous overload’ has been selected or
not.
For cables defined as installed in the ground according to a ‘BICC’
method, the minimum cable capacity is found by simply dividing all
the rating factors into the device rating (or overload setting for
adjustable devices), i.e., In / (Ctg x Cgg x Cd x Cs).

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Actual Cable Rating – The tabulated rating (It ) of the selected cable.
The rating is taken from the table for the particular cable type (BS
7671:2018, Table 4D1, etc.) and the column in that table that
corresponds to the Reference Method applicable to the selected
installation method, and the number of cables or phases.
The actual rating must be equal to or greater than the minimum
cable capacity, i.e., It ≥ Iz.
Load Current and Design Current – The design current and power factor is shown for
Voltage Drop each phase and neutral. The neutral current is the vector sum of the
three phase currents, and will be zero for a circuit with balanced
phase currents.
3rd Harmonic Current – The level of harmonic current is shown for
each phase and neutral. The neutral harmonic current will be the
arithmetic sum of the harmonic currents in each of the phases.
The total current flowing in the neutral will be the sum of the design
current and the harmonic current.
Voltage Drop – This Circuit – For each phase the calculated single-
phase voltage drop is shown in absolute and percentage (a
percentage of the system voltage) terms. The voltage drop is
calculated according to BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, Section 6 and
includes corrections for operating temperature and power factor.
Voltage drop calculations are based on currents calculated for each
phase from the vector sum of the phase current and neutral current.
Voltage Drop – From Source – For each phase the total voltage drop
from the source, up to and including the circuit being reported, is
shown.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Earth Fault Circuit Protective Conductor – The conductor or conductors used as

the circuit protective conductor are described. Conductor sizes are
annotated with one of the following:
l [a] indicates that an Auto setting is applied. For a separate
conductor this means that when the project is calculated the
conductor size will be automatically selected to meet the earth
fault disconnection requirements (subject to the Max. CPCSize
setting). For an integral conductor the conductor section will be
that for the cable size selected; the cable size will relate to the
current-carrying capacity requirement and will not be affected by
the earth fault disconnection requirement.
l [f] indicates a fixed size selected by the user. The value will be
unaffected by the calculation.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance – The values of the component parts of
the earth fault loop impedance: Ze, Z1, Z2 are shown, as well as the
earth fault loop impedance Zs. The value of Zs shown is the vector
sum of its component parts.
Also shown is the maximum earth fault loop impedance (Max. Zs).
The value of Max. Zs is calculated by dividing the current required to
obtain disconnection in exactly the specified time by the phase to
neutral voltage, into the phase to neutral voltage. The disconnection
current is found from the maximum tolerance of the protective
device characteristic.
Example: the maximum disconnection time for the circuit is 0.4 s; on
the maximum tolerance of the characteristic for the protective
device, the disconnection current (Ia) corresponding to a time of 0.4 s
is 90 A. Therefore: Max. Zs = (Cmin x Uo)/Ia = (0.95 x 230)/90 = 2.428 W
Where the circuit protection includes overcurrent protection and an
RCD or other earth fault protection, the current for the device with
the lowest disconnection current for the required disconnection
time will be used.
In order to comply, the calculated earth fault loop impedance has to
be equal to or greater than the maximum earth fault loop
impedance, i.e., Zs ≥ Max. Zs.
Disconnection Time – The disconnection time from the characteristic
is found on the maximum tolerance of the device characteristic using

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
the earth fault current. The earth fault current is calculated by

dividing the earth fault loop impedance into the phase to neutral
voltage, i.e., Uo/Zs.
The maximum disconnection time for circuits are found in BS
7671:2018, Table 41.1.
Adiabatic Check – The circuit protective conductor is subject to the
adiabatic check described in BS7671:2018, 543.1.3. This is a check to
ensure that the conductor will not be damaged by the heat energy
generated resulting from the earth fault current.
The check takes the form of a comparison between the section of the
conductor to be installed, and the minimum acceptable section
calculated thus: Min. S= √(I2t)/k. For compliance: Actual S≥ Min. S.
The section or sections (mm 2) of the conductors used are shown
together with their total section. Also shown, for comparison, is the
Min. S.
The value of k used in the Min. Scalculation is always the same as
that for the phase conductor. Where a protective conductor with a
material different to that of the phase conductor is used its section
has to be converted to be equivalent to the phase conductor
material; this converted value is shown in the Adiabatic Check
section.
Example: phase conductor copper, thermosetting insulation, k = 143;
CPCsteel wire armour, actual section = 131 mm 2, k = 46.
The section of armour shown for the Adiabatic check will be: 131 x
46/143 = 42.14
Earth Fault Current – Earth fault current is calculated by dividing the
earth fault loop impedance into the line to earth voltage, i.e., Uo/Zs.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Phase Fault Phase Fault Current – The maximum and minimum levels of
prospective fault current are calculated at each point in the network.
Maximum Phase Fault Current – The maximum value is calculated
assuming the lowest likely conductor operating temperature (20 °C)
resulting in the lowest resistance; and the fault configuration that
gives rise to the highest level of fault current. For a three-phase or
three-phase and neutral circuit, the configuration used for the
calculation is a three-phase symmetrical fault. For a single-phase
circuit a phase to neutral fault is assumed.
Minimum Phase Fault Current – The minimum value is calculated
using the conductor resistance increased by a multiplier to account
for a rise in temperature due to the flow of fault current. Also, the
fault configuration giving the lowest level of current is used. For a
three-phase circuit the configuration used for the calculation is a
phase to phase fault. For a three-phase and neutral circuit, the
phase to neutral configuration is used. For a single-phase circuit a
phase to neutral fault is assumed.
Protective Device Breaking Capacity – The ultimate breaking capacity
(Icu) of the circuit protective device is shown. This is the highest level
of fault current that the device is capable of interrupting safely. This
should be equal to or greater than the maximum phase fault current
at the source end of the circuit, otherwise an error message will be
given.
Where it is lower than Icu, the service breaking capacity (Ics) is
recommended to be equal to or greater than the maximum phase
fault current at the load end of the circuit. This is recommended as
good practice but is not a requirement.
Cascaded Rating – For certain combinations of upstream and
downstream circuit-breaker it is possible for the downstream device
to operate at levels of fault current higher than its ultimate breaking
capacity (Icu). These combinations are certified by the manufacturer
and listed in Back-up Protection or series rated tables. In the
Protection pane of the Cable dialog, the Back-up Protection selection
for the CPD Breaking Capacity is enabled only when a cascaded
combination of devices has been selected.
The cascaded rating has to be equal to or greater than the maximum
phase fault current at the source end of the circuit.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Adiabatic Check – The line conductors in each circuit are checked to

ensure that the adiabatic requirement is met, i.e., the fault current
does not cause the permitted limiting temperature of the conductor
to be exceeded. The check complies with BS7671:2018, 434.5.2.
Where the fault current is disconnected in less than 0.1 s, the CPD
Energy Let-through is compared to the amount of thermal energy
the cable can withstand without damage, the Adiabatic Limit k2S2.
Excessive let-through energy will result in an error message.
Where the fault disconnection exceeds 0.1 s, the Max. Disconnection
Time, calculated using k2S2/I2, is compared with the Actual
Disconnection Time. Where the actual disconnection time exceeds
the maximum an error message will be shown.
The check is performed either using the line fault current or the
earth fault current depending on which gives the highest level of
energy let-through.
Cable Analysis
Cable Analysis report details
The Cable Analysis report provides a detailed two page account of cable sizing results for
each cable in the project. The data is arranged in boxes, as follows:
Field Description
Circuit Details Shows the cable references, the network components between
which the cable is connected, and the load type to which the cable is
connected.
Project Settings The references of the active source at the time the report are shown;
the type of source, for example, TN, transformer; the voltage drop
limits settings. Also, where the switching of interconnections
between supply sources and the switchboard are saved, the name
of the Switching Scenario containing the settings.
(Where parallel sources have been selected, the total number in
parallel is shown. This option is only available in ProDesign versions,
ProDesign100 or later.)

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Cables The cable details, including: the type, length and size of the line
conductors. Also, the sizes and configuration of circuit protective
conductors used.
Cable Sizing The cable type, size, installation method and reference method.
Cables in Parallel Where parallel cables are used, if ‘Parallel Cables Spaced’ is selected,
it is assumed that the individual cables will be spaced more that two
cable diameters; consequently derating for grouping will not be
applied.
If parallel cables are not spaced they will be subject to the application
of the grouping rating factor Cg. This can be seen in the Rating Factor
table below.
Subject to Where cables are installed in groups, the way the rating factor Cg is
simultaneous applied is defined in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.1.2. with Equation 2
overload being used where a number of the cables in the group may be
overloaded at any one time: setting ‘Subject to simultaneous
overload’ checked. An example of such a condition would be parallel
cables where all the cables in one circuit would be subject to
overload together.
Where the cables in the group would not be expected to be
simultaneously overloaded (setting ‘Subject to simultaneous
overload’ unchecked) either Equation 3 or 4 would apply. This would
generally give a more economic result.
In the table listing cable sizing Parameters, the Rule alongside the
value of Iz shows which equation is being applied.
Rating Factor table For all the rating factors used in the cable sizing calculations, the
table shows the value of the factor used in the calculation, the
condition governing the setting, and where applicable, the BS
7671:2018 table from which the value is obtained.
In instances where Rating Factors have been defined by the user
(allowing to account for conditions not covered by regulations), a [u]
is shown next to the rating factor.
Rating Factor Ca The factor is dependent on the ambient temperature surrounding

the installation; air or ground temperature depending on the
installation method.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Rating Factor Cg The value of the factor will depend on the installation method and
the number of cables/circuits being grouped together. ‘Derating for x
circuits/cables’ reports the number used to determine the value of
Cg. This is normally the same as ‘Total number of Grouped Circuits’
but it can be reduced at the discretion of the user in the Grouping
pane of the Cable dialog.
Rating Factor Cc Set at 0.9 when the cable is installed in the ground using Installation
Methods 70 to 73 as described in BS7671:2018.
Rating Factor Ch Used to adjust cable ratings for circuits with loads containing a
percentage of 3rd harmonic current.
Rating Factor Ci Where cable is run through an appreciable thickness of thermally

insulating material, Ci is used modify the required cable rating to
compensate for the reduction in heat dissipation.
Thermal Resistivity For ground installation methods adjusts the required cable rating
Factor Cs according to the level of soil resistivity.
Cable Spacing For ground installation methods adjusts the required cable rating
Factor Cgg according to the spacing between grouped cables.
Depth of Lay For ground installation methods adjusts the required cable rating
Factor Cd according to the depth at which the cables are to be installed.
For BS7671:2018 Installation Methods 70 to 73, the depth is fixed at a
value of 0.7 m. Data is not given for other depths.
BS3036 Fuse Set at 0.725 when a BS3036 fuse is used.

Factor Cf
Parameters table The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device must be equal
to or greater than the design current (Ib). For a device with an
adjustable overload, its setting (Ir ) must be equal to or greater than
the design current (Ib). The required cable rating (Iz) is calculated
from the overcurrent protective device rating modified by the
various applicable rating factors. A cable size must be selected from
the tables (BS7671:2018, Table 4D1A, etc.) for the selected installation
method, with a tabulated rating (It) that is equal to or greater than
the required rating (Iz).
Error Condition Values marked with an asterisk (* ) indicate an error condition.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Voltage Drop Per Unit Cable Impedance (mV/A/m)

Values of resistance and reactance are taken from BS7671:2018,
Tables 4D1B, etc. The correct values are found in the column in the
table for the method of installation (Reference Method) being
employed.
Total Cable The total impedances are found by multiplying the per unit values by
Impedance (mΩ ) the total length of the cable.
Correction factor The rating factors Ca and Cg, together with the cable maximum
(Ct ) permitted normal operating temperature (t p), the design current (Ib)
and the cable tabulated rating (It ), are used to calculate the operating
temperature correction factor (Ct ) as defined in BS7671:2018,
Appendix 4 Section 6.1. The factor is applied as described in Section 6.3
to adjust the tabulated cable resistance (based on, for example 90
°C) to the resistance at the actual operating temperature at the
actual load current (which may be lower than the tabulated current).
Cable Energy Loss The amount of heat dissipation (I2r) in the cable both at the design
(W) current and when fully loaded.
Power Factor The values of power factor (PF) are used to apply correction for load
Correction power factor as described in BS7671:2018 Appendix 4 Section 6.2 and
6.3.
Voltage Drop The calculated voltage drops shown in ProDesign MEreports are
line-to-neutral values, e.g., L1 means L1 phase to neutral. It should
be borne in mind that where any of the line load currents differ
(unbalanced loads), there will be current flow in the neutral
conductor and, for each phase, the voltage drop will be calculated
from the complex sum of the line current and the neutral current.
This tends to complicate any hand calculation made when evaluating
the results shown. However, providing the phase load imbalance is
small, a standard hand calculation result should provide a good
approximation. Finally, remember when using a calculation giving a
three-phase voltage drop value, it is necessary to divide by √3 to
obtain a comparable result for the voltage drop in each phase.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Protective Devices Protective Device Settings

The type, rating, and all settings of protective device overcurrent and
earth fault functions are shown.
The protective device Rating (In) can be: Auto [a] – automatically set ;
Fixed [f] – set to a fixed value by the user.
The protective device Overload Setting (Ir ) can be: Auto [a]; Fixed [f];
Max. [m] – set to its maximum setting (usually the same as the device
rating).
Overcurrent Protection – The details shown are relevant to the
protection of the cable in the circuit, for overcurrent, earth fault and
adiabatic conditions; also the fault rating of the device used to
protect the cable.
Protective Device Sizing – For a device with a fixed overload, its Rating
(In) must be equal to greater than the Design Current (Ib), i.e., In ≥ Ib.
For a device with an adjustable overload, the Overload Setting Ir
must be equal to or greater than the Design Current Ib, i.e., Ir ≥ Ib.
For a motor circuit, the device Motor Rating must be equal to greater
than the design current (Ib), i.e., Motor Rating ≥ Ib.
Breaking Capacity – The Breaking Capacity of a fuse must be equal to
or greater than the maximum fault current* in the circuit being
protected, i.e., Breaking Capacity ≥ Maximum Fault Current.
The Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu) of a circuit -breaker must be
equal to or greater than the maximum fault current* in the circuit
being protected, i.e., Icu ≥ Maximum Fault Current.
* The maximum fault current is the greater of the following:
prospective short-circuit fault current (Pscc); earth fault current (Ief ).
Service Breaking Capacity– It is recommended that the Service
Breaking Capacity (Ics) should be equal to or greater than the
maximum fault current* at the load end of the circuit. The principle is,
that after interrupting the maximum possible level of fault current
that could occur at or beyond the load terminals, the condition of
the circuit-breaker should be such that it could safely operate to
interrupt a further fault. See BSEN 60947-2 for more details.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Back-up Protection – A circuit-breaker can be safely installed in a

circuit where the maximum fault current* is greater than its ultimate
breaking capacity providing it has a Cascaded Rating (otherwise
known as Back-up or Series rating) equal to or greater than the
maximum fault current* .
A Cascaded Rating can only be selected where the manufacturer
declares a cascaded rating for particular circuit-breaker working in
conjunction with a nominated upstream circuit-breaker type. The
reported value is shown as ‘No’ unless ‘Back-up Protection’ is
selected in the Protection tab of the Cable dialog.
Line Conductor The Line Conductor Adiabatic Check ensures that, in the event of a
Adiabatic Check fault current, the protective device will disconnect the fault before
the heat energy generated by the fault current raises the
temperature of the line conductors to a level liable to cause them to
be permanently damaged.
The fault current could be caused by either a phase fault or an earth
fault condition.
Where the disconnection time is instantaneous (<0.1 s), the energy
let-through (A2s) (from manufacturer’s data) is compared to the
cable withstand (k2S2). The cable is protected if: A2s≤ k2S2.
Where the disconnection time is not instantaneous (>0.1 s), a Max.
Disconnection Time is calculated using: k2S2/Ifmin2. Providing the
actual disconnection time is less than the maximum time, the cable is
protected. Generally, using the minimum fault current is considered
to provide the most arduous test, the principle being that a lower
fault current will give rise to a longer disconnection time, which will
potentially result in a higher temperature rise. ProDesign ME
performs the test for both maximum and minimum fault currents
and earth fault current.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Earth Fault The values of all the separate components of Zs are shown. Note: the
Protection values are the vector sums (Z = r + jx), therefore the total (Zs) shown
Earth Fault Loop will not be the arithmetic sum of the values shown for Ze, Z1 and Z2,
Impedance Zs except when the earth fault power factor is 1.0.
Max. Earth Fault The value is obtained by inspection of the maximum tolerance of the
Loop Impedance characteristic of the protective device. The disconnection current (Ia)
Max. Zs corresponding to the maximum permitted disconnection time (e.g.,
0.4 s) is found from the characteristic, and Max. Zs is found from (Cmin
x Uo) / Ia (see BS7671:2018 Appendix 3).
An error will be indicated where Zs is greater than Max Zs.
Earth Fault The actual disconnection time is found from the maximum tolerance
Disconnection of the characteristic of the protective device for the calculated level of
Time earth fault current.
The maximum disconnection time depends the applied voltage,
supply type and circuit type. E.g., Uo = 230 V, TN supply, final circuit
with Ib ≤ 32 A; maximum disconnection time = 0.4 s (see BS7671:2018
411.3.2).
An error will be indicated where the actual disconnection time
exceeds the maximum for the circuit type.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Circuit Protective The table shows the k value, actual section, and equivalent section
Conductor (CPC) for each of the conductors used as CPC.
Details The k value is obtained from BS7671:2018, Tables 54.3, 54.4, 54.5.
The actual section will be the size of a separate or integral conductor
or, in the case of a cable armour, the total cross-section of the steel
or aluminium strands comprising the armour.
The equivalent section becomes a necessary part of the adiabatic
calculation where two CPCconductors with different k values are to
be used. For example, where the armour is used with an integral
conductor, the k value for the armour may be 46 (k2) and for the
integral conductor 143 (k1). To perform the adiabatic check S= √(I2t) /
k, it would be necessary to convert both CPCconductors to the same
k base.
The equivalent section of the armour to the same base as the
integral conductor will be: actual section x k1/k2. So, if the actual
section were 128 mm 2, the equivalent section would be 128 x 46/143
= 41.17 mm 2. This section can then be added to the integral
conductor section to check that the total section meets the
minimum section requirement.
An error will be indicated where the Total CPCis less than the
minimum (Min. S)
Cable Schedule
Cable Schedule report details
Field Description
Connected The network components between which the cable is connected.

From/To

10 Reports Tab
Field Description

CSA The size of the circuit phase cable in mm 2.
dialog.
CPC The size in mm 2 of a separate conductor used as the circuit protective

Separate/Integral conductor and/or an integral conductor used as CPC.
Volt Drop The calculated voltage drop for the specified length of cable as a
percentage of the applied phase to neutral voltage.
Busbar Summary
Busbar Summary report details
Field Description
Id No./Name The identity of the busbar.
Location Text from the Location box in the Optional tab in the Busbar dialog.
Rating The current rating of each busbar system at its rated temperature.
Length The total length of busbar in each busbar system.
Diversified Load The diversified load current for each phase in the highest loaded
busbar section. The diversified load is the total connected load
factored by any diversity settings, which may be made at any tap-off,
board or load.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Protective Device The rating and type of the next protective device directly upstream
from the busbar system, that is, the device which is effectively
protecting the busbar. Its rating should be equal to or greater than
the diversified load in the highest loaded busbar section.
CPC Type of busbar connection used to provide a circuit protective

conductor, that is, integral busbar, busbar casing, or busbar +
casing. The choices available depend on the facilities provided by the
selected busbar type.
Busbar Calculation
Busbar Calculation report details
Data relating to the selection of the complete busbar system are arranged in boxes
according to subject areas, as described below.
At the foot of the report there is a table showing data relevant to each individual section of
the busbar system.
A separate report is produced for each separate busbar system.
Field Description
Busbar The busbar system reference, the reference of the cable supplying it
and the supply source active at the time the report is produced.
Also, shown are Location, Function and Comments, the details of
which can be entered in the Optional Data and Comments tabs of
the Busbar dialog.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Protective Device Details of the overcurrent protective device directly upstream of the
busbar system which is effectively providing its protection.
The Rating and Overload Setting are annotated with the following:
when the project is calculated the appropriate setting will be
automatically made to meet protection requirements for the
circuit. The report shows the value of the automatic setting.
l [f] indicates a fixed setting value applied by the user. The value
will be unaffected by the calculation.
l [m] indicates that the overload setting is set to maximum. This
means that, even if the design current is relatively low, the cable
will be sized to handle a level of continuous load current equal to
the maximum overload setting.
Busbar Details The busbar type, rating, number of phases, number of poles and
length are shown.
Type The busbar rating is the declared by the manufacturer for the
normal ambient operating temperature. It can be set:
l [a] Auto setting: from the ratings available for the selected
busbar type, the calculation process will select the lowest rating
that satisfies the sizing requirements (see Busbar Sizing below).
l [m] Manual setting: a fixed value of busbar rating has been
selected by the user.
Installation Busbars can be installed in a horizontal or vertical run. Generally,

Method busbars designed to be run horizontally will have lower rating when
run vertically. Conversely, busbars designed to be used as risers will
normally be fully rated when installed vertically. Depending on the
manufacturer data, a rating factor may be applied when ‘Vertical’ is
selected (see Correction factors below).

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Fault Ratings Busbars need to be adequately rated to withstand the peak level of
current during the first half-cycle of a fault current (kA peak). The
calculation compares the prospective peak fault current with the
peak withstand of the busbar and if the busbar rating is not
adequate an error message will be generated.
Similarly, the busbar needs to withstand a level of fault current for a
period of time (kA rms/s). The calculation checks if the prospective
fault current (kA rms) is within the rating for the busbar and that the
energy let-through of the device (I2t) protecting the busbar does not
exceed the withstand declared for the busbar. Again an error
message results from a failure of this test.
CPC Type of busbar connection used to provide a circuit protective

conductor, i.e., integral busbar, busbar casing, or busbar + casing –
the choices available depending on the facilities provided by the
selected busbar type.
Rating Factors The rating factors shown are used in the busbar sizing calculations
(see Busbar Sizing below).
Temperature The ambient temperature in which the busbar is installed. The rating
factor Ca will have a value of 1.00 at the ambient temperature on
which the manufacturer bases the busbar load rating.
Installation Factor The value of the rating factor is dependent on the Installation
Method (Horizontal/Vertical) and the manufacturer data (see Busbar
Details above).
Harmonics Where the load in the busbar includes a proportion of 3rd harmonic
current, a rating factor (Ch) is applied, the same as for cables,
according to the table in BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.5.
Busbar Sizing The variables used in the busbar sizing calculations are shown.
Design Current The Design Current (Ib) is the total diversified load current in the
most heavily loaded section of the busbar system.
Device Rating The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device directly
upstream of the busbar system, which has to be equal to or greater
than the design current, i.e., In ≥ Ib.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Overload Setting For a circuit protective device with an adjustable overload, this is the
value (Ir ) to which it is set. The overload setting has to be equal to or
greater than the design current, i.e., Ir ≥ Ib.
Actual Cable The load rating (It ) of the selected busbar type. The rating is provided
Rating by the manufacturer.
The load rating must be equal to or greater than the protective
device rating divided by the rating factors described above, i.e.:
It ≥ In/(Ca x Ch x Installation Factor)
or for a protective device with an adjustable overload:
It ≥ Ir /(Ca x Ch x Installation Factor).
Busbar Sections A table contains the following for each of the busbar sections.
From/To The references of the components (end feed, centre feed or tap off)
between which the busbar section is connected.
Length The length of the busbar section.
Fault Level The level of fault current at the tap off at the end of the busbar
section. The maximum (calculated at 20 °Cconductor temperature)
and minimum levels (calculated at the conductor average fault
temperature) are shown.
Zs The earth fault loop impedance Zs at the tap off at the end of the
busbar section.
Voltage Drop The percentage voltage drop at the tap off at the end of the busbar
section. The value given is the total from the supply source to this
point.
Section Load The diversified load in the busbar section.
Busbar Schedule
Busbar Schedule report details
For each busbar system, the report contains a panel containing general data followed by a
table listing data for each tap off.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Busbar The busbar system reference, the reference of the cable supplying it
and the supply source active at the time the report is produced.
The Location, Function and Comments, the details of which can be
entered in the Optional Data and Comments panes of the Busbar
dialog.
The busbar type description and rating.
Tap Off The references of the tap off.

Id No./Name
Connected To The references of the cable connected to the tap off.
Protective Device The type of overcurrent and earth fault protective devices installed at
the tap off.
Load The diversified and total connected load in the circuit connected to
the tap off.
Loads Summary
Loads Summary report details
The report first summarises the loadings at each board and then for the total project.
Field Description
Board Loadings
Id No./Name The references of each of the boards.
Voltage The voltage at the board.
Connected Load The total connected load and power factor in each phase for each
board. The total connected load is the sum of all connected loads,
ignoring any diversity settings.
Diversified Load The diversified load and power factor in each phase for each board.
The diversified load is the sum of all connected loads factored by any
diversity settings. Diversity settings can be applied either at a board
or at individual loads.
Overall Diversity For each board, the total of all diversity settings applicable in each
phase.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
kW For each board, both the connected and the diversified power
loadings in kW.
kVAr For each board, both the connected and the diversified reactive
power loadings in kVAr.
kVA For each board, both the connected and the diversified apparent
power loadings in kVA.
Project Loadings
Total Connected The total connected load and power factor in each phase at the
Load supply source.
Total Diversified The total diversified load and power factor in each phase at the
Load supply source.
Power The total project power consumption in kW, kVAr, kVA.
Loads Schedule
Loads Schedule report details
For each board, the report lists data relevant to the board followed by a table containing
data for each final circuit connected to the board.
Field Description
Board Data
Id No./Name The references of the board.
Board Rating The load current rating of the board as provided by the user in the
Optional Data pane of the Board dialog.
Fault Rating The fault rating of the board as provided by the user in the Optional
Data pane of the Board dialog.
No. of Ways The total number of available ways in the board.
Spare % The percentage of the total number of ways not occupied by circuits.
Model No. A text description as provided by the user in the Optional Data pane
of the Board dialog.
Board Load The total connected and diversified loads connected to each phase
of the board.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Circuit Data
Id No./Name The references of the load.
Load type The load type description.
Connected Load The connected load and power factor.
Diversity The load diversity setting, applied in the Details pane of the Load
dialog.
Motor For motor loads, the electrical rating of the motor and its efficiency.
Rating/Efficiency
3rd Harmonic The percentage of third harmonic current in the circuit load current.
Lamps For Street Lighting circuits, the number of lamps in the circuit and
their power rating.
Loads Analysis
Loads Analysis report details
A pie chart graphical representation of the percentage and types of loads for the whole
project and for each board.
The loads are divided into Lighting, Heating/Cooling, Motors, and General Loads.
Street Lighting Schedule

Street Lighting Schedule report details
Field Description
Id No./Name The references of the street lighting load.
Phase The phase to which the street lighting load is connected.
Cable The size of the cable supplying the street lighting load.
No. of Cores The circuit cable makeup details.

Cable Type The type of cable supplying the lighting load.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Length The length of the cable supplying the lighting load.
Separate CPC The size of separate circuit protective conductor used. N/A indicates
that a separate CPCis not used (e.g., integral conductor of a
multicore cable used as CPC).
Protective Device Shows the rating and type (Fuse/MCB/MCCB) of protective device.
RCD The residual operating current (IΔn) of a residual current device

where used. N/A indicates that no RCD is being used.
Surge Protective Device Schedule

Surge Protective Device Schedule report details
Field Description
SPD ID/Name The references of the Surge Protective Device.
Connected To The references of where the Surge Protective Device is connected to.
ID/Name
Type The Type of Surge Protective Device.
Manufacturer The manufacturer of the Surge Protective Device.
Model The model of the Surge Protective Device.
Part Number The part number of the Surge Protective Device
Max Backup The maximum backup rating permitted by the Surge Protective
Rating (A) Device.
Fault Rating (kA) The maximum fault rating sustained by the Surge Protective Device.
Circuit Chart
Circuit Chart report details
There are two boxes at the top of the report, one containing board data, the other
incomer details. Below these is a table listing data for all the circuits connected to the
board. There is a separate report for each board.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Board Data The references of the board.
Id No./Name
Board Rating The load current rating of the board as provided by the user in the
Optional Data pane of the Board dialog.
Fault Rating The fault rating of the board as provided by the user in the Optional
Data pane of the Board dialog.
No. of Ways The total number of available ways in the board.
Spare % The percentage of the total number of ways not occupied by circuits.
Model No. A text description as provided by the user in the Optional Data pane
of the Board dialog.
Ze The external earth fault loop impedance at the board incoming

terminals. The note ‘Local Earthing at Board’ is shown where the
board has a local earth connection.
Circuit Details
Cable/Load Id The references of the circuit cable or the load to which it is

No./Name connected, depending on the selection of report: Circuit Chart /
Cable or Circuit Chart / Load.
Protective Device The nominal rating and overload setting of the circuit protective
conductor. Where the device is not equipped with an overload
setting, this is indicated by ‘N/A’.
RCD The residual operating current (IΔn) of a residual current device

where used. N/A indicates that no RCD is being used.
Conductors The size of the line conductors and the size of separate circuit
protective conductor used. N/A indicates that a separate CPCis not
used (e.g., integral conductor of a multicore cable used as CPC).
Protective Device Settings

Protective Device Settings report details
For each protective device, the report contains the following data.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Id No./Name The references of the cable being protected by the circuit protective
device.
Max Phase Fault The maximum calculated level of fault current at the point to which
Current the device is connected.
Earth Fault The calculated earth fault current through the cable being protected
Current by the circuit protective device.
Breaking Capacity The maximum level of fault current that the protective device is able
to interrupt. If this value is not equal to or greater than both the max.
phase fault current and the earth fault current, an error message will
be produced.
Device The type of circuit protective device.
Rating The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device.
Design Current The diversified load current Ib in the cable being protected by the
circuit protective device.
Settings Details of all the protective device protection settings. These are
listed under four headings:
o Overload (L). Settings intended to operate for overload
conditions, i.e., excess current in an undamaged circuit.
o Selective Short-circuit. Settings intended to operate for fault
conditions with a time-delay to allow selectivity (selectivity) with a
device nearer the load.
o Instantaneous. Settings intended to operate for fault conditions
without any intentional time-delay. May not provide selectivity
with a device nearer the load.
o Earth Fault (G). Settings intended to respond to earth faults only.
For each setting, the identity of the setting together with the setting
value is given. This data corresponds to that in the graphical
representation in Protect and the detail on the physical device.
Protective Device Commissioning

Protective Device Commissioning report details
For each protective device, the report contains the following data.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Id No./Name The references of the cable being protected by the circuit protective
device.
Max Phase Fault The maximum calculated level of fault current at the point to which
Current the device is connected.
Earth Fault The calculated earth fault current through the cable being protected
Current by the circuit protective device.
Breaking Capacity The maximum level of fault current that the protective device is able
to interrupt. If this value is not equal to or greater than both the max.
phase fault current and the earth fault current, an error message will
be produced.
Device The type of circuit protective device.
Rating The nominal rating (In) of the circuit protective device.
Design Current The diversified load current Ib in the cable being protected by the
circuit protective device.
Settings Details of all the protective device protection settings. These are
listed under four headings:
l Overload (L). Settings intended to operate for overload
conditions, i.e., excess current in an undamaged circuit.
l Selective Short-circuit. Settings intended to operate for fault
conditions with a time-delay to allow selectivity (selectivity) with a
device nearer the load.
l Instantaneous. Settings intended to operate for fault conditions
without any intentional time-delay. May not provide selectivity
with a device nearer the load.
l Earth Fault (G). Settings intended to respond to earth faults only.
For each setting, the identity of the setting together with the setting
value is given. This data corresponds to that in the graphical
representation in Protect and the detail on the physical device.
Commissioning Space is left on the report for hand written commissioning

Information information, such as the name and signature of the commissioning
engineer and the commissioning date. There is also a space for
Comments.

10 Reports Tab
Energy-based Selectivity
Energy-based Selectivity report details
This is one of two reports relating to selectivity and covers selectivity between devices
under fault conditions. For fuses this is determined by consideration of energy levels in the
devices. For circuit-breakers results are based on data supplied by the manufacturer of the
devices.
Results are given for each pair of devices between which selectivity needs to be
considered.
Both reports needs to be considered when making a complete assessment of selectivity.
Field Description
Id No. The reference of both the protective devices: upstream (nearest the
supply) and downstream (nearest the load).
Protective Device The type description of both the upstream and the downstream
Type protective device.
Rating The nominal rating In of both the upstream and the downstream
protective device.
Selectivity Data When the upstream device is a fuse the following data is shown:
Fuse Protection For the downstream device, the let-through energy is shown: the
total amount of energy let-through (A2s) the fuse in the process of
totally interrupting the fault current.
For the upstream device, the pre-arc value is shown: the quantity of
energy required to cause the fuse element to melt.
Providing the let-through energy is less than the pre-arc, selectivity
will be maintained.
Status shows the result of the selectivity check: Okay or Error.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Circuit-breaker When the upstream device is a circuit-breaker the following data is

Protection shown:
The selectivity limit declared by the manufacturer.
The maximum prospective fault current (Pscc) at the point of
installation of the downstream device.
Providing the Pscc does not exceed the selectivity limit, selectivity will
be maintained.
Status shows the result of the selectivity check: Okay, Error, or No
Data.
NOTE– Where the devices in a pair are not produced by the same
manufacturer and no selectivity data will be available. In such cases,
‘No Data’ will appear in the Selectivity Limit and Status columns.
Time-Current Selectivity
Time-Current Selectivity report details
This is one of two reports relating to selectivity. The time-current operating characteristics
of each pair of devices is compared and any overlaps are reported (overlaps represent
conditions under which the downstream device could operate causing a loss of selectivity).
Results are given for each pair of devices between which selectivity needs to be
considered.
Both reports needs to be considered when making a complete assessment of selectivity.
Field Description
Id No. The reference of both the protective devices: upstream (nearest the
supply) and downstream (nearest the load).
Protective Device The type description of both the upstream and the downstream
Type protective device.
Rating The nominal rating In of both the upstream and the downstream
protective device.
Characteristics For any overlap the range of current over which the overlap occurs is
Overlap given. Over such a range, selectivity cannot be assured. Overlaps
above the Pscc (see below), which do not affect selectivity, are not
considered.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Pscc The maximum prospective fault current at the point of installation of

the downstream device.
Status Shows the result of the selectivity check: Okay, Error.
Voltage Drop – Circuits

Voltage Drop – Circuits report details
This is one of two reports that provide data on voltage drops at all parts of a project.
The report contains a panel giving general data followed by a table that shows the voltage
drops and related data for each circuit in the project.
Field Description
Active Source The reference of the supply source active at the time the report was
produced.
Supply Type The type of supply relevant to standard voltage drop limits as
defined in BS7671:2018 , i.e., Public, Private.
Voltage The voltage at the supply as defined by the user in the Voltage pane
of the Source dialog. The reported voltage drops are calculated
beginning from the value given.
Conductor Auto- The sizing of cables and busbars can be carried out to comply with
sizing current-carrying capacity only, or with both current-carrying
capacity and voltage drop. These settings are made in the Voltage
Drop Settings dialog in the Active Source.
Circuit Id The circuit references.

No./Name
Cable/Busbar Shows whether the conductor in the circuit is a busbar or cable.
Size/Rating The size of the cable in the circuit or the rating of the busbar:
l [a] denotes the size/rating set to Auto
l [f] denotes the size rating fixed by the user
No. in Parallel In the case of cables, the number of parallel conductors.
Length The length of the circuit conductor.
Load The diversified load Ib and power factor in each phase of the circuit.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Voltage Drop Each voltage drops is shown as an actual value and as a percentage
of the supply voltage.
The voltage drops are shown in each phase and both in ‘This circuit’
and ‘From Source’. ‘This circuit’ means only the voltage drop within
the length of this circuit. ‘From Source’ means the total voltage drop
from the project supply terminals to the load end of this circuit.
Conductor The load (Ib) in the circuit as a percentage of the current-carrying

Loading capacity of the circuit conductor.
Conductor Temp. The operating temperature of the circuit conductor at the stated
load (Ib).
Voltage Drop – Loads

Voltage Drop – Loads report details
drops and related data for each load in the project. For each load, details are given for all
circuits from the supply up to and including the final circuit.
Field Description
Active Source The reference of the supply source active at the time the report was
produced.
Supply Type The type of supply relevant to standard voltage drop limits as
defined in BS7671:2018 , i.e., Public, Private.
Voltage The voltage at the supply as defined by the user in the Voltage tab of
the Source dialog. The reported voltage drops are calculated
beginning from the value given.
Conductor Auto- The sizing of cables and busbars can be carried out to comply with
sizing current-carrying capacity only, or with both current-carrying
capacity and voltage drop. These settings are made in the Voltage
Drop Settings dialog for the Active Source.
Load Id No./Name The load circuit references.
Circuits Lists the references of all circuits from the source to the load final
circuit.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Cable/Busbar Shows whether the conductor in the circuit is a busbar or cable.
Size/Rating The size of the cable in the circuit or the rating of the busbar.
l [a] denotes the size/rating set to Auto
l [f] denotes the size rating fixed by the user.
No. in Parallel In the case of cables, the number of parallel conductors.
Load The diversified load Ib and power factor in each phase of the circuit.
The load type (Lighting, Non-Lighting) as it is relevant to the voltage
drop limits set down in BS7671:2018 .
Actual Voltage Voltage drops are shown as actual values and as percentages of the
Drop supply voltage.
Per Circuit – The actual voltage drop is given for each circuit between
the supply and the load.
Total – The cumulative voltage drop at the end of each circuit
between the supply and the load.
Voltage Drop Limit – The limit set for voltage drop from the supply to the final
Setting circuit.
Setting – Describes whether the voltage drop limit is the standard
value from BS7671:2018 or one set by the user.
Voltage at Load Actual – The actual voltage at the terminals of the load (supply
voltage minus voltage drop).
Limit – The minimum permissible voltage at the load terminals
(supply voltage minus voltage drop limit).
Voltage Drop – Max Length for Voltage Drop

Voltage Drop – Max Length for Voltage Drop report details
drops and related data for each load in the project. For each load, details are given for all
circuits from the supply up to and including the final circuit.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
ID No / Name The references of the circuit.
Connected The references of where the circuit is connected from and to

From/To

CSA The size of the circuit phase cable in mm 2.
Voltage Drop Voltage drops are shown as actual values and as percentages of the
supply voltage.
Per Circuit – The actual voltage drop is given for each circuit between
the supply and the load.
Total – The cumulative voltage drop at the end of each circuit
between the supply and the load.
Max Length for Shows the maximum length of the circuit before the voltage drop
Voltage Drop exceeds applicable limits.
Zs Measurement
Zs Measurement report details
ProDesign MEcalculates the earth fault loop impedance for each circuit in a project. When
the results given by the design project are compared with the actual installation, it is
necessary to correct the calculated design results to the temperature at which the
measurements are made. The report shows both uncorrected and corrected values so
that a comparison can be made.
Data for circuits are grouped by boards (or the supply in the case of the main cable). For
each board there is a list with a header identifying the board to which the listed circuits are
connected.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Distribution Board The references of the board (or supply in the case of the main cable)
to which the circuits in the following list are connected.
Circuit Details The references of the circuit.

The system voltage.
The maximum earth fault disconnection time for the circuit.
Uo – Line to earth voltage (the Single Phase Supply Voltage in the
dialog for the project Active Source);
Max. Disconnection Time: as in BS7671:2018, Table 41.5 for the circuit
type, or as set in the Load Details dialog.
ProDesign Calculated Values
For each circuit, the report lists:
l Max Zs – The maximum permitted earth fault loop impedance
calculate from the (System Voltage x Cmin) divided by the
minimum Earth Fault Current (Ief ) required to disconnect the
protective device in the Max. Disconnection Time.
l Ief – The minimum earth fault current required to ensure
disconnection in the specified maximum time.
l Corrected Zs – The earth fault loop impedance calculated by
ProDesign corrected (using a factor of 0.8) to give an equivalent
impedance at room temperature (0.8 x Uo/Ief ).
BS7671:2018 Appendix 14
For each circuit, the report lists:
l Ia – The level of earth fault current required to ensure
disconnection within the max. disconnection time (obtained from
the protective device characteristic in ProDesign);
l Corrected Max. Zs – The maximum earth fault loop impedance
corrected (using a factor of 0.8) to give an equivalent impedance
at room temperature 0.8 x (Cmin x Uo)/Ia.
Measured Earth For each circuit, the report lists:

Fault Loop l Zs (m) – Space to record the measured earth fault loop
Impedance impedance. Its value should be equal to or less than the
Corrected Max Zs shown in the previous column.
l Comments – Space to insert comments.

10 Reports Tab
Cable Energy Loss

Cable Energy Loss report details
The report shows energy losses in the cables in each circuit and the combined total of all
the circuit losses for the whole project. Additionally, estimated levels of CO2 emissions
caused by these losses are reported. Reported values are shown for a range of duty cycles
from 20 to 100 %.
CO2 Emissions
The annual level of CO2 emissions attributed to the cable energy losses are calculated by
multiplying the annual losses by a conversion factor.
The conversion factor used is 0.537 and is taken from:
http://www.nef.org.uk/greencompany/co2calculator.htm
The value used is based on the forecast mix of generating methods to be used to provide
power to the grid in the next five years.
Emissions are calculated as follows:
Annual CO2 (kg) = WTA x 0.537
Motor Starting Voltage Drop Assessment

Motor Starting Voltage Drop Assessment report details
The report shows voltage drop levels for both normal load conditions and during motor
starting. The motor starting voltage drop takes into account the increased current during
the starting of the motors set to ‘Assess Voltage Drop on Starting’ in the Details pane of the
Motor dialog.
The following details are shown for all circuits affected by the increase in voltage drop
during starting.
Field Description
Circuit References The ID number and name of each circuit.
Motor References The ID number and name of each motor or, for each sub-main
circuit, the references of the connected distribution board.
Rating For each motor circuit, the rating of the motor in kW.
Phase The circuit phase connections.
Starting Current The starting current and power factor.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Running Current The starting current and power factor; i.e., the normal load
current/power factor.
Voltage Drop – The voltage drop during motor starting shown both as a voltage and
With Motor as a percentage of the system voltage. The cumulative value of
Starting voltage drop from the source to the load terminals is shown as well
as the voltage drop in the circuit.
Voltage Drop – The voltage drop under normal load conditions.

Without Motor
Starting
Harmonic Assessment
Harmonic Assessment report details
The report shows levels of harmonic current at each board. The values shown are
summed from the values entered by the user in the Detailspane of the Load and Motor
dialogs.
For each board, the following information is listed.
Field Description
Board References The ID number and name of each board.
3rd Harmonic (%) The third harmonic content as a percentage of the load current,
shown for each line and neutral.
3rd Harmonic (A) The third harmonic current, shown for each line and neutral.
Notes
A text file lists the titles and contents of any Notes placed on the single-line diagram.
Power Factor Correction

The report shows power factor correction unit details, such as existing power factor and
target conditions. The capacitance (in kVAr) required to meet the target power factor is
also shown.
For each power factor correction unit, the following information is listed.
Field Description
Id No./Name The references of the power factor correction unit.

10 Reports Tab
Field Description
Target Power The target power factor, as entered by the user in the power factor
Factor correction unit dialog.
Existing The existing conditions at the board to which the power factor
Conditions correction unit is connected. Expressed in kW, kVAr, kVA and power
factor.
Target Conditions The conditions which will exist at the board to which the power
factor correction unit is connected if the suggested capacitance is
applied. Expressed in kW, kVAr, kVA and power factor.
Capacitance The capacitance (in kVAr) required to meet the target power factor
Required

11
Import/Export tab
Use the features in this tab to import and export data.

You can also configure the ProDesign software with Autodesk Revit MEP, so that circuit
information defined in Revit MEP can be imported to ProDesign and after ProDesign has
performed comprehensive design calculations, the results that ProDesign calculates can
be returned to Revit and associated with the relevant circuit components in the original
Revit model.
In this section:
Revit group, page 457
Import group, page 459
Export group, page 460
Other group, page 466

11 Import/Export tab
Revit group
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Revit.
Revit MEP is a Building Information Modelling (BIM) application produced by Autodesk
www.autodesk.co.uk/
Circuit information defined in Revit MEP is used by ProDesign ME
This feature requires Autodesk Revit MEP and Amtech ProDesign software to be installed
on the same computer.
Trimble ProDesign can be configured to link with:
l Autodesk Revit 2018
In this section:
l Configure Revit Link
Configure Revit Link in ProDesign

To access these settings, select Import/Export / Revit / Configure Revit Link.
The link between Autodesk Revit and the ProDesign software must be enabled before any
data can be transferred.
Ensure that Autodesk Revit MEP is not currently open. The Revit/ProDesign add-in
functions cannot be configured while Revit is open.
The Configure Revit link menu option does the following:

l Checks whether if a version of Autodesk Revit is installed on the same computer as the
ProDesign software.
l Asks you to decide which version of Revit should be linked with (where more than one
version is detected).


Import group
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Import.
Enables data to be imported.
Import from FastTest

To access these settings, select Import/Export / Import / Import from FastTest.
Allows a single-line diagram to be imported from the FastTest software.
Import from eloCAD

To access these settings, select Import/Export / Import / Import from eloCAD.
Allows a single-line diagram to be imported from the ELO CAD software.
Import Legacy Project

To access these settings, select Import/Export / Import / Import Legacy Project.
Enables legacy .p17 and .p17x project files to be imported into and converted to a .p18x file.
Once you have completed all the required changes in the converter tool, click OKand your
file will be converted.

Export group
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Export.
Enables data to be exported.
Export to Protect
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Export / Export to Protect.
Exports the selected ProDesign circuit data to the Protect software.
Select a network component and click Export to Protect. This will create a route-back-to-
source selectivity study that can be viewed, saved, and printed in Protect.
NOTE– This study is independent from the ProDesign project from which it was
created. Therefore, any changes in the study, such as changes to settings, has no
affect on the settings in the ProDesign project from which it originated. Conversely,
any subsequent changes in the ProDesign project has no affect on the Protect
study.
Protect Export – Circuit Selector

When you click Protect Export or View Graph while a distribution board or consumer unit
containing outgoing circuits is highlighted, a pop-up dialog appears asking you to select an
outgoing circuit for export to Protect.

If you want to include an outgoing circuit, click on the required row and click OK.
Alternatively, you can clear the Include an outgoing circuit to export check box.
Export to FastTest
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Export / Export to FastTest.
Exports ProDesign project data to the FastTest software.
Export to Image
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Export / Export to Image.
Saves the current project drawing as a .png file.
Export to DXF
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Export / Export to DXF.
Saves the current project drawing as a .dxf file.

Export MESchedules
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Export / Export MESchedules.
In ProDesign ME, board schedules are automatically created and made available for export
in Microsoft Excel format. The schedules are intended to provide documentation for
design approval. The types and formats of schedules provided depend on the Regulatory
Authority selected in the Project Settings.
Exporting Schedules
Click Export MESchedules.
The export process will produce DEWA or ADDCschedules (see below) depending on the
Regulatory Authority selected in the Project Settings.
The project is automatically calculated before the export routine starts to ensure that the
data contained in the exported schedules are up to date. If calculation errors are found,
you are offered the choice to either cancel the export process or to continue.
At the start of the export process, a dialog appears containing:
l A selectable list of the schedules to be produced.
See Export ADDCSchedules and Export DEWA Schedules.
l The destination folder for the exported files.
l Warnings: A notification if the pre-calculation process resulted in errors; the existing
Excel files that will be overwritten by the export process.

Click Export to start the export process. At the end a message box appears that lists the
created schedules, which will then be available at the selected destination:
Clicking Open in Excel automatically opens Excel and displays an index sheet listing all the
available schedules:

Click the name of any of the listed schedules to display it.
Editing schedules
Any cells in a schedule containing data will be locked to prevent inadvertent alteration of
calculated data. Other cells containing annotation text and so on can be edited to suit.
Columns widths and row heights can be freely adjusted.
Where necessary, to amend data in locked cells, the sheet can be unlocked (select Review /
Unprotect Sheet); no password is required:
When exporting schedules using a version of Excel earlier than the 2010 version, a
message will be displayed. This message relates to compatibility issues between
earlier versions of Excel and recently created files. The schedules can still be
exported correctly but the installation of an up-to-date version is recommended.

Export ADDCSchedules
The following schedules are provided:
l Main Distribution Schedule. Refers to the board in the ProDesign project connected to
the supply transformer.
l Sub-Main Distribution Board Schedule. Refers to all boards in the ProDesign project,
except the board connected to the supply and any MEtype distribution boards.
l Load Distribution Schedule (LDS). Refers to all MEtype boards in the project.
Apart from the LDS, data for these schedules is taken from the ProDesign MEcalculation
results output. Some of the fields in the schedules require data that is not available from
the ProDesign software; you will need to complete these fields.
See also:
l Export MESchedules
Export DEWASchedules
The following schedules are provided:
l Transformer Summary. Refers to the supply transformer in the ProDesign project.
l LVPanel Schedule. Refers to the board in the ProDesign project connected to the
supply transformer.
l Sub-Main Distribution Board Schedule. Refers to all boards in the ProDesign project
except the board connected to the supply and any MEtype distribution boards.
l Load Distribution Schedule (LDS). Refers to all MEtype boards in the project.
Apart from the LDS, data for these schedules is taken from the ProDesign MEcalculation
results output. Some of the fields in the schedules require data that is not available from
the ProDesign software; you will need to complete these fields.
See also:
l Export MESchedules

Other group
To access these settings, select Import/Export / Other.
Pack
This is a shortcut to the Project Setting / Attachments Manager pane.
This feature enables you to associate documentation files, such as images and PDFfiles, to
each component. For example, technical literature relating to an air conditioning load
could be attached to the relevant ProDesign Load item, which enables easy access to this
information.
Type
The Attachment Manager can be used to add or modify attached files associated with any
component in your ProDesign project.
To add an attachment, click Add and browse to the required file.
Double-click on a row number to open an attached file, or select the row and click Open.
To disassociate an attachment select the row and click Remove. Note that if multiply
attachment are attached, check which attachment is highlighted.
The Attachment Manager allows you to filter by each column header, in the same way that
Microsoft Excel filters are used.
Unpack
The Unpack option enables a packed set of attachment files to be unpacked ready for use.
Send
Opens the email editor and creates a new email message with the file for the project in the
active window attached.
Mail Recipient: The To field is left blank ready for you to enter email addresses.

12
FAQs
How do I find my Amtech Licence number?
Your Amtech Licence number can be found in the following locations:
l From the Help menu, select the About option.
l From the Support menu, select the Contact Amtech option.
The number is also found on the Software Licence Card supplied with your initial package.
Why do I get Earth Loop Impedance error messages?

There is a requirement for a circuit to be automatically disconnected under earth fault
conditions within the time specified by BS7671:2018, Table 41.1. The overcurrent protective
device must provide that disconnection, unless the circuit is equipped with an RCD. The
level of earth fault current must be sufficient to ensure that the operating time of the
protective device is less than the specified maximum disconnection time. This is checked
by:
l calculating the circuit earth fault loop impedance Zs (Zs = Ze + Z1 + Z2).
l dividing Zs into the line to earth voltage to find the level of earth fault Ief (Ief = (Cmin x
Uo)/Zs).
l using the earth fault current to find the disconnection time from the protective device
tripping characteristic.
l comparing the disconnection time with the permitted maximum.
A time exceeding the permitted maximum leads to an error message. The error message
gives the maximum level of impedance (Max Zs) that will allow compliance.
Common conditions leading to a failure to comply are:
l Extensive circuit length – leads to high impedance of line conductor (Z1) and CPC(Z2).
l Inadequate CPC– some CPCconfigurations (e.g., Conduit only) may under certain
conditions lead to a low value of Z2 contributing to a low value of Zs.

12 FAQs
l High external impedance (Ze) – (e.g., TT system or a circuit at the end of an extensive
distribution system) may mean that even with large conductor sizes (i.e., low Z1 and Z2
values) within the circuit, disconnection may be problematical.
l Circuit-breaker with high fault tripping level (e.g., Type D mcb). Note that in most cases
for circuit- breakers, if the level of earth fault current is insufficient to operate the short-
circuit protection function, disconnection will probably be non-compliant.
l Combinations of any of the above.
In most cases, the provision of residual current protection will solve the problem.
Why do I get ‘Earth Fault: Adiabatic’ error messages?

In addition to the requirement that a circuit should disconnect within a specified time
under earth fault conditions, it is also necessary to ensure that the thermal energy (I2t)
absorbed by the circuit protective conductor (CPC) during the earth fault does not exceed
a limiting value. Energy levels above the limit may lead to the conductor being permanently
damaged. This is checked by:
l comparing the section (mm 2) of the CPCwith the minimum section (Min S) required to
safely withstand the calculated energy level without damage.
l the Min Sis calculated to be equal to √(I2t)/k; where I2t is the protective device energy
let-through (for disconnection times less than 0.1 s) or the earth fault current squared
times the disconnection time (for disconnection times greater than 0.1 s); k is a
constant for a particular CPCtype from BS7671:2018 , Tables 54.3, 54.4, 54.5.
l where the CPCsection is less than Min S, an error message will be generated.
It is also possible to use BS7671:2018, Table 54.7 to determine the value of Min S. However,
use of Table 54.7 can lead to excessively large CPCs, whereas finding the value by
calculation will always give the most economical choice. Therefore, the software does not
use Table 54.7.
Adiabatic failures often result from relatively low levels of earth fault current. Where the
level of fault current is sufficient to cause rapid disconnection by the protective device, the
amount of energy sustained by the CPCis usually well within its limits. In contrast, low levels
of earth fault current lead to prolonged disconnection times during which the total
amount of heat energy generated may be considerable.
This is illustrated by the following example using actual manufacturer’s data:
l Type D MCB, 40 A rating. Earth fault current = 900 A, disconnection time less than 0.1 s;
I2t = 11 x 103.
A 1.0 mm 2 thermoplastic insulated copper cable would comply (k2s2 = 1152 x 1.02 =
13.2 x 103).
l Type D MCB, 40 A rating. Earth fault current = 400 A, disconnection time = 2 s; I2t = 4002

12 FAQs
x 2 = 320 x 103.
A 6.0 mm 2 thermoplastic insulated copper cable would be required (k2s2 = 1152 x 62 =

476 x 103)
Why do I get an Icu/Ics Failure?
The software checks protective devices in compliance with BSEN60947-2 or, for MCBs with
BSEN60898. Part of this standard requires that device manufacturers test their protective
devices under fault conditions to comply with two breaking capacities, Icu and Ics.
l Icu – The Ultimate Breaking capacity of the device. The highest level of fault current
under which the device can safely operate.
l Ics – The Service Breaking capacity, a value of fault current up to which the device will be
suitable for reuse (subject to certain limitations) after interrupting a short circuit fault.
The software checks against both limits and generates an error where fault conditions are
excessive.
Why do I get an Energy-based Selectivity Failure?

Two types of Selectivity check are available in the ProDesign MEsoftware: Time-current and
Energy-based. These can be included or not in the Selectivity check according to the
settings in Construction / Settings / Project Settings / Calculations / Selectivity Settings.
The Time-current check compares the time-current characteristic curves of successive
devices and reports any overlapping areas where failure of Selectivity would occur.
However, the information provided by the time-current characteristic curves cannot be
used to check Selectivity between current limiting devices (fuses, MCBs, and many MCCBs)
under short-circuit conditions – energy-based Selectivity. To determine Selectivity between
current-limiting devices under short-circuit conditions, an assessment of the fault energy
flowing through the devices must be made. The method of assessment is different for
fuses and circuit-breakers.
For fuses, the amount of energy let-through under fault conditions by the downstream
fuse is compared to the amount of energy the upstream fuse can withstand before its
element melts (Pre-arc limit).
For example, Selectivity between a 125 A, BS88 fuse upstream and a 100 A fuse
downstream will fail. The energy let-through by the 100 A fuse will be 60,000 A2s, which is
greater than 25,000 A2s which is the pre-arc limit for the 125 A fuse. With a 160 A upstream
fuse (Pre-arc = 62,000 A2s), Selectivity would be okay.
Generally for BS88 fuses, for Selectivity to be successful, the upstream fuse should be two
current rating sizes above the downstream fuse.

12 FAQs
For circuit-breakers, evaluation of energy-based Selectivity can only be made by the

manufacturer. Therefore, all circuit-breaker energy-based Selectivity checks in the
ProDesign MEsoftware are based on manufacturers Selectivity data tables.
For each upstream/downstream circuit-breaker combination, the tables give the Selectivity
limit, that is, the level of fault current up to which Selectivity will be maintained. If the
tabulated limit is less than the calculated fault current at the downstream device, a
Selectivity error will be reported.
How do I enter the length for a Ring Final Circuit?

The full length of the cable run from the board around the ring and back to the board
should be entered in the Cable dialog, in the sub-section label length . The Cables in Parallel
setting in the Grouping section should not be selected.
The cable sizing, voltage drop, and fault current calculations take into account the ring
circuit topology. For voltage drop purposes, loads are assumed to be distributed equally
around the ring.
What are the minimum and maximum fault levels in the report?
In reports, the software gives two levels of fault current, Maximum and Minimum, at each
end of a cable, Source and Load end.
Maximum fault levels are calculated at 20 °Cand assume that the fault occurs under 'cold'
conditions when conductor resistances will be at a minimum. This results in the highest
possible level of fault current.
The maximum fault current at the source end of the circuit is used to check equipment
fault ratings, such as circuit-breaker or fuse breaking capacity.
Minimum fault levels assume full operating temperature for all conductors in the route
from supply to the point of fault.
Impedance values shown in reports for minimum fault currents will always be for
temperatures greater than 20 °C. This should be remembered when checking against
'cold' values.
The minimum fault current at the load end of the circuit is used in the assessment of phase
fault adiabatic checks.
How is Zs calculated?
The following example describes the calculation processes used to calculate the earth fault
loop impedance Zs. The resistive (R) and reactive (X) elements of the fault loop components
are separately processed and summed then, in the final step, the resistive and reactive
totals are summed algebraically to give the total impedance (Zs).
Example

12 FAQs
Phase conductor type: Multicore, 90 °Cthermosetting insulated/sheathed, non-arm Cu

Table 4E2; Size = 240 mm 2; Length = 40 m.
Circuit Protective Conductor (CPC) type: Thermosetting insulated non-armoured Cu; Size
50 mm 2. Circuit protective device (CPD): BS88 Fuse; Rating = 500 A.
Calculate the earth fault loop impedance Zs. Zs = Ze + Z1 + Z2
where:
Ze = external fault impedance; Z1 = phase conductor impedance; Z2 = CPCimpedance.
R X Z Comments
0.0041 0.0202 Ze,external earth fault loop impedance (set

in the Source dialog)
0.1750 0.1250 Z1: three-phase cable impedance from

BS7671 - Table 4E2B, col. 4 [mΩ /m @90 °C]
0.1010 0.0722 Line conductor [mΩ /m / √3]
0.0789 0.0722 Corrected for temperature [r @20 °C= r90

/ (1 + (90 – 20) x 0.004)]
0.1010 0.0722 Corrected for fault temperature [using

multiplier 54C= 1.28 in BS7671 - Table E2]
0.040 0.0029 Z1: Calculated for 40 m circuit length [Ω ]
0.9900 0.2700 Z2: impedance for 2 conductors from

BS7671 - Table 4E1B, col. 5 [mΩ /m @90 °C]
0.4950 0.1350 Single conductor [/2]
0.3867 0.1350 Corrected for temperature [r @20 °C= r90

/ (1 + (90 – 20) x 0.004)]
0.4950 0.1350 Corrected for fault temperature [using

multiplier 54C= 1.28 in BS7671 - Table E2]
0.0198 0.0054 Calculated for 40 m circuit length [Ω ]
0.0279 0.0285 0.03988 Zs: R= r e + r 1 + r 2; x = xe + x1 + x2; Z = √(R2 +

X2)
How is the cable equivalent size of the CPCsize calculated?

The earth fault adiabatic calculation: Min S= √(I2t)/k, is performed for each circuit. For this
purpose, the value of k for the type of circuit protective conductor (CPC) is required.

12 FAQs
In cases where two different conductors (for example, steel wire armour plus integral
conductor [incorporated in the cable], or steel conduit plus separate copper conductor)
are used, each of the conductors will have different k values. The adiabatic calculation can
only be performed with a single k value. To deal with this the section (cross-sectional area
in mm 2) of both conductors is converted to a value equivalent to a single k value which can
then be used in the adiabatic calculation.
To standardise the adiabatic calculation, even in cases where a single conductor is used,
an equivalent section is calculated for the CPCbased on the k value of the line conductor.
Example – armour used as CPC:
Line conductor: 4-core, 70 °Cthermoplastic insulated, SWA, 400 mm 2copper. Table 4D4. k =
103 (BS7671:2018, Table 43.1).
CPC: Steel wire armour; actual section = 467 mm 2; k = 51 (BS7671:2018 , Table 54.4).
CPCequivalent section = actual section x armour k / line conductor k = 467 x 51/103 = 231.2
mm 2. The calculation for the minimum section: Min S= √(I2t)/k; uses k = 103.
Example – armour + integral conductor used as CPC:
As the previous example but with one of the cable conductors used in parallel to the
armour. Armour equivalent section (as before) = 231.2 mm 2.
Integral conductor: k = 103 (BS7671:2018, Table 54.3). Integral conductor equivalent section
= 400 x 103/103 = 400 mm 2.
CPCequivalent section = Armour equivalent section + Integral conductor equivalent
section = 231.2 + 400 = 631.2 mm 2.
Why can't I add any more boards?

Each level of the software has a limit to the number of boards that can be entered. This
limit is indicated by the number in the product name. For example, ProDesign 13 has a 13-
board limit.
How does the software calculate cable sizes for ring final socket circuits?
The rules described in BS7671:2018, 433.1.204 are applied, as follows:
l The circuit must be protected by a protective device of 30 A or 32 A rating.
l The line and neutral conductors must be copper with a minimum size of 2.5 mm 2 (1.5
mm 2 for mineral insulated).
l The current-carrying capacity of the cable must not be less than 20 A.
NOTE– The required current-carrying capacity is equal to the nominal rating of the
circuit protective device divided by any relevant rating factors.
For example, if the circuit is to be installed in a group of two cables at an ambient

12 FAQs
temperature of 35 °C, the minimum current-carrying capacity may typically be 20/(0.8 x

0.94) = 26.6 A. This would require a 6 mm 2 cable (twin and earth) rather than the usual
2.5 mm 2.
Can the software calculate 110 Vcentre-tapped systems?

No, the software cannot calculate 110 Vsystems where the voltage to earth is 55 V.
Can the software calculate DCcircuits?

No, the software is designed to only calculate 50 Hz/60 Hz ACcircuits.
What is the purpose of ‘Length to First Fitting’ in the Lighting, Radial Circuit?
Use of the Length to First Fitting setting is intended to improve the estimation of voltage
drop in the circuit. The circuit is considered in two parts, the first being the run of cable to
the first fitting and the second remaining length along which the light fittings are
connected.
In the first part, the cable is carrying the full circuit load current. In the second part, the load
current along the run decreases, together with the voltage drop, as the connection point
for each fitting is passed. The result is that the voltage drop along the total length of the
circuit will be less than that for a circuit with all the load connected to the end of the cable.
An estimate of the overall voltage drop in the circuit is obtained by calculating it normally
for the Length to First Fitting first part, then halving the calculated value for the remaining
length.
For example, in a radial lighting circuit of 20 m total length with 10 m to the first fitting, the
voltage drop would be 0.5 + (0.5/2) = 0.75 times the voltage drop in a conventional circuit of
the same length.
How can I prevent voltage drop requirements leading to cable sizes too large to be
terminated?
In networks with extensive cable lengths and similar situations that lead to increases in
cable sizes to ensure compliance with voltage drop limits, it is important to avoid ending up
with cables too large to be terminated in the equipment it is connecting.
To avoid this, use the Limit Maximum Cable Size setting in the Voltage Drop pane of the
Load or Motor dialog. Normally set at No Limit, this can be set to any size, which then
defines the maximum size at which the cable can be automatically set.
The Template feature can be used to define various load types each with their own cable
size limits.

12 FAQs
I need to use a range of circuit-breakers that does not appear in the software, what do I
do?
The protective device database in the software contains most of the devices in current use
in the United Kingdom. If a required manufacturer does not appear in the list in the
Protective Devices Selector, try clearing the Supported Manufacturers Only in the Device
Selection Filters at the base of the selector panel.
Supported manufacturers are those that regularly supply updated information on their
products to Amtech and check that the data is correctly presented. Every effort is made to
ensure that the information for non-supported manufacturers is correct, but that
information is not routinely updated and validated.
Also, the Hide Obsolete CPDs filter, when selected, ensures that products that are no
longer available are not made available for inclusion in a new design. Such products are
retained for design checks on as-fitted existing projects; their use in new designs should be
avoided.
After trying the filters, if the required product is still not listed, one of the devices in the
Generic section might provide a suitable substitute. The characteristics of the Generic
device and the required product should be compared using the manufacturer’s data.
In the event that the required device is not listed and there is no suitable substitute,
contact Support.
Can I repeatedly avoid searching a long list of protective device manufacturers to find
just the small number that I use?
The manufacturer list shown in the Protective Devices Selector can be modified using the
Preferred Protective Device Manufacturers dialog.
Select only the manufacturers you require to be displayed; go to the Protective Devices
Selector clear the Supported Manufacturers Only check box and select the Preferred
Manufacturers Only check box. The list will now only contain the selected manufacturers.
Why do I get a message reporting no data when checking energy-based Selectivity?

The most likely cause is that the devices being evaluated are produced by different
manufacturers.
For circuit-breakers, evaluation of energy-based Selectivity can only be made by the
manufacturer. Therefore, all circuit-breaker energy-based Selectivity checks in the software
are based on manufacturers' Selectivity data tables. Each set of tables contain only devices
produced by the one manufacturer, so there will be no information for devices from two
different manufacturers.
Similarly, there will be no data where the upstream device is a circuit-breaker and the
downstream device is a fuse.

12 FAQs
See also: Why do I get an Energy-based Selectivity failure?
When using a circuit-breaker in a motor circuit, why is the rating is reported as zero?
If a standard distribution circuit-breaker is used for protection in motor circuit, its overload
tripping characteristic may not co-ordinate correctly with the motor overload in the
starter; most commonly premature tripping may occur during starting.
Most circuit-breaker manufacturers recommend specific types with tripping
characteristics compatible with motor operation, which have substantial motor ratings. At
the same time the other types, will have zero motor ratings indicating their unsuitability for
motor operation.
Generally, the recommended circuit-breaker type for motor circuits will have no overload
tripping function, just an instantaneous trip. The motor starter overload then provides
overload protection and the circuit-breaker fault protection. Consult the manufacturer for
recommended types.
The motor rating of a protective device in a motor circuit can be checked in the Protective
Devices Selector. When a rating is selected in the right-hand column, its motor rating is
shown below.
Why is the tabulated rating of a cable the same when using a single cable and when
using parallel cables?
Cable sizing in the software is aimed at finding a cable with a suitable tabulated rating as
listed in Tables 4D1Aetc. in BS7671:2018 . The tables give ratings for single cables (one
multicore cable or, for single-core cables, one conductor per phase). Therefore, all the
reported data, such as the required rating (Iz) and the tabulated rating (It), are given for a
single cable. In this way, the results presented can be used to easily understand how the
appropriate cable has been selected from the tables.
In the case of parallel cables, the data is divided by the number of parallel cables, to give the
requirement for each of the cables. This can then be used to find the correct size in the
tables.
For example, for a single cable, where the cable sizing calculation finds the required rating
(Iz) should be 120 A, a cable size listed with a tabulated rating (It) of 128 A would be suitable.
For two parallel cables, the required rating would be 120/2 = 60 A. Two parallel cables each
with a tabulated rating of 62 A would be suitable.
I cannot make connections in a new drawing. What is wrong?

The single-line diagram in the software can be arranged in one of four ways, either with the
supply source near the top, left, right, or bottom of the drawing with the other
components connected radially away from this source.

12 FAQs
The preferred arrangement is set in the Project Settings / Drawing / Connection Setting as
either Source feeds from Top or Source feeds from Bottom. Unless the drawing is
constructed in agreement with the logic of the selected setting, it is not possible to
successfully make connections between components.
There are visual guides provided to indicate correct connection on the drawing. Red and
blue crosses indicate unconnected components. A blue cross indicates the load end of a
component; the cross disappears when a successful load connection is made. Similarly, a
red cross indicates a location where a supply end connection is required.
Also, any component that has no load end connection will be coloured red/brown. Once it
is connected, it will be coloured black or an appropriate phase colour.
Is there a way to make common changes to large numbers of components without

making changes in all their dialogs?
The best way to make multiple changes is to use the Data Entry tool, which contains lists of
all cables, loads and motors and all associated settings. For example, to change all the
cables in a network from one type to another:
1. Select all the cables (click the first in the list, then shift-click the last).
2. Select the new cable type from the Type list; all cables will then be changed to the new
type.
There is also a feature that allows templates to be applied to one or more cable, load or
motor.

Glossary
Active Supply
A number of alternative sources of supply can be defined as the origin of supply for a
network. Only one of these can be modelled as the ‘Active Supply’ indicated by selecting the
check box. Where only one source exists, the check box for that source is permanently
selected.
Only available in ProDesign 100 versions and later.
The active supply can be defined as a number of identical parallel supplies.
Adiabatic
Adiabatic checks are required to determine whether conductors might be damaged by the
thermal effects resulting from the level of calculated fault conditions.
BS7671:2018, 434.5.2 describes the adiabatic checks required for protective conductors.
BS7671:2018, 543.1.3 describes the adiabatic checks required for phase conductors.
Ambient temperature
The temperature of the free air surrounding a cable, or in the case of cables installed in the
ground, the temperature of the surrounding soil. For an enclosed method such as ‘In
conduit’ this will be the temperature of the air surrounding the conduit, not the
temperature inside it.
Basic protection
Protection against electric shock under fault-free conditions; use of barriers, placing out of
reach, and so forth.
Breaking capacity
The breaking capacity of a circuit-breaker is the maximum level of fault current (kA) it can
safely interrupt.
Each circuit-breaker has two breaking capacities:
l Ultimate Breaking Capacity (Icu) – It is required that the circuit-breaker should be
selected so that its Ultimate breaking capacity is equal to, or greater than, the
prospective fault current (Ipf ) at the point at which it is installed.
l Service Breaking Capacity (Ics) – It is recommended that the Service breaking capacity of
a circuit-breaker should be equal to, or greater than, the prospective fault current (Ipf )
at the load end of the circuit it is protecting.

Glossary
Ca
Ambient temperature rating factor used for calculating the minimum required cable size.
For cables installed in air, values for this factor are given in BS7671:2018 Table 4B1. For
ground installations, values are given in Table 4B2.
Elevating the ambient temperature will result in a lower rating factor Ca. This may result in
an increased cable size.
Cable k2s2
Energy withstand of cable in A2s.
For example, a cable with a withstand of 12 x 104 A2s, can sustain without permanent
damage, a fault current of 1,000 A for a time of 0.12 s (1,0002 x 0.12 = 12 x 104 A2s).
Back-up Protection
Circuit-breaker manufacturers publish tables showing combinations of pairs of circuit-
breakers, one upstream, one downstream, where the downstream device can be used at a
location where the prospective fault current (Ipf ) is higher than its breaking capacity (Icu).
Only combinations approved by a manufacturer should be used – only these are available
in the ProDesign MEsoftware. Also, the Icu of the upstream device must equal or exceed Ipf
at its point of installation.
Cc
The rating factor Cc = 0.9 is applied to cable sizing calculations for cables installed in the
ground (Installation Methods 70 to 73).
See BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, Sections 3, 4 and 5.1.1.
Cd
The rating factor Cd is applied to cable sizing calculations for cable installed in the ground.
Its value varies according to the depth of lay installed.
See BS7671:2018, Table 4B4.
Cf
The rating factor Cf = 0.725 is applied to cable sizing calculations for any circuit protected by
a semi-enclosed fuse to BS3036.
Cg
Grouping rating factor used for calculating minimum required cable size. For cables
installed in air, values for this factor are given BS7671:2018, Tables 4C1, 4C4, 4C6. For ground
installations, values are given in Table 4C2.
Grouping a circuit with others will result in a lower rating factor Cg. This may result in an
increased cable size.

Glossary
Ch
Rating factor used for calculating the minimum required cable size in the presence of
harmonic currents.
See BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, section 5.5.
Ci
Rating factor used for calculating the minimum required cable size for cables run in
thermal insulation.
See BS7671:2018 Table 52.2.
Circuit Protective Conductor
A circuit protective conductor (CPC) connects exposed-conductive-parts* of equipment to
the main earthing terminal.
* Conductive part of equipment, which can be touched and which is not normally live, but
which can become live when basic insulation fails.
Competent person
A person who possesses sufficient technical knowledge, relevant practical skills and
experience for the nature of the electrical work undertaken and is able at all times to
prevent danger and, where appropriate, injury to themselves and others.
Consumer Unit
A type of single-phase board for the control and distribution of electrical energy, principally
in domestic premises. In the ProDesign MEsoftware, a consumer unit (CU) can be split into
three sections, each with different types of residual current protection.
CPD
Circuit protective device. A fuse or circuit-breaker providing overload and fault current
protection.
Cs
The rating factor Cs is applied to cable sizing calculations for cable installed in the ground.
Its value varies according to the thermal resistivity of the soil in which the cable is installed.
See BS7671:2018, Table 4B3.
Current-carrying capacity
The maximum current which can be carried by a conductor under specified conditions
(Installation method, temperature, grouping, etc.) without its steady-state temperature
exceeding a specified value (for example, 90 ºCfor cables with thermosetting insulation).
Depth of lay
Indicates the depth of installation for cables installed in the ground.

Glossary
The rating factor Cd is applied in cable sizing calculations to account for different
installation depths.
For cables with Installation Methods 70 to 73, values of Cd are found in BS7671:2018, Table
4B4.
For methods using BICCdata, rating factor Cd has a value of 1.0 for a depth of 0.5 m. For
greater depths the value of the rating factor will be less than 1, and greater than one for
shallower depths.
Design current
Design current or ‘Ib’ in Amperes. The level of current to be carried by a circuit in normal
service.
Device rating
Circuit Protective Device rating, or ‘In’ in Amperes.
If the overload setting can be adjusted, then the ‘adjusted rating’ is known as ‘Ir ’.
Selectivity
Selectivity is achieved where, under overcurrent conditions, the protective device nearest
the fault operates rather than any protective device on the supply side of it, ensuring that
an overcurrent condition will be disconnected without disruption to any other circuits in
the system.
Distribution board
An assembly containing protective devices associated with one or more outgoing circuits
fed from an incoming circuit. In the ProDesign MEsoftware, a distribution board (DB) may
be single-phase or three-phase, and can contain up to 100 outgoing circuits.
Diversity
It is often not desirable to size each conductor in a distribution system to support the total
connected load at that point in the network. Diversity is applied on the basis of the
anticipated loadings that are likely to result from all loads not being connected at the same
time.
Fault
A circuit condition in which current flows through an abnormal or unintended path. The
fault current may flow from line to line (phase fault) or line to earth.
Final Circuit
A circuit connected directly to current-using equipment, or to a socket-outlet or socket-
outlets or other outlet points for the connection of such equipment.

Glossary
Fixed Equipment
Equipment designed to be fastened to a support or other wise secured in a specific
location.
Harmonic
The presence of harmonic content in the line conductors of a three-phase and neutral
circuit can give rise to excessive levels of load current in the neutral conductor.
I2t
The energy let-through of a device in A2s. The total amount of energy let through by a
protective device for a given level of fault current at a stated voltage.
Ib
The design current of a circuit in Amperes. The level of current to be carried by the circuit in
normal service.
Ipf
Prospective fault current. The calculated fault current at a particular point in the network.
The calculation assumes a zero impedance fault, i.e., bolted fault.
Ir
The adjusted overload rating of an overcurrent protective device, in Amperes.
Iz
The current carrying capacity of a cable under the defined installation conditions. This is
the effective rating of the cable after the relevant rating factors have been applied, i.e., Ca,
Cg, etc.
k
Factors for conductor materials from BS7671:2018, Table 43.1. Different values are given for
different types of conductor and insulating materials.
k2s2 used in adiabatic calculations gives the short-time withstand of a conductor in A2s.
Max Zs
The maximum value of earth fault loop impedance (Zs) that will allow the protective device
in a circuit to disconnect an earth fault within the prescribed time.
Example: if the maximum earth fault disconnection time for a circuit is 0.4 s and a fault
current Ia = 320 A is required to operate the circuit protective device in that time:
Max Zs = (Cmin x Uo)/Ia = (0.95 x 230)/320 = 0.7188 Ω
The earth fault loop impedance, i.e., the path through which fault current will flow for an
earth fault in the circuit under consideration. It comprises the sum of: Ze, the external

Glossary
impedance; Z1, the line conductor impedance; Z2, the circuit protective conductor
impedance.
Zs = Ze + (Z1 + Z2).
PDA
Personal Data Assistant. A handheld computer that can be connected to a desktop or
laptop computer.
Amtech Mobile Software will only operate on PDAs that use the Microsoft® Pocket PC
operating systems.
Prospective Fault Current
Prospective Fault Current (Ipf ) is the value of overcurrent at a given point in a circuit
resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between live conductors having a difference
of potential under normal operating conditions, or between a live conductor and an
exposed-conductive-part.
Power factor
Power factor is the ratio of the resistance (R) and impedance (Z) in a circuit, that is:
Power factor = cos ∅ = R/Z
Rated current
Value of current used for specification purposes, established for a specified set of
operating conditions.
Rating factor
Rating factors are divided into the nominal rating of the circuit protective device (In) to
determine the minimum current-carrying capacity (Iz) of a cable in a circuit. For example:
Iz = In/(Ca x Cg x Cc x Ci x Ch)
Rating factors:
Ca – ambient temperature
Cc – buried installation methods 70 to 73 (Cc = 0.9)
Cd – for depth of burial
Cf – BS3036 protective device (Cf = 0.725)
Cg – grouping
Ci – cable run through insulation
Cs – for thermal resistivity of soil
Ch – 3rd harmonic current

Glossary
Residual Current Device

A Residual Current Device (RCD) is a mechanical switching device or association of devices
intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current* attains a given
value under specified conditions.
* Residual Current is the algebraic sum of the currents in the live conductors of a circuit at a
point in the electrical installation.
Soil Thermal Resistivity
Relates to the ability of the soil, in which the cable is installed, to conduct heat energy away
from the cable.
The rating factor Cs is applied in cable sizing calculations to account for different soil
thermal resistivities.
For cables with Installation Methods 70 to 73, the values of Cs are found in BS7671:2018,
Table 4B3.
For methods using BICCdata Cs has a value of 1.0 for a resistivity of 1.2 K.m/W. For higher
resistivities the value of the rating factor will be less than 1, and greater than one for lower
resistivities.
Subject to Simultaneous Overload
Where circuits are grouped, there are two available methods of calculating the rating
factor Cg to be applied:
l Subject to simultaneous overload: Assumes that more than one of the grouped
circuits may be overloaded at any one time – applies grouping using: In/Cg.
[BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.1.2: Equation 2]
l Not subject to simultaneous overload: Assumes that only one of the grouped circuits
will normally be overloaded at any one time (a reasonable assumption for general
distribution loads) – uses two calculations to determine Cg from which the highest
calculated value is to be used. Usually gives a reduced level of derating compared to
‘Subject to simultaneous overload’.
[BS7671:2018, Appendix 4, 5.1.2: Equation 3, 4]
Switchboard
In the ProDesign MEsoftware, a switchboard is intended for use as a main board
connected to one or a number of supply sources. Connections made to a switchboard
have switching functions associated with them. This allows switching scenarios to be set
up, such as normal or emergency supplies by transformer or generator. The switchboard
can also be split into up to four sections with switchable interconnectors between each
section.

Glossary
TN system
A system having one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed-
conductive-parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective
conductors.
TT system
A system having one point of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed-
conductive-parts of the installation being connected to earth electrodes electrically
independent of the earth electrodes of the source.
Uo
Nominal line voltage to earth. Assumed to be 230 Vfor grid connected systems.
UPS
An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is used to maintain the supply to an essential
service during mains supply outages. On loss of mains supply, a storage device in the UPS
continues to power the connected load. Batteries are used as the storage component in
the UPStype modelled in the ProDesign software.
Z1
That part of the earth fault loop impedance which comprises the impedance under earth
fault conditions of the line conductor of the circuit under consideration.
Z2
That part of the earth fault loop impedance which comprises the impedance under earth
fault conditions of the circuit protective conductor (cpc) of the circuit under consideration.
Ze
That part of the earth fault loop impedance which is external to the circuit under
consideration. For the supply cable it will be the impedance external to the installation. For
other circuits, it is the sum of the impedance of the circuits on the supply side of the circuit
under consideration and the impedance external to the installation.
Zs
The earth fault loop impedance, i.e., the path through which fault current will flow for an
earth fault in the circuit under consideration. It comprises the sum of: Ze, the external
impedance; Z1, the line conductor impedance; Z2, the circuit protective conductor
impedance.
Zs = Ze + (Z1 + Z2).

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(Pr oDesign, Pr oDesign 3D, SingleCable, Pr otect, Power net)
This Software End User License Agreement (this “Agreement”) is entered into between
Trimble Inc. or the Trimble affiliate identified on the applicable Order Form (“Trimble”) and
you (“Customer” or “you”), the individual or entity that has downloaded or otherwise
procured the Software (as defined below). This Agreement is effective on the earlier to
occur of the date you first executed an Order Form, downloaded the Software or clicked to
agree to this Agreement (“Effective Date”). This Agreement includes any Order Forms or
exhibits which reference this Agreement and any applicable Product-Specific Terms.
Entry into this Agreement. If the individual entering into this Agreement is an employee or
agent of Customer, then such individual must be authorized to, and by agreeing to the
terms of this Agreement hereby does, bind Customer to this Agreement. The licenses
granted under this Agreement are expressly conditioned upon acceptance by such
authorized personnel.
Purchase from Reseller. If you obtained the Software through an authorized dealer,
distributor or reseller of Trimble (“Reseller”), your use of the Software is governed by the
terms of this Agreement as modified by Section 13 (Purchase from Reseller) below.
Order of Precedence. In the event of a conflict, the terms will control in the following order:
(1) the applicable Order Form; (2) the Product-Specific Terms; and (3) this Software End
User License Agreement.
Modifications to this Agreement. Trimble may modify this Agreement (which may include
changes to the Product-Specific Terms, Software pricing and plans) from time to time by
giving notice to Customer by email or through the Software. Unless a shorter period is
specified by Trimble (e.g. due to changes in the law or exigent circumstances), the
modifications become effective thirty (30) days after such notice. If within the notice period
Customer notifies Trimble in writing of its objection to the modifications, Trimble (at its
option and as Customer’s exclusive remedy) will either: (a) permit Customer to continue
under the existing version of this Agreement until expiration of the then-current License
Term (after which time the modified Agreement will go into effect) or (b) allow Customer to
terminate this Agreement and receive a refund of any pre-paid Software fees allocable to
the terminated portion of the applicable License Term. Customer may be required to click
to accept or otherwise agree to the modified Agreement in order to continue using the
Software, and, in any event, continued use of the Software after the updated version of this
Agreement goes into effect will constitute Customer’s acceptance of such updated version.

Contents
BYINDICATING YOURACCEPTANCEOFTHISAGREEMENT ORBYINSTALLING ORUSING

ALL ORANYPORTION OFTHESOFTWARE, YOU AREAGREEING TO BEBOUND BYALL
TERMS, CONDITIONS, AND NOTICESCONTAINED ORREFERENCED IN THISAGREEMENT. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREETO THISAGREEMENT, PLEASEDO NOT INSTALL ORUSEANY
SOFTWARE. FORCLARITY, EACH PARTYEXPRESSLYAGREESTHAT THISAGREEMENT IS
LEGALLYBINDING UPON IT. IFYOU HAVEPAID ALICENSEFEEFORUSEOFTHESOFTWARE
AND DO NOT AGREETO THESETERMS, YOU MAYRETURN THESOFTWAREFORAFULL
REFUND FROM TRIMBLE(ORYOURAPPLICABLERESELLER, IFYOU PURCHASED THE
SOFTWAREFROM ARESELLER) PROVIDED YOU (A) HAVENOT INSTALLED, ORUSED THE
SOFTWAREAND (B) RETURN THESOFTWAREWITHIN FOURTEEN (14) DAYSOFYOUR
INITIAL PURCHASE.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, if you executed a separate signed
agreement with Trimble which expressly governs use of the Software, the terms of that
agreement shall supersede the terms of this Agreement and you shall have no rights to
use the Software under this Agreement either during or after the terms of such other
written agreement.
1. Definitions.
“Affiliate”means an entity that, directly or indirectly, owns or controls, is owned

or controlled by or is under common ownership or control with a party, where
“ownership” means the beneficial ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of
an entity’s voting equity securities or other equivalent voting interests and
“control” means the power to direct the management or affairs of an entity.
“Authorized Users”means employees and contractors of Customer permitted
to use or access the Software for the sole benefit of Customer.
“Documentation”means the technical specification documentation generally
made available by Trimble to its customers with regard to the Software.
“Feedback”means comments, questions, suggestions or other feedback
relating to any Trimble product or service.
“License Keys”means electronic passwords or other enabling mechanisms
provided for use with the Software.
“License Term”means the license term specified on the applicable Order Form.
“Order Form”means any ordering documents, online registration, order
descriptions or order confirmations provided to you by Trimble that reference
this Agreement.
“Product-Specific Terms”means any additional product-specific terms and
conditions which govern your use of the Software. Product-Specific Terms

Contents
may be attached to this Agreement or referenced in the applicable Order

Form.
“Professional Services”means professional consulting services (which may
include training services).
“Scope of Use”means any user, seat, computer, field of use, location or other
restrictions set forth in the applicable Order Form or Product-Specific Terms.
“Software”means the Trimble software product(s) provided in connection with
this Agreement that are specified in the applicable Order Form. “Software” shall
also include any Documentation and any maintenance releases of the same
Software product provided by Trimble (or a Reseller) to you under this
Agreement.
2. The Software.
2.1. Grant of License. Software is licensed and not sold. Subject to all of the
terms and conditions of this Agreement, Trimble grants you a non-
transferable, non-sublicensable, non-exclusive license during the License
Term to use the Software in object code form on any computer or device and
operating system for which it was intended, but solely: (a) for your own internal
business purposes; (b) in accordance with this Agreement and the
Documentation; and (c) in accordance with the applicable Scope of Use and
any Product-Specific Terms. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable Order
Form, the License Term begins on your license purchase date.
2.2. Installation and Copies. Unless otherwise specified in the Product-Specific
Terms, you may copy and install on your computers for use only by your
employees as many copies of the Software as is designated in the applicable
Order Form.
2.3. Delivery. Trimble shall electronically deliver the Software, Documentation
and any applicable License Keys (unless another delivery method is specified
in the applicable Order Form). Delivery is deemed to occur on the date on
which the Software and License Keys, if any, are first made available to you.
2.4. Subscription Term and Auto-Renewal. Unless otherwise set forth in the
Product-Specific Terms or Order Form, for any Software licensed on a termed
basis, the License Term is twelve (12) months and will automatically renew for
subsequent twelve (12)-month periods at Trimble’s then-current price unless
either party provides the other with notice of cancellation at least thirty (30)
days prior to expiration of the then-current License Term.

Contents
2.5. License Restrictions. As conditions on the license granted to you, you shall
not (and shall not allow any third party to): (a) decompile, disassemble, or
otherwise reverse engineer the Software or attempt to reconstruct or
discover any source code, underlying ideas, algorithms, file formats or
programming interfaces of the Software by any means whatsoever, or attempt
to circumvent or disable any License Key or other mechanism that protects
the Software against unauthorized use (in each case except and only to the
extent expressly permitted by applicable law, and then only with prior written
notice to Trimble); (b) distribute, sell, sublicense, rent, or lease the Software, or
use the Software (or any portion thereof) for time sharing, hosting, service
provider, or like purposes; (c) remove any product identification, proprietary,
copyright, or other notices contained in the Software; (d) modify or translate
any part of the Software, create a derivative work of any part of the Software,
or incorporate the Software into any other software, except to the extent
expressly authorized in writing by Trimble; (e) publicly disseminate information
regarding the performance of the Software; (f) use or attempt to use the
Software for competitive analysis or benchmarking; or (g) unless expressly
permitted in the Scope of Use, use or host the Software in a virtual server
environment.
2.6. Free Offerings. Trimble may provide you with free access to a version of the
Software (a “Free Offering”).
2.6.1. General. Free Offerings may not include all functionality and
features accessible as part of paid versions of the Software. Either
party may terminate the applicable License Term for a Free
Offering, for any reason or no reason, immediately upon written
notice to the other party. You acknowledge that all Free Offerings
are provided “ASIS” and may not be functional on any machine or
in any environment. TRIMBLEAND ITSSUPPLIERSDISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIESRELATING TO FREEOFFERINGS, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFORA PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLEAND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANYTHING TO THECONTRARYIN THISAGREEMENT, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BYAPPLICABLELAW, TRIMBLEWILL HAVENO
WARRANTY, SUPPORT OROTHEROBLIGATIONSWITH RESPECT
TO FREEOFFERINGSUNLESSOTHERWISESPECIFIED IN THE
APPLICABLEORDERFORM.

Contents
2.6.2. Beta Releases. Free Offerings designated as “pre-“ or “beta”

releases of the Software (“Beta Releases”) may be inoperable,
incomplete, or contain more errors and bugs than generally
available Software. Trimble makes no promises that any Beta
Releases will ever be made generally available. All information
regarding the characteristics, features or performance of beta
software constitutes Trimble Confidential Information. ANYUSE
OFA BETA RELEASEISAT YOURSOLEDISCRETION AND RISK.
2.6.3. Evaluation Software. Free Offerings designated as “for
evaluation” (“Evaluation Software”) may be used solely to
determine whether to purchase a paid license for the Software
and for no other purpose, including without limitation for
competitive analysis. The License Term for Evaluation Software is
thirty (30) days (unless otherwise specified on the applicable Order
Form). Unless you pay the applicable license fee for the Software,
the Evaluation Software may become inoperable and, in any
event, your license to the Evaluation Software automatically
expires at the end of the Evaluation Software License Term. If you
purchase a license, this Agreement will apply to such purchase
and your use of the Software.
2.7. Educational Versions. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this

Agreement, for any version of the Software designated as “educational,” you
may install one (1) copy of the Software on one (1) computer and use the
Software solely for educational purposes. For clarity, educational versions may
not be used for any for-profit purpose, including professional work or training
offered for a fee or by commercial entities.
2.8. API Access and Customer Applications.
2.8.1. API. The Software may include one or more application

program interface available upon request (“API”) that allows
Customer to develop code or services that communicate with the
Software (“Applications”). Customer may use an API only if such
use is authorized in the Documentation or otherwise in writing by
Trimble. Use of APIs may be subject to additional terms. Trimble
may modify APIs from time to time, and Trimble is not responsible
for the compatibility of any such modifications with Customer’s
Applications.

Contents
2.8.2. Use of Applications. If use of an API is authorized, subject to

the terms of this Agreement and in compliance with the applicable
Documentation, Customer may develop Applications for use
solely by Customer’s internal Authorized Users. Customer may
not develop Applications for the benefit of, or distribute
Applications to, any third party. Customer assumes all risk and
liability regarding the development or use of any Applications, and
Trimble has no warranty, support or other obligations with
respect to any Applications. Customer acknowledges that other
customers or Trimble itself may independently develop
Applications similar to Customer’s Applications.
2.9. Authorized Users. To the extent the applicable Software is licensed on an

Authorized User basis, the terms of this Section 2.9 apply. Only Authorized
Users may access or use the Software. User IDs are granted to individual,
named persons who are Authorized Users, and each Authorized User must
keep its login credentials confidential and not share them with anyone else.
Customer is responsible for its Authorized Users’ compliance with this
Agreement and actions taken through their accounts. In the event an
Authorized User is no longer a Customer employee or contractor, Customer is
solely responsible for deactivating such Authorized User’s access to the
Software. If expressly permitted under the applicable Order, Customer may
transfer Authorized User status from one individual to another at any time,
provided that use of the Software by its Authorized Users in the aggregate
remains within the use restrictions in the Usage Limitations. Customer will
promptly notify Trimble if it becomes aware that any of its Authorized User
login credentials have been compromised.
2.10. Internet Connection. The Software may require an active Internet
connection or other means of electronic communications to operate, which
are not the responsibility of Trimble.
2.11. Software Activation and Metering. The Software may gather and transmit
to Trimble license compliance and Software usage data. You will not disable,
modify or interfere with the operation of any such functionality of the
Software. Trimble (and any third-party service providers that Trimble uses to
monitor and ensure compliance) may use the foregoing information to
validate the authenticity of your license to the Software, to register your
Software, for license metering and to protect Trimble against unlicensed or
illegal use of the Software.

Contents
2.12. Devices. The Software may be compatible with or require use of a device
(“Device”). Compatible Devices are specified in the Documentation (or upon
request). Customer is solely responsible for the configuration and operation of
its Device. Customer shall use its Device in conformance with any health, safety
and other guidance for use of the Software provided by the manufacturer or
any other applicable party (e.g., resellers, etc.). The results obtained through
the Software may be affected by the compatibility, placement, configuration or
operation of Customer’s Device, weather or other environmental conditions,
or other factors outside of Trimble’s control and for which Trimble shall have
no liability.
2.13. Scripts. The Software may allow Customer to input custom scripts and
commands that control the operation of the Software. As between Customer
and Trimble, Customer assumes all risk and liability regarding any use of
scripts.
2.14. Use with other Trimble Products. The Software may allow Customer to
connect with other Trimble products or services. Use of products or services
that are not part of the Software may require payment of a separate fee and
are governed by those products or features’ respective terms of service and
not by this Agreement.
2.15. Third-Party Platforms. Customer may choose to use the Software with
Third-Party Platforms. “Third-Party Platform”means any platform, add-on,
service or product not provided by Trimble that Customer elects to integrate
or enable for use with the Software. Use of Third-Party Platforms is subject to
Customer’s agreement with the relevant provider and not this Agreement, and
may enable data exchange between the Software and Third-Party Platforms.
Trimble does not control and has no liability for Third-Party Platforms,
including their security, functionality, operation, availability or interoperability
or how the Third-Party Platforms use data received from the Software.
2.16. Mobile Applications. The Software may be offered as mobile applications
designed to run on mobile, AV/VR, or other devices. Trimble makes no
warranties regarding the operation of any device or continued compatibility of
the Software with any device. The following terms apply to mobile application
versions of the Software and shall prevail in the event of any conflict with any
other provisions of this Agreement.
2.16.1. Purchase from Application Store. If Customer obtained the

Software through a third-party app store, marketplace or other
site or service (each, an “Application Store”), such Application Store

Contents
shall be considered a “Reseller” under this Agreement, and

Customer’s use of the Software is subject to Section 13 (Purchase
from Reseller) of this Agreement. Except as expressly set forth in
Sections 13 (Purchase from Reseller) and 2.16.3(c) (Apple-Specific
Terms), all fees are non-refundable once paid. Customer’s
download of the Software may be subject to other terms as
specified by the operator of the Application Store from which
Customer downloaded the Software.
2.16.2. In App Purchases. The Software may offer Customer the
opportunity to purchase additional functions and/or features
from within the application (an “In App Purchase”). Customer
acknowledges and agrees that all billing and transaction
processes are handled by the provider of the Application Store
(the “App Store Provider”) from whose platform Customer
downloaded the Software and are governed by the App Store
Provider’s terms and conditions. If Customer has any payment
related issues with In-App Purchases, then Customer needs to
contact the App Store Provider directly.
2.16.3. Apple-Specific Terms. If Customer downloaded the
Software from Apple Inc.’s (“Apple’s”) Application Store, the
following terms are part of this Agreement:
(a) This Agreement is between Customer and Trimble,

and not with Apple. However, as required by Apple,
Apple and its subsidiaries will be third party
beneficiaries of this Agreement and will have the right
(and will be deemed to have accepted the right) to
enforce this Agreement against Customer as a third-
party beneficiary.
(b) As set forth in Section 7 (Limited Warranty and
Disclaimers), Trimble offers a refund in certain
circumstances following a breach of Trimble’s limited
warranty for the Software. If Customer is entitled to
such a refund, Customer may notify Apple and Apple
will refund the purchase price (if any) for the Software
to Customer. To the maximum extent permitted by
applicable law, Apple will have no other warranty
obligation with respect to the Software, and, as
between Apple and Trimble, any other claims, losses,

Contents
liabilities, damages, costs or expenses attributable to

a failure to conform to a warranty will be Trimble’s
responsibility. Apple has no obligation whatsoever to
furnish any maintenance or support services with
respect to the Software.
(c) As between Trimble and Apple, Trimble is solely
responsible for the Software and for addressing any
claims Customer or any third parties have about the
Software or your possession or use of the Software,
including without limitation (i) product liability claims,
(ii) any claim that the Software fails to conform to any
applicable legal or regulatory requirement and (iii)
claims arising under consumer protection or similar
legislation. In the event of any third-party claim that
the Software or your possession or use of the
Software infringes that third party’s intellectual
property rights, Apple will not be responsible for the
investigation, defense, settlement or discharge of
such claim.
3. Data Rights.
3.1. Definitions.
“Anonymized Data”means any data related to the Software that has been
aggregated and/or de-identified in such a manner that neither Customer nor
any of its Authorized Users or any other individual can be identified from the
data.
“Customer Data”means any business information or other data of any type
that is input by or on behalf of Customer into the Software, including without
limitation information manually input by Authorized Users or imported via a
third party product or service, or that Customer may provide to Trimble in
connection with receipt of support and maintenance for the Software.
“Trimble Data”means any and all data related to the Software (excluding
Customer Data), including without limitation Usage Data and Anonymized
Data.
“Usage Data”means Trimble’s technical logs, data and learnings about
Customer’s use of the Software, excluding any Customer Data or Personal
Information (as defined below) of the Customer.
3.2. Data Usage and Ownership.

Contents
3.2.1. Customer grants to Trimble and its affiliates the non-

exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free right during the License Term to
(a) use, copy, store, transmit, display, and create derivative works
of Customer Data in order to (i) provide, maintain and improve the
Software and provide related support and maintenance, and (ii)
provide any professional services; and (b) use and disclose
Customer Data as otherwise permitted pursuant to the written
consent and/or instructions of the Customer.
3.2.2 Customer grants to Trimble and its affiliates the non-
exclusive, worldwide, perpetual, royalty-free right to use, copy,
transmit, display, and create derivative works of Customer Data to:
(a) create and use Anonymized Data for any Trimble

business purpose; and
(b) develop, improve, enhance and support other
products, software, and services of Trimble and/or its
affiliates (including, without limitation, compiling,
aggregating, creating analytics and reports, and
benchmarking); provided, that any use of Customer
Data under this clause (b) is (i) for internal use and
shall not be disclosed to any third-parties without the
consent of Customer (unless it has become
Anonymized Data); and (ii) subject to all applicable
Data Protection Legislation (as defined below).
3.2.3. Except for Trimble’s use rights set forth in this Agreement, as
between the parties, Customer retains all intellectual property and
other rights in Customer Data provided to Trimble. Trimble owns
all right, title and interest in Trimble Data (including, without
limitation, any and all intellectual property rights) and can use
Trimble Data without restriction or royalty of any kind.
3.2.4. In the event of any conflict between the terms of Section 11
(Confidentiality) and this Section 3.2 (Data Usage and Ownership),
the terms of this Section 3.2 (Data Usage and Ownership Rights)
will control.
3.3. Personal Information; Data Protection. The following section applies if

Customer is an entity.
3.3.1 All applicable laws, rules, and regulations relating to the

Contents
protection of privacy and data protection are referred to as “Data

Protection Legislation”. “Personal Information” is defined as in the
applicable Data Protection Legislation, or if no definition is
provided, any personally identifiable information which is either (a)
provided by Customer or on its behalf, or (b) automatically
collected through the Service on Customer’s behalf. “Applicable”, in
this context, shall mean the Data Protection Legislation applicable
to Customer at Customer’s principal place of business or to
Trimble at Trimble’s principal place of business, and such laws that
Customer notifies Trimble in writing of that apply to the parties.
3.3.2 Both parties will comply with all applicable requirements of
the Data Protection Legislation. This Section3.3.2 is in addition to,
and does not relieve, remove or replace, a party's obligations or
rights under the applicable Data Protection Legislation.
3.3.3 The parties acknowledge that: (a) if Trimble processes any
Personal Information hereunder, it is on the Customer's behalf
when performing its obligations under this Agreement and (b) the
Personal Information may be transferred or stored, and/or
accessed from outside of the country where the Customer’s
principal place of business is located in order to provide the
Service and Trimble's other obligations under this Agreement.
3.3.4 Without prejudice to the generality of Section 3.3.2, Customer
will ensure that it has all necessary appropriate consents and
notices in place (a) to enable lawful transfer of the personal
information to Trimble for the duration and purposes of the
Agreement and (b) to enable Trimble to so that Trimble may
lawfully use, process and transfer the Personal Information in
accordance with this Agreement on the Customer's behalf.
3.3.5 If the processing of Personal Information by Trimble is
subject to the General Data Protection Regulation ((EU) 2016/679)
or the Data Protection Act 2018 of the United Kingdom, then, in
addition, at the request of Customer, then the parties shall
execute an applicable data processing addendum.
3.3.6 If the processing of Personal Information by Trimble is
subject to the California Consumer Privacy Act of 2018 (Title 1.81.5,
§1798.100 et. seq.) (“CCPA”), then in addition, in connection with a
verified request by a data subject pursuant to an exercise of rights

Contents
under CCPA related to Personal Information, Customer agrees

and acknowledges that Trimble is Customer’s service provider,
that Customer (and not Trimble) will respond to such request, and
that if necessary in connection with such verified request
Customer will utilize the tools and information provided or made
generally available by Trimble, such as Trimble’s online portals or
APIs and standard documentation regarding Trimble’s products,
software and services. To the extent such tools do not enable
Customer to respond to a verified request, upon Customer’s
request Trimble will provide reasonable assistance with respect to
Personal information in Trimble’s systems that is required for
Customer’s response to such request. Customer further agrees
that a consumer request to delete Personal Information will not
require Trimble to delete Personal Information required to
provide Customer with the Software, which includes any of
Trimble’s service provider(s) acting on Trimble’s behalf to provide
the Software; provided, however, that such service provider(s) do
not have a separate right to sell or use Customer’s Personal
Information other than as required for Trimble’s business
purposes.
3.4. Customer Obligations.
3.4.1 In General. Customer is responsible for its Customer Data,

including its content and accuracy, and agrees to comply with
Laws (as defined below) in using the Software. Customer
represents and warrants that it has made all disclosures and has
all rights, consents and permissions necessary to use its
Customer Data with the Software and grant Trimble the rights in
Section 3.2 (Data Usage and Ownership), all without violating or
infringing Laws, third-party rights (including intellectual property,
publicity or privacy rights) or any terms or privacy policies that
apply to the Customer Data. “Laws” means all relevant local, state,
federal and international laws, regulations and conventions,
including those related to data privacy and data transfer,
international communications and export of technical or personal
data.
3.4.2 Prohibited Data. Customer must not use the Software with
Prohibited Data (as defined below). Customer acknowledges that
the Software is not intended to meet any legal obligations for

Contents
these uses, including HIPAA requirements, and that Trimble is not

a Business Associate as defined under HIPAA. Notwithstanding
anything else in this Agreement, Trimble has no liability for
Prohibited Data or use. “Prohibited Data” means any (a) special
categories of data enumerated in European Union Regulation
2016/679, Article 9(1) or any successor legislation, (b) patient,
medical or other protected health information regulated by the
Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (as amended
and supplemented) (“HIPAA”), (c) credit, debit or other payment
card data subject to the Payment Card Industry Data Security
Standards (PCI DSS), (d) other information subject to regulation or
protection under specific Laws such as the Children’s Online
Privacy Protection Act or Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (or related rules
or regulations), (e) social security numbers, driver’s license
numbers or other government ID numbers or (f) any data similar
to the above protected under foreign or domestic Laws.
3.4.3 Indemnification by Customer. Customer will indemnify,
defend and hold harmless Trimble and its affiliates from and
against any and all claims, costs, damages, losses, liabilities and
expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs) arising
out of or in connection with any claim arising from or relating to (a)
any Customer Data, (b) any breach or alleged breach by Customer
of this Section 3.4 (Customer Obligations) or Section 14.14 (Third-
Party Materials), or (c) any service or product offered by Customer
in connection with or related to the Software. This indemnification
obligation is subject to Customer receiving (i) prompt written
notice of such claim (but in any event notice in sufficient time for
Customer to respond without prejudice); (ii) the exclusive right to
control and direct the investigation, defense, or settlement of such
claim; and (iii) all necessary cooperation of Trimble at Customer’s
expense.
4. Ownership.
4.1. By Trimble. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein,

except for the limited license rights expressly provided herein, Trimble and/or
its suppliers, as applicable, have and will retain all rights, title and interest
(including, without limitation, all patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret and
other intellectual property rights) in and to the Software, Documentation,
Professional Services deliverables and any and all related and underlying

Contents
technology and documentation, and any copies, modifications and derivative

works thereof, including as may incorporate Feedback. You acknowledge that
you are obtaining only a limited license right to the Software and that
irrespective of any use of the words “purchase”, “sale” or like terms hereunder
no ownership rights are being conveyed to you under this Agreement or
otherwise.
4.2. Feedback. Trimble may freely use or exploit any Feedback you choose to
submit in connection with any of its products or services without any
obligation or restriction based on intellectual property rights or otherwise.
5. Payment.
You shall pay all fees associated with the Software licensed and any
Professional Services purchased hereunder as set forth in the applicable
Order Form. All payments shall be made in the currency in which they are
invoiced within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the applicable invoice, unless
otherwise specified in writing by Trimble. Except as expressly set forth in this
Agreement, all fees are non-refundable once paid. You shall be responsible for
all taxes, withholdings, duties and levies arising from the order (excluding taxes
based on the net income of the Trimble). Any late payments shall be subject to
a service charge equal to 1.5% per month of the amount due or the maximum
amount allowed by law, whichever is less.
6. Term of Agreement.
6.1. Term and Termination. This Agreement is effective as of the Effective Date
and expires when all License Terms hereunder have expired or been
terminated. Either party may terminate this Agreement (including all related
License Terms and Order Forms) if the other party: (a) fails to cure any material
breach of this Agreement within thirty (30) days after written notice of such
breach; (b) ceases operation without a successor; or (c) seeks protection
under any bankruptcy, receivership, trust deed, creditors arrangement,
composition or comparable proceeding, or if any such proceeding is instituted
against such party (and not dismissed within sixty (60) days). Except where an
exclusive remedy may be specified in this Agreement, the exercise by either
party of any remedy, including termination, will be without prejudice to any
other remedies it may have under this Agreement, by law, or otherwise.
6.2. Effect of Termination. Upon any expiration or termination of this
Agreement or the applicable License Term or Order Form, your license to the
applicable Software terminates and you shall cease any and all use of the
applicable Software, destroy all copies thereof and so certify to Trimble in

Contents
writing. Upon any expiration or termination of this Agreement, you will return
or destroy (and certify destruction of) any Trimble Confidential Information.
6.3. Survival. Sections 2.5 (License Restrictions), 2.8 (API Access and Customer
Applications), Section 3 (Data Rights), 4 (Ownership), 5 (Payment), 6.2 (Effect of
Termination), 6.3 (Survival), 7.3 (Disclaimer of Warranties), 7.4 (Disclaimer for
High Risk Activities), 10 (Limitation of Remedies and Damages), 11 (Confidential
Information), 12 (Compliance), 13 (Purchase from Reseller) and 14 (General)
shall survive any termination or expiration of this Agreement.
7. Limited Warranty and Disclaimers.
7.1. Limited Warranty. Unless otherwise specified in the Product-Specific

Terms, Trimble warrants to you that the Software shall operate in substantial
conformity with the Documentation (a) during the License Term for Software
licensed on a subscription basis, or (b) for all other Software, for a period of
ninety (90) days from the Effective Date (in each case, the “Warranty Period”).
Trimble’s sole liability (and your exclusive remedy) for any breach of this
warranty shall be, in Trimble’s sole discretion, to use commercially reasonable
efforts to provide you with an error-correction or work-around which corrects
the reported non-conformity, or if Trimble determines such remedy to be
impracticable within a reasonable period of time, either party may terminate
the applicable Order Form (and any associated License Terms) and you will
receive as your sole remedy a refund of (i) any fees you have pre-paid for the
Software for the terminated portion of the applicable License Term for any
Software licensed on a subscription basis, or (ii) for all other Software, the
license fee paid for the Software. Trimble shall have no obligation with respect
to a warranty claim unless notified of such claim within (1) thirty (30) days after
the date on which you first noticed the non-conformity and (2) the Warranty
Period.
7.2. Exclusions. The above warranty shall not apply: (a) if the Software is used
with hardware or software not specified in the Documentation; (b) if any
modifications are made to the Software by you or any third party; (c) to defects
in the Software due to accident, abuse or improper use by you; or (d) to Free
Offerings.
7.3. Disclaimer of Warranties. THISSECTION 7 CONTAINSA LIMITED
WARRANTYAND, EXCEPT ASEXPRESSLYSET FORTH IN THISSECTION 7, THE
SOFTWAREAND ALL PROFESSIONAL SERVICESAREPROVIDED “ASIS.” NEITHER
TRIMBLENORITSAFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSMAKESANYOTHER
WARRANTIES, CONDITIONSORUNDERTAKINGS, EXPRESSORIMPLIED,
STATUTORYOROTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES

Contents
OFTITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFORA PARTICULARPURPOSEOR

NONINFRINGEMENT. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSDO NOT
WARRANT THAT YOURUSEOFTHESOFTWAREWILL BEUNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR-FREEORTHAT ANYSECURITYMECHANISMSIMPLEMENTED BYTHE
SOFTWAREWILL NOT HAVEINHERENT LIMITATIONS. YOU MAYHAVEOTHER
STATUTORYRIGHTS. HOWEVER, TO THEFULL EXTENT PERMITTED BYLAW,
THEDURATION OFSTATUTORILYREQUIRED WARRANTIES, IFANY, SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THESHORTEST PERIOD PERMITTED BYLAW.
7.4. Warnings; Additional Disclaimers.
7.4.1. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATES, AND ITSSUPPLIERSWILL NOT BE

LIABLEIN ANYMANNERWHATSOEVERFORTHEOUTPUT
OBTAINED THROUGH USEOFTHESOFTWAREORCUSTOMER’S
RELIANCEON SUCH OUTPUT. CUSTOMERISRESPONSIBLEFOR
THESUPERVISION, MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL OF
CUSTOMER’SUSEOFTHESOFTWARE. THISRESPONSIBILITY
INCLUDESTHEDETERMINATION OFAPPROPRIATEUSESFORTHE
SOFTWAREAND THESELECTION OFTHESOFTWAREAND OTHER
PROGRAMSTO ACHIEVEINTENDED RESULTS. CUSTOMERISALSO
RESPONSIBLEFORESTABLISHING THEADEQUACYOF
INDEPENDENT PROCEDURESFORTESTING THERELIABILITYAND
ACCURACYOFANYOUTPUT OFTHESOFTWARE.
7.4.2. THESOFTWAREISNOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ISNOT
DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED ORINTENDED FORUSEIN LIFE
SUPPORT, MEDICAL, EMERGENCY, MISSION CRITICAL, CONTROL
ORGUIDANCEOFVEHICLES, DRONESOROTHERUNMANNED
MACHINES, OROTHERSTRICT LIABILITYORHAZARDOUS
ACTIVITIES, ORIN ANYOTHERSYSTEM WHOSEFAILURECOULD
LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, ORSEVEREPHYSICAL OR
ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE(COLLECTIVELY, “HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES”). TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATES, AND ITSSUPPLIERS
SPECIFICALLYDISCLAIM ANYEXPRESSORIMPLIED WARRANTYOF
FITNESSFORHIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. YOU REPRESENT AND
WARRANT THAT YOU WILL NOT USETHESOFTWARE(ORPERMIT
IT TO BEUSED) FORHIGH RISK ACTIVITIES, AND AGREETHAT
TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATES, AND ITSSUPPLIERSWILL HAVENO
LIABILITYFORUSEOFTHESOFTWAREIN HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
YOU AGREETO INDEMNIFYAND HOLD HARMLESSTRIMBLE, ITS

Contents
AFFILIATES, AND ITSSUPPLIERSFORANYDAMAGES, LIABILITIES

OROTHERLOSSESRESULTING FROM SUCH USE.
7.4.3. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSDO NOT OFFER
ANYWARRANTYIN CONNECTION WITH ANYTHIRD-PARTY
MATERIALS, WHICH AREPROVIDED “ASIS,” AND WILL BENOT BE
LIABLEIN ANYMANNERWHATSOEVERRELATED TO THIRD-PARTY
MATERIALS.
7.4.4. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSARENOT
RESPONSIBLEFORTHEOPERATION ORFAILUREOFOPERATION
OFANYGLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (“GPS”) ORGLOBAL
NAVIGATION SATELLITESYSTEM (“GNSS”) SATELLITESORBASE
STATIONS, ORTHEAVAILABILITYOFGPSORGNSSSATELLITE
SIGNALS. YOU ACKNOWLEDGETHAT THESOFTWAREAND
NETWORK ACCESSARESUBJECT TO TRANSMISSION LIMITATIONS
CAUSED BYA VARIETYOFFACTORSSUCH ASATMOSPHERIC
CONDITIONS, TOPOGRAPHICAL OBSTRUCTIONS, LIMITATIONS
ORLACK OFCOVERAGEOFTHEUNDERLYING CARRIERSERVICE,
AND OTHERNATURAL ORMANMADECONDITIONS.
ADDITIONALLY, MOTORAND IGNITION NOISE, METAL
SHIELDING, INTERFERENCEBYUSERSOFTHESAMEORADJACENT
RADIO CHANNELSMAYLIMIT ORINTERFERENCEWITH
COVERAGE.
7.4.5. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSARENOT LIABLE
FORDELAYS, FAILURESORPROBLEMSINHERENT IN USEOFTHE
INTERNET AND ELECTRONICCOMMUNICATIONSOROTHER
SYSTEMSOUTSIDEOFTHEIRCONTROL.
7.4.6. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSHAVENO LIABILITY
FORANYDEVICEAND MAKESNO WARRANTIESREGARDING ANY
DEVICE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION REGARDING
CONTINUED COMPATIBILITYOFTHESOFTWAREWITH ANY
DEVICE.
8. Support & Maintenance.
Trimble shall provide the support and maintenance services specified in the
applicable Order Form and/or the Product-Specific Terms during such period
as you have paid the applicable fee. Unless (1) Trimble and you have entered
into a separate written agreement for support and maintenance services or
(2) different terms and conditions are set forth in the Product-Specific Terms,

Contents
all such services shall be provided pursuant to Trimble’s then-current

Software Support and Maintenance Terms which are available at
https://www.trimble.com/support/SoftwareSSMTerms or a successor URL.
9. Professional Services.
Trimble shall provide the number of person-days, if any, of Professional

Services purchased in the applicable Order Form and any applicable
statement of work. Unless Trimble and you have entered into a separate
written agreement for Professional Services, all Professional Services shall be
provided pursuant to Trimble’s then-current Professional Services terms
which are available at https://www.trimble.com/legal/tandcforservices or a
successor URL (the “Professional Services Terms”). Unless otherwise specified
in the Professional Services Terms or such separate written agreement, you
shall have a license right to use anything delivered as part of the Professional
Services subject to the terms of your license to use the Software, but Trimble
shall retain all right, title and interest in and to any such work product, code or
Software and any derivative, enhancement or modification thereof created by
Trimble (or its agents).
10. Limitation of Remedies and Damages.
10.1. Consequential Damages Waiver. TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND

SUPPLIERSWILL NOT HAVEANYLIABILITYARISING OUT OFORRELATED TO
THISAGREEMENT FORANYLOSSOFUSE, LOST DATA, LOST PROFITS,
INTERRUPTION OFBUSINESS, ORANYINDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
RELIANCE, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESOFANYKIND, EVEN IFINFORMED
OFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCH DAMAGESIN ADVANCE.
10.2. Liability Cap. THEENTIRELIABILITYOFTRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATESAND
SUPPLIERSTO YOU ARISING OUT OFORRELATED TO THISAGREEMENT
SHALL NOT EXCEED IN AGGREGATETHEAMOUNT ACTUALLYPAID BYYOU TO
TRIMBLEDURING THEPRIORTWELVE(12) MONTHSUNDERTHIS
AGREEMENT.
10.3. Nature of Claims and Failure of Essential Purpose. The parties agree that
the waivers and limitations specified in this Section 10 apply regardless of the
form of action, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), strict liability or
otherwise and will survive and apply even if any limited remedy specified in this
Agreement is found to have failed of its essential purpose.
11. Confidential Information.

Each party (as “Receiving Party”) agrees that all code, inventions, know-how, business,
technical and financial information it obtains from the other party (“Disclosing Party”)

Contents
constitute the confidential property of the Disclosing Party (“Confidential Information”),

provided that it is identified as confidential at the time of disclosure or should be
reasonably known by the Receiving Party to be confidential or proprietary due to the
nature of the information disclosed and the circumstances surrounding the disclosure.
The Software, Documentation, and the terms and conditions of this Agreement will be
deemed Confidential Information of Trimble without any marking or further designation.
Except as expressly authorized herein, the Receiving Party will (a) hold in confidence and
not disclose any Confidential Information to third parties and (b) not use Confidential
Information for any purpose other than fulfilling its obligations and exercising its rights
under this Agreement. The Receiving Party may disclose Confidential Information to its
employees, affiliates, agents, contractors and other representatives having a legitimate
need to know (including, for Trimble, the subcontractors referenced in Section 14.12),
provided that such representatives are bound to confidentiality obligations no less
protective of the Disclosing Party than this Section 11 and that the Receiving Party remains
responsible for compliance by any such representative with the terms of this Section 11.
The Receiving Party’s confidentiality obligations will not apply to information that the
Receiving Party can document: (i) was rightfully in its possession or known to it prior to
receipt of the Confidential Information; (ii) is or has become public knowledge through no
fault of the Receiving Party; (iii) is rightfully obtained by the Receiving Party from a third
party without breach of any confidentiality obligation; or (iv) is independently developed by
employees of the Receiving Party who had no access to such information. The Receiving
Party may make disclosures to the extent required by law or court order, provided the
Receiving Party notifies the Disclosing Party in advance and cooperates in any effort to
obtain confidential treatment. The Receiving Party acknowledges that disclosure of
Confidential Information would cause substantial harm for which damages alone would
not be a sufficient remedy, and therefore that upon any such disclosure by the Receiving
Party the Disclosing Party will be entitled to seek appropriate equitable relief in addition to
whatever other remedies it might have at law. For the avoidance of doubt, unauthorized
access by third parties to any Confidential Information will not be deemed a breach of this
Section 11.
12. Compliance.
12.1. Export Control Compliance. You are responsible for complying with all
applicable export and import regulations and obtaining all necessary export
and import licenses or permits for the direct or indirect export or import of
any Software. You represent and warrant that (i) you are not located in a
country that is subject to a U.S. Government embargo, or that has been
designated by the U.S. Government as a “terrorist supporting” country; and (ii)
you are not listed on any U.S. Government list of prohibited or restricted
parties. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, you hereby

Contents
acknowledge and agree that the Software and any associated Confidential
Information are subject to the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and
were exported from the United States, if at all, in accordance with those
regulations. In the exercise of its rights, and the performance of its obligations
under this Agreement, you shall comply strictly with all U.S. export control laws
and regulations applicable to the Software, and shall not export, re-export,
transfer, divert or disclose any such Software, or any direct product thereof, to
any destination restricted or prohibited by U.S. export control laws, or to any
national or resident thereof. Your obligations under this paragraph will survive
the termination of this Agreement for any reason whatsoever. You will defend,
indemnify and hold Trimble harmless against any liability (including attorneys’
fees) arising out of your failure to comply with the terms of this paragraph.
Your failure to comply with any term of this paragraph will constitute a material
breach of this Agreement and entitle Trimble to immediately terminate this
Agreement in addition to any other remedy available at law or equity.
12.2. Anti-Corruption Compliance. You acknowledge Trimble’s commitment to
strict compliance with all applicable United States and international anti-
corruption and anti-bribery laws and regulations, including the U.S. Foreign
Corrupt Practices Act, the U.K. Bribery Act, and others (collectively, “Anti-
Corruption Laws”). You, and any third party acting on your behalf, shall comply
with all applicable Anti-Corruption Laws. You, and any third party acting on
your behalf, shall not directly or indirectly offer, promise, or give any payment
or anything of value to a government official, or any other individual or entity,
where the intent is to improperly influence any act or decision of the
government official, or other individual or entity, to obtain or retain business
or some other benefit or commercial advantage for you or Trimble. You, and
any third party acting on your behalf, also shall not solicit or accept any sort of
payment or anything of value from anyone, where the intent is to improperly
influence any act of you, any third party acting on your behalf, or Trimble. You
represent and warrant that neither you nor any of your officers, directors or
employees is a government official, and that you will not retain any
government official in connection with the performance of your activities
pursuant to this Agreement.
12.3. Compliance with Laws. You are responsible for complying with all
applicable laws, regulations and codes of practice in your use of the Software
and any results derived from the Software.
13. Purchase from Reseller.

If you obtained the Software through a Reseller, the following terms are applicable and
shall prevail in event of any conflict with any other provisions of this Agreement:

Contents
a) The terms of this Agreement constitute the only terms applicable to the
license of the Software to you, and no terms between you and the Reseller
shall apply to your use of the Software.
b) Instead of paying Trimble, you will pay the applicable amounts to the
Reseller, as agreed between you and the Reseller. If the Reseller fails to pay
Trimble the applicable fees for your use of the Software, Trimble reserves the
right to terminate the applicable License Term for such Software and all
related rights granted hereunder. Unless otherwise specified by Trimble, you
may purchase renewal License Terms for Software licensed on a subscription
basis under this Agreement directly from Trimble pursuant to an Order Form.
c) Your order details (e.g., the Software you are licensing, the License Term,
and the Scope of Use) will be as stated in the order placed with Trimble by the
Reseller, and the Reseller is responsible for the accuracy of any such order as
communicated to Trimble. The Reseller is solely responsible for delivering to
you the Software, Documentation and any License Keys (if applicable), and
Trimble has no liability for the Reseller’s failure to deliver such materials.
d) The Reseller may fulfill Trimble’s warranty obligations under Section 7.1
(Limited Warranty) on behalf of Trimble. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the
Reseller has no authority to make any statements, representations, warranties
or commitments on Trimble’s behalf and any such statements,
representations, warranties or commitments are null and void. If the Reseller
agrees to provide front-line support and maintenance services or Professional
Services to you, Trimble has no responsibility for such Reseller-provided
support and maintenance services or Professional Services.
e) In the event you are entitled to a refund under this Agreement, you must
request such refund through the Reseller. Any request sent directly to Trimble
may be redirected to the Reseller. Trimble will refund any applicable fees to the
Reseller and the Reseller shall be solely responsible for refunding such fees to
you. Trimble shall have no further liability to you in the event the Reseller fails
to refund such fees to you.
14. General.
14.1. Assignment. This Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of each
party’s permitted successors and assigns. Trimble may assign this Agreement
to any affiliate or in connection with a merger, reorganization, acquisition or
other transfer of all or substantially all of Trimble’s assets or voting securities
related to the subject matter of this Agreement. You may not assign or
transfer this Agreement, in whole or in part, without Trimble’s written consent.

Contents
Any attempt to transfer or assign this Agreement without such written

consent will be null and void.
14.2. Severability. If any provision of this Agreement shall be adjudged by any
court of competent jurisdiction to be unenforceable or invalid, that provision
shall be limited to the minimum extent necessary so that this Agreement shall
otherwise remain in effect.
14.3. Disputes. A party claiming that a dispute, difference, or question arising in
connection with the Agreement, including a question as to whether certain
services are in scope or not, has arisen (a “Dispute”) must give the other party
reasonable notice of the details of the Dispute (a “Dispute Notice”). When a
Dispute Notice is given, each party's senior executives with approval authority
(the “Dispute Personnel”) must meet and first attempt to resolve the Dispute.
The Dispute Personnel shall work in good faith to resolve the Dispute for a
period of 60 days from receipt of the Dispute Notice by the non-sending party,
or such longer period as may be agreed between the parties (the “Resolution
Period”). If the parties cannot resolve a Dispute in accordance with the
escalation procedure in this paragraph before the expiration of the Resolution
Period, either party may commence court proceedings. If a party breaches this
paragraph in relation to a Dispute, the other party need not comply with this
paragraph in relation to that Dispute. Subject to the terms and conditions of
the Agreement, the parties must continue to perform their respective
obligations under the Agreement pending the resolution of a Dispute. Each
party must pay its own costs of complying with this paragraph.
14.4. Notices and Reports. Any notice or report hereunder shall be in writing. If
to Trimble, such notice or report shall be sent to Trimble at its notice address
set forth in Section 14.16 (Region-Specific Terms), with a copy to: Trimble Inc.,
Attn: General Counsel - Important Notice, 935 Stewart Drive, Sunnyvale, CA
94085 USA. If to you, such notice or report shall be sent to the address you
provided upon placing your order. Notices and reports shall be deemed given:
(a) upon receipt if by personal delivery; (b) upon receipt if sent by certified or
registered U.S. mail (return receipt requested); or (c) one day after it is sent if by
next day delivery by a major commercial delivery service.
14.5. Amendments; Waivers. Except as otherwise provided herein, no
supplement, modification, or amendment of this Agreement shall be binding,
unless executed in writing by a duly authorized representative of each party to
this Agreement. No waiver will be implied from conduct or failure to enforce or
exercise rights under this Agreement, nor will any waiver be effective unless in
a writing signed by a duly authorized representative on behalf of the party

Contents
claimed to have waived. No provision of any purchase order or other business

form employed by you will supersede the terms and conditions of this
Agreement, and any such document relating to this Agreement shall be for
administrative purposes only and shall have no legal effect.
14.6. Entire Agreement. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive
statement of the mutual understanding of the parties and supersedes and
cancels all previous written and oral agreements and communications relating
to the subject matter of this Agreement.
14.7. Independent Contractors. The parties to this Agreement are
independent contractors. There is no relationship of partnership, joint
venture, employment, franchise or agency created hereby between the
parties. Neither party will have the power to bind the other or incur obligations
on the other party’s behalf without the other party’s prior written consent.
14.8. Force Majeure. Neither party shall be liable to the other for any delay or
failure to perform any obligation under this Agreement (except for a failure to
pay fees) if the delay or failure is due to unforeseen events, which occur after
the Effective Date and which are beyond the reasonable control of the parties,
such as strikes, blockade, war, terrorism, riots, natural disasters, pandemic,
epidemic outbreak, refusal of license or changes in law or regulations by the
government or other governmental agencies, in so far as such an event
prevents or delays the affected party from fulfilling its obligations and such
party is not able to prevent or remove the force majeure event at reasonable
cost.
14.9. Audit. Upon Trimble’s written request, you shall certify in a signed writing
that your use of the Software is in full compliance with the terms of this
Agreement (including any restrictions in the applicable Order Form). In
addition to the license compliance monitoring rights in Section 2.11 (Software
Activation and Metering), Trimble, or its authorized representative, may, upon
prior reasonable notice of at least ten (10) days, inspect and audit your
records and use of the Software to confirm your compliance with this
Agreement. All such inspections and audits will be conducted during regular
business hours and in a manner that does not unreasonably interfere with
your business activities. You are responsible for such audit costs only in the
event the audit reveals that your use is not in accordance with the licensed
scope of use and for unpaid license fees.
14.10. Publicity/Press Releases. Trimble may identify you as a customer of
Trimble and, with your consent (which may not be unreasonably withheld,
conditioned or delayed), Trimble may issue a press release describing the

Contents
parties’ relationship under this Agreement. In connection with these activities,

Trimble may use your trademarks and service marks, in accordance with any
brand usage guidelines you provide us. You shall not issue or make any press
releases, publications or public references regarding your relationship with
Trimble unless you first inform Trimble of such proposed publicity, submit all
proposed publicity materials to Trimble for review and obtain Trimble’s prior
consent in writing, in each particular instance. Subject to the foregoing,
nothing herein shall grant either party any right, title or interest in the other
party’s trademarks or service marks.
14.11. Government End-Users. The Software is commercial computer
software. If the user or licensee of the Software is an agency, department, or
other entity of the United States Government, the use, duplication,
reproduction, release, modification, disclosure, or transfer of the Software, or
any related documentation of any kind, including technical data and manuals,
is restricted by a license agreement or by the terms of this Agreement in
accordance with Federal Acquisition Regulation 12.212 for civilian purposes
and Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement 227.7202 for military
purposes. The Software was developed fully at private expense. All other use is
prohibited.
14.12. Subcontractors. Trimble may use the services of subcontractors and
permit them to exercise the rights granted to Trimble in furtherance of
Trimble’s performance under this Agreement, provided that Trimble remains
responsible for (a) compliance of any such subcontractor with the terms of
this Agreement and (b) the overall performance of Trimble as required under
this Agreement.
14.13. Open Source Software. The Software may contain or be provided with
open source software. Open source software may be identified in the
Documentation, or Trimble shall provide a list of the open source software for
a particular version of the Software to you upon written request. To the extent
required by the license that accompanies the open source software, the terms
of such license will apply in lieu of the terms of this Agreement with respect to
such open source software itself, including, without limitation, any provisions
governing access to source code, modification or reverse engineering.
14.14. Third-Party Materials. The Software may include third-party data,
content or proprietary software (collectively, “Third-Party Materials”). To the
extent specified by Trimble (including in any Product-Specific Terms), use of the
Third-Party Materials may be subject to additional terms or restrictions
(“Third-Party Terms”). You are solely responsible for your compliance with any

Contents
Third-Party Terms and failure to comply with such terms may result in
termination of your right to access any elements of the Software which utilize
such Third-Party Materials. If no Third-Party Terms are specified, you may use
Third-Party Materials solely in support of your authorized use of the Software
as set forth herein.
14.15. No Third Party Beneficiaries. This Agreement does not confer any rights
or remedies upon any third party except to the extent expressly set forth in
this Agreement.
14.16. Region-Specific Terms.
a) Trimble Entity. Unless otherwise specified in the applicable

Order Form or the Product-Specific Terms, “Trimble” for purposes
of this Agreement shall be determined based on the following:
Customer Trimble Entity Notice Address:
Location*
United States Trimble Inc. 935 Stewart
Drive, Sunnyvale,
CA 94085 USA
Any other country Trimble Europe Industrieweg
or geography not B.V. 187a, 5683 CC,
specified above Best, The
Netherlands
* Determined based on the address provided by Customer in the

Order Form.
b) Governing Law; Jurisdiction and Venue. The Agreement is
governed exclusively by the applicable governing law set forth
below without regard to conflicts of laws provisions and without
regard to the United Nations Convention on the International Sale
of Goods. The exclusive jurisdiction and venue for actions related
to the subject matter hereof are as set forth below, and both
parties hereby submit to the personal jurisdiction thereof.
Customer Governing Exclusive Venue/Jurisdiction
Location Law
United States California State of California and United
States federal courts located
in Sunnyvale, California
United England An arbitrator located in
Kingdom and Wales London, England, selected in
accordance with the

Contents
International Chamber of
Commerce (ICC)*
Australia New South Courts of New South Wales
Wales and the courts having appeal
from them
Any other The An arbitrator located in
country or Netherlands Eindhoven, The Netherlands,
geography selected in accordance with
not specified the ICC*
above
* Determined based on the address provided by

Customer in the Order Form.
* For the jurisdictions indicated, except as provided in
this paragraph with respect to injunctive relief, all
Disputes shall be finally resolved by binding and final
arbitration before a single arbitrator, selected in
accordance with the rules of the International
Chamber of Commerce (ICC). Any arbitration shall be
conducted at the indicated location in the English
language. After each party has been afforded a
reasonable opportunity to present written and
testimonial evidence in support of its position in any
such arbitration proceeding, the arbitrator shall issue
his/her decision and award, which shall (i) be in
writing, stating the reasons therefore, (ii) be based
solely on the terms and conditions of the Agreement,
and (iii) except as provided in this paragraph
regarding injunctive relief, be final and binding upon
the parties. The arbitrator shall not award punitive or
exemplary damages. The parties, their
representatives, and any other participants shall hold
the existence, content, and result of arbitration in
confidence. The provisions of this paragraph may be
enforced by any court of competent jurisdiction.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, either party may, at its
sole discretion, seek injunctive relief in any court of
competent jurisdiction (including, but not limited to,
preliminary injunctive relief).

Contents
c) Australia. For Customers who purchase the Software in

Australia, the following provisions apply:
Australian Consumer Law. For the purposes of this Section,
“Australian Consumer Law” means the Competition and
Consumer Act 2010 (Cth) and “Non-excludable Condition” means
certain consumer guarantees, warranties, rights, or remedies
under the Australian Consumer Law that cannot be limited,
excluded, restricted, or modified, and to which Customer may be
entitled. To the extent permitted by Law, Trimble’s liability in
relation to breach of any such Non-excludable Condition shall be
limited as follows (and in which “our” “or “us” means Trimble, and
“you” means Customer).
Our goods and services come with guarantees that cannot be
excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. For major failures
with the service, you are entitled:
●to cancel your service contract with us; and

●to a refund for the unused portion, or to
compensation for its reduced value.
You are also entitled to choose a refund or replacement for major

failures with goods. If a failure with the goods or service does not
amount to a major failure, you are entitled to have the failure
rectified in a reasonable time. If this is not done you are entitled to
a refund for the goods and to cancel the contract for the service
and obtain a refund of any unused portion. You are also entitled
to be compensated for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or
damage from a failure in the goods or service.
d) United Kingdom. For Customers who purchase the Software in
the United Kingdom, the following provisions apply:
A. Section 10.2 shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced
with the following:
“10.2 Liability Cap. THEENTIRELIABILITYOFTRIMBLE,

ITSAFFILIATES, AND ITSSUPPLIERSTO YOU ARISING
OUT OFORRELATED TO THISAGREEMENT SHALL
NOT EXCEED IN AGGREGATETHEAMOUNT
ACTUALLYPAID BYYOU TO TRIMBLEDURING THE

Contents
PRIORTWELVE(12) MONTHSUNDERTHIS
AGREEMENT. IT ISACKNOWLEDGED THAT THE
SOFTWAREISNOT BESPOKESOFTWAREAND IT IS
INTENDED AND AGREED THAT THISLIMITATION OF
LIABILITYAND THEDISCLAIMERSIN SECTION 7.3
SHALL APPLYTO THEFULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE
AT LAW BUT TRIMBLE, ITSAFFILIATES, AND ITS
SUPPLIERSDO NOT PURPORT TO EXCLUDELIABILITY
FOR:
(a) DEATH ORPERSONAL INJURYCAUSED

BYTHENEGLIGENCEOFTRIMBLE, ITS
AFFILIATESAND SUPPLIERSAND THEIR
RESPECTIVEOFFICERS, EMPLOYEES,
CONTRACTORS, ORAGENTS;
(b) FRAUD ORFRAUDULENT
MISREPRESENTATION;
(c) BREACH OFTHEOBLIGATIONS
IMPLIED BYSECTION 12 OFTHESALEOF
GOODSACT 1979 ORSECTION 2 OFTHE
SUPPLYOFGOODSAND SERVICESACT
1982; OR
(D) ANYOTHERLIABILITYWHICH MAY
NOT BEEXCLUDED BYLAW.”
B. Third Party Rights. Trimble’s Affiliates and suppliers

may enforce the terms of this Agreement in
accordance with the Contracts (Rights of Third
Parties) Act 1999 (“Act”). Trimble will owe no duty to
them to enforce such rights and it may conduct or
compromise any relevant proceedings as it sees fit.
Except as provided in this clause (B) or otherwise to
the extent expressly set out in this Agreement, a
person who is not a party to the Agreement shall not
have any rights under the Contracts (Rights of Third
Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any term of the
Agreement, but this does not affect any right or
remedy of a third party which exists, or is available,
apart from that Act.

ProDesign ME

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ProDesign ME

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ProDesign ME

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What does the document cover?

What does the document cover?

What are the system requirements for installing the software?

What are the system requirements for installing the software?

ProDesign ME

Cor por ate Office

Pr oduct Lim ited War r anty Infor m ation

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 2

5 The Ribbon Menu 22

6 Docking/Floating and Quick Access toolbars 25

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 3

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 4

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 5

Parallel Cables/Grouping: Installation in air 125

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 6

9 Calculations Tab 290

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 7

Cable Sizing 325

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 8

Purpose of Earth Fault Calculations 353

10 Reports Tab 381

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 9

Changing the field order 387

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 10

Street Lighting Schedule 441

11 Import/Export tab 456

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT 485

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 11

Computer (desktop or laptop)

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 12

l Microsoft Windows 10, version 1607 and above (32- or 64-bit).

To install from a DVD:

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 13

Activating the software

How do I activate the software?

Step 1 – Send a request code to Trimble MEP

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 14

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 15

Click ‘REQUEST ACTIVATION CODE.

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 16

Step 2 – Receive the activation code and activate your software

Do I have to activate all my programs separately?

Deactivating the software

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 17

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 18

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 19

What are Trimble Services?

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 20

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 21

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 22

For more information, see the Home Tab, page 54.

For more information, see Construction Tab, page 70.

For more information, see Calculations Tab, page 290.

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 23

For more information, see Reports Tab, page 381.

For more information, see Import/Export tab, page 456.

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 24

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 25

Quick Access toolbar

ProDesign MESoftware User Guide | 26